A in-
sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12- 24
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-10.2 Firearms Qualification
EFFECTIVE: 05/20/94
G
12-10.2.1 Firearms Qualification Policy | (See MIOG, Part II,
12-10.4; MAOP, Part I, 20-28.3.) |
to carry.
year.
(1) SAs must qualify with ALL weapons they are authorized
(2) |SAs must qualify a minimum of | four times per calendar
i
(3) SAs must qualify with each assigned handgun a
minimum of once per year. It is recommended that | weapons | regularly
carried on duty be fired for qualification at each firearms session.
(4) Specific training requirements are set out in the
Field Firearms Training Program submitted by the|FTU|for each calendar
year. |PFIs|are required to follow current established course
protocols set by the FTU.
(5) [Agents will qualify within their assigned division.
Agents assigned to FBIHQ, the Engineering Research Facility, and the
FBI Academy will qualify with the FTU at Quantico.
Exceptions:
(a) Agents assigned on a temporary duty basis to
another division which would preclude their qualification in their
assigned division, may qualify with the host division. It is the
responsibility of the PFI in the host division to ensure the TDY
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 12 - 25
i ■ .
Agent's scores are recorded and forwarded to the PFI of the Agent's
assigned division.
(b) Agents wishing to qualify with another division
for convenience must have the concurrence of the PFI from their
assigned division" and. the host division. The PFI of the host division
must record the visiting Agent's scores and forward these to the PFI
of the Agent's assigned division.
(c) Agents assigned to FBIHQ, the Engineering
Research Facility and the FBI Academy wishing to qualify with another
_division_must ..have_.the_concurrence_of^.the. FTU. and host PFI .__ The.. PFI
of the host division is responsible to ensure the visiting Agent's
scores are recorded and reported to the FTU. j
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-10.2.2 Recording] Firearms | Scores
(1) The names of SAs receiving firearms training should
be indicated on the Form FD-39 or an approved automated system.
(2) The individual scores shall be entered in the
appropriate column of Form FD-39. This form shall contain the names
of all SAs attending firearms | training and the make and model of
issue/approved firearm(s) used for qualification.] Supervising
firearms instructors shall be listed at the bottom of FD-39.
(3) After completion of a training period, scores are to
be transferred from the FD-39 to each SA's|FD-40 or automated form. |
FD-39s are retained.for one year, then destroyed; FD-40|is a permanent
record and [must accompany | the |SA's personnel file upon transfer.
(4) [The PFI or designated firearms instructor will score
the targets on qualifying courses.)
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
— — _~
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
12-10.2.3 Failure to Qualify
PAGE 12 - 26
(1) If an SA fails to qualify, the|PFl|must provide
remedial training and an opportunity to | qualify | on the next regularly
scheduled qualification day.
(2) After opportunities have been provided for
qualification | and failures continue to exist, the|PFI (must advise the
FTU|in the Annual Field Firearms Training Report.
(3) Employees must demonstrate proficiency to be
-permitted-to-carry-f irearms.- — If -the -employee-cannot- qualify- after
remedial | training on two out of three qualification attempts, | the SAC
must require the employee to surrender his/her firearm. |The Agent
will be issued his/her weapon only for training until such a time as
a qualifying score is shot. When an Agent's authority to carry a
firearm is rescinded, this action must be noted on the Agent's FD-40.
(4) Chronic unexcused delinquency or failure to qualify
should be reported to the FTU and Adjudication Unit, Office of
Professional Responsibility, with recommendations for administrative
action, if appropriate.!
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
| 12-10.2.4 Shoulder Weapons j- Qualification!
SAs will qualify with each assigned shoulder weapon | at
least] twice per year. | Agents are encouraged to train with weapons
they regularly carry at EVERY training session. SAs with an assigned
shoulder weapon will use that specific weapon when qualifying.
Agents not assigned a specific shoulder weapon will, at a minimum,
demonstrate proficiency with the shotgun, and MPS at least once per
year as specified in the Annual Field Firearms Program. |
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 — ' 27
12-10.3 |Firarms|Safety Rules
(1) Cardinal Rules:
(a) Treat all firearms as if they are loaded.
(b) Never point a weapon at anyone unless you are
| justified in doing so.)
(c) Keep your finger off the trigger unless you
^intend to shoot.
(2) General Rules:
(a) All live-fire FBI firearms training must be
supervised by an FBI Firearms Instructor.
(b) When transporting weapons on your person to and
from the range, handguns should be holstered; shoulder weapons should
be in a safe condition and carried with the muzzle pointed straight
up.
(c) Safety precautions must be adhered to and
enforced. Discipline must be maintained. Unsafe and careless
behavior will not be [ tolerated, should be reported, and may result in
recommendations for administrative action. |
(d) Immediately upon picking up a firearm, face a
safe direction, |activate the safety if present, remove any
ammunition, | open the action and check to see that the weapon is
unloaded. Check it again.
(e) Never give | to or receive | a firearm
from anyone, unless.) the weapon is unloaded and j the action is open
allowing the person receiving the weapon to see that it is unloaded.
Always present the weapon BUTT first.
(f) Never anticipate a command. | Avoid unnecessary
conversation, and pay| attention to instructors. You will be told
exactly what to do.
(g) Perform|a| safety check on the weapon before a
training session. Hake sure the weapon is | unloaded. | After training,
you j also need to ensure the weapon is unloaded before cleaning. |
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
G
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 12 - 28
(h) Load and unload only on the firing line and only
[when instructed to do so. | Any exceptions will be stipulated by the
lead Firearms Instructor.
(i) Keep the firearm pointed down range or|in a|
safe direction at all | times and ALWAYS be aware of potential dangers
in any direction your weapon may be pointed. |
(j) Use only one hand when holstering a handgun.
Any exception will be so stipulated by | the | lead Firearms Instructor.
— (k) — No smoking, . eat ing.or_ drinking, on the- firing—
[line because of health risks associated with lead residue.]
| (1) | Never permit the muzzle of a firearm to touch
the ground.
| (m) | In case of a misfire or malfunction, perform
| an | immediate action drill, unless instructed to do otherwise.
| (n) | After firing a shot that does not sound as loud
as it should, clear the weapon and check to see if a bullet is lodged
in the barrel.
| (o) | Never leave your firing position unless
instructed to do so.
| (p) j Never remove a weapon from the holster in
training, unless instructed to do so.
| (q) | Never dry fire on the range unless under direct
supervision of a Firearms Instructor. Exceptions will be specifically
identified by the lead Firearms Instructor.
j(r)|-Eye and ear protection are mandatory when firing
on the range. Ear plugs should be worn | ONLY [ IN CONJUNCTION with
proper sound| barriers and are NOT a substitute for issued or
equivalent hearing protection. |
| (s) | Everyone is responsible for range safety.
Immediately report any safety violations you see to a Firearms
Instructor.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 29
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
G
12-10.4 Firearms Training of | Non-Agent | Employees
As a rule, only Agents receive firearms training from the
Bureau. Exceptions are:
(1) Electronics technicians and security patrol clerks
-specif ically-authorized-by-FBIHQ. _____ .
(2) Uniformed Police Officers] of the FBI.|
(3) Other non-Agent personnel with special authority to
carryj firearms (e.g., Special Deputy U.S. Marshal).}
must:
(4) {Non-Agent personnel authorized to carry firearms
(a) be approved by their SAC or Section Chief
(b) comply with deputation requirements established
by the USMS, and
(c) be engaged in official activities for which the
carrying of a firearm has been authorized. |
| (5) | All non-Agent personnel who are authorized to carry
firearms will comply with all regulations in this section that
normally | apply to SAs (see MIOG, Part II, 12-10.2.1). | In addition,
they must also attend annual legal training, quarterly defensive
tactics training, and participate in the Fitness Indicator Test (FIT).
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 30
12-10.5 Police Firearms Training
(1) FBI firearms instructors may conduct police firearms
schools.
(2) Firearms training is to be given only to law
enforcement | groups unless an exception is authorized by the SAC (e.g.,
safety training for Bureau employees and their family). |
(3) | The primary firearms instructor must ensure that
ranges used for firearms training are inspected and contain no safety
-hazards -that-would-endanger-FBI-or -police-personnel . | — _
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Q
12-10.6
Firearms Instructors Policy (Formerly 12-10.6.1)
(1) To qualify as a Bureau firearms instructor,
candidates must attend the Firearms Instructor In-Service (FAIS)
presented by the FTU.
(2) To maintain instructor status, employees must qualify
quarterly and obtain the following minimum scores when these courses
are fired:
(a) 30 round bulls-eye course
1. One-hand score 240, or
2. Two-hand (optional) score 260
. (b) | Double Action Course | score |90|
(c) PQC score 90
(d) Shotgun 10A score 90
(e) MP5 (qualification course) score|90|
(3) To maintain instructor status, in addition to
shooting instructor level scores on courses listed in (2) above, each
instructor must participate in at least one documented Bureau firearms
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
training session per year.
PAGE 12 - 31
(4) Firearms instructors must attend a Recertif ication
Program with the' FTU at least once every four years. Agents
transferring out of the FTU are considered recertified for a period of
four years.
(5) Failure to comply with instructor requirements will
result in the loss of current status. The employee will be listed
officially as firearms instructor - inactive.
(6) -To regain active firearms instructor status, the.
employee must attend a Recertif ication Program at the FBI Academy and
demonstrate proficiency as noted in (2) above.
c
EFFECTIVE: 07/17/97
12-10.6.1 iRevised and Moved to 12-10.6 j
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-10.7 | Target Guidelines!
| (1) | STEEL TARGET POLICY
| (a) - Standard | service and training ammunition [may not
be used on steel targets | at distances less than ten yards. Some types
of frangible ammunition may | be used on | steel targets at closer
distances.
| (b) | To minimize|potential injury from j ricochets,
firing positions should be perpendicular to the target line.
| (c) | Construction of any steel targets MUST be
coordinated through the | FTU to ensure targets meet minimum hardness
and safety standards.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
aH
Sensitive
":£
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 32
(d) PFIs are responsible for permitting only | the use
of proper weapons and ammunition on steel | targets to prevent damage or
{ destruction to the target, reduce ricochet and prevent injury to
| personnel.
|' (e) | Steel targets must be inspected before each
training session.
{ | (f) [■ All personnel on the steel course site must
stand behind the shooter. In multiple courses, the shooter must not
be ahead of another shooter.
| (g) I All personnel on the steel course site must
continuously wear eye and ear protection, j Personnel on a steel course
should also wear issued body armor.
(h) Damaged targets, i.e., dimpled, punctured, or
bowed, are unsafe and should not be used. |
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-11
SHOOTING INCIDENTS (See MAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
EFFECTIVE: 10/17/95
12-11.1 Reporting of Shootings (See|MIOG, Part II, 12-11.8; JMAOP,
Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1). In all shooting incidents involving| the intentional
use of force by | FBI personnel jand in all incidents, intentional or
otherwise, WHERE INJURY OCCURS, notify the Violent Crimes and Major
Offenders Section (VCMOS) Chief, CID, JFBIHQ by| telephone, followed by
teletype. Similarly, in all shooting incidents occurring in joint
investigations or FBI led/controlled task forces where a non-FBI
participant fires a weapon, notify the VCMOS, CID, FBIHQ by telephone,
followed by an airtel within seven days.|
(2) |0ther instances J involving the discharge of a firearm
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
"* Wi \.'l-'.y<T:*?J
::"p«pj;('.'»'..pj».'i:"
la rt Mi irfi ah nir i •tt m, T m* 'z J t,tti kiiimmiJiiaiUi
r- r . **.-;>.■.■ — ~. | .. - t [% . x p-n , , 1 ^ ^[- 1 ^ u Tiwirr"-— '-*•
*"" ■■*—"■ ^— •*.*... *l ww.l-.. »_-.-
K.-.^'-Ji»
»• ■ . » i~ fanV ■»■< rf h Y' . iV i Ti i mUrt
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 33
•-.«
G
I |by FBI personnel |must be reported as soon as time permits by teletype
to the Chairperson, Shooting Incident Review Group (SIRG) , with a copy
to the Firearms Training Unit (FTU) . FD-418 (Shooting Incident
Report), in triplicate, is to be submitted to the FTU by airtel within
five working days. SA's FD-40 (Firearms Record) should be attached to
the FD-418.
(3) If an FBI employee is injured, designate one copy of
| teletype for the Office of | Public | and | Congressional Affairs. |
(4) SAC must personally ensure that investigations
.[ | related | to„Agentrinvolv.ed_shooting_incidents_are handled_quickly__and
properly.
(5) | If the SAC or ASAC was involved in the planning or
execution of events, FBIHQ should be advised during initial contact. |
(6) | Initial teletype should include the SAC's
recommendation whether the shooting inquiry should be conducted by the
field division under the direction of the SAC, or by a Shooting
Incident Response Team (SIRT) under the direction of an Inspector or
Inspector-in-Place (IIP). Generally, this determination is based on
the extent of SAC or ASAC participation in the planning and
operational events of the incident. |
(7) |The Assistant Director, Inspection Division (INSD) ,
in consultation with the SAC and Assistant Director, CID, will make
the determination whether a shooting inquiry will be conducted under
the direction of the SAC or an Inspector/IIP. |
(8) | If an Inspector/IIP is not dispatched to the scene,
the SAC will advise and confirm by teletype that he/she is directing
the necessary required shooting inquiry investigation, UACB. j
(9) (A shooting inquiry must be conducted under the
direction of the SAC when a weapon is discharged by FBI personnel
unless circumstances necessitate the inquiry be conducted under the
direction of an Inspector/IIP. |
(10) | In joint or task force investigations wherein a
local, state, or other federal law enforcement officer fires a weapon
or is shot, but no shots are fired by FBI personnel who are present:
(a) Joint investigation - SAC or ASAC will notify
FBIHQ by telephone, followed by an airtel delineating the following:
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■„»^miA.I>.;.jra«.i^, , «M.U»ii , iirv- .irr .-i-r ""^- '■ ■■■■■■ - ..-~.~+i~l ■^"-■■"- -
i , jiiifiiiT>"njiti l i7nt»iiiTiriiiiiiriiri*ftiii;; M ^i'i;;ir l t;'.i t - t ' ■' >^ y -;v;.i~~'r < Yv*^''^^ : "' it ''''' >
Sensitive
G
Manual o£ Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
1. Activities of accompanying officer and
circumstances which led to the shooting.
2. Details of raid/arrest plan.
3. Instructions given to accompanying officer.
4. Results of local shooting inquiry conducted,
if available; records of interview(s) , and analysis.
(b) FBI led/controlled task force:
PAGE 12 - 34
1. Include all of (a) above, plus:
a. Degree of FBI supervision exercised over
the officer's day-to-day investigative activities (generally reflected
in implementing Memorandum of Understanding (MOU)).
b. Chain of command within the task force.
c. A copy of any MOU delineating task force
responsibilities of non-FBI personnel.
(c) Submit within seven days, an original and 12
copies of the shooting incident airtel to the Assistant Director,
INSD, Rm. 7129, Attention: SIRG, with one copy designated to the
FTU.j
| (11) through (22) Moved to MIOG, Part II, 12-11.7,
12-11.8, and 12-11.9. |
EFFECTIVE: 10/17/95
12-11.2 Guidelines for Intervention at the Shooting Scene (See
MAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1) After the shooting scene has been secured, the first
concern expressed and acted upon will be that all Bureau personnel are
well cared for both physically and mentally.
(2) The Agent (s) involved in the shooting incident will
be permitted and encouraged to immediately contact his/her spouse
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II .
PAGE 12 - 35
and/or family. If the Agent has been injured, or if he/she feels it
would be useful, the Agent's family will be contacted immediately in
person by a designated Agent who knows the family personally. The
field office will also be notified of the Agent's condition so that
there will be a response to the family who called the office. It is
particularly important that family notification occur before press
and/or media accounts appear.
(3) Agents who have been personally involved in the
shooting incident will be removed from the scene as soon as possible
and not assigned further duties in the investigation of that incident.
(A) If the Agent's weapon is secured for evidence or
ballistics tests, another will be issued immediately unless there is
cause not to issue a weapon. The Principal Legal Advisor, Office of
General Counsel, FBIHQ, or the United States Attorney's Office should
be consulted if questions arise regarding whether an Agent's weapon
should be surrendered to local authorities.
(5) The SAC or ASAC will initiate a personal contact with
the Agent(s) and his/her family in a supportive role and offer
assistance, if needed. This contact will be made as soon as possible
following the incident (within the first 24 hours).
(6) The current Bureau procedure of not releasing the
identity of Agents involved in investigations or incidents is
especially important in post-shooting matters and will be maintained.
(7) An SAC should communicate with FBIHQ if any of the
established procedures appear to be inappropriate for a specific
incident.
(8) SACs and/or ASACs should hold an office conference,
as soon as practical, after a shooting incident and as often as
necessary to keep all personnel advised of pertinent details
concerning the shooting incident. This should substantially reduce
rumors and distorted accounts of the incident. (See MAOP, Part II,
8-1.3.2.)
EFFECTIVE: 05/20/94
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
mJ*m,ml*+* lmV i w.
*■*»««*■■»>!
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12
36
12-11.3 Guidelines For Intervention During The First Week (See
KAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1) The Critical Incident Program consists of several
specifically trained Agents and support employees located at the FBI
Academy, Quantico, Virginia, and throughout the field offices
administered from Personnel Division (PD) , FBIHQ.
(2) The Critical Incident Program also includes FBI
Chaplains in each field office who have been trained to respond to
Agent s~and support -employees- who- have_been_invblved-in-cr.itical
incidents including shootings.
(3) Bureau policy establishes confidentiality for any
conversations between employees and peer support employees or FBI
Chaplains.
(4) There are exceptions to this Bureau policy of
confidentiality which could require disclosure. These exceptions
might include, but are not limited to, risk of death or injury,
perspective criminal acts, or interference with Bureau investigations.
A decision to disclose must first be discussed with the Critical
Incident Program Manager, PD, FBIHQ. No assurance can be given that
the courts will recognize the confidential relationships established
by this policy. In a criminal or civil action arising from a critical
incident, the court could conceivably order disclosure notwithstanding
Bureau policy.
(5) The SAC or ASAC will advise the office FBI
Chaplain(s) of the critical incident and coordinate a request for peer
support with the PD, FBIHQ.
(6) A brochure is available to Agents/employees who have
been involved in shooting incidents covering:
course.
investigation.
(a) The symptoms to be expected and their normal
(b) Administrative handling of the post-shooting
(c) Legal aspects of the shooting incident.
(d) Counseling services available.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II * PAGE 12 - 37
(7) An official from FBIHQ will contact the Agent
personally by telephone. The scope and direction of this call is to
express concern for the welfare of the Agent and his/her family. The
Assistant Director, PD, will coordinate the personal phone contacts.
(8) A total of five optional days of administrative leave
are available to be taken (at sole discretion of) persons directly
involved in the shooting incident. The use of that administrative
leave will be strongly encouraged by the SAC. This leave may be taken
at any time at the discretion of the Agent and should be coordinated
with his/her supervisor. The Health Care Programs Unit (HCPU) , PD,
will furnish guidance concerning_.individuals eligible for. leave. and :
authority to grant leave. (Also see LEAVE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE.)
(9) An Agent directly involved in the shooting incident
should be advised by the SAC that the Agent can be reassigned from
his/her squad for a period of time if the Agent so desires.
(10) The SAC will immediately coordinate with HCPU, PD,
FBIHQ, if an Agent directly involved in the shooting incident requires
other special attention, to initiate the utilization of the mental
health professional resources of the Employee Assistance Program .
(EAP) .
(11) If an Inspector has been assigned to conduct the
shooting inquiry, he/she will review these intervention guidelines
with appropriate field office managers.
(12) In the event of an incident which involves the death
of an employee or a line - of~duty injury that results in the
hospitalization of the employee for serious injuries, the Director
desires to personally contact the employee or family and offer
comments that will contribute, even if in only a small fashion, to the
healing process that lies ahead, to facilitate these contacts the
following information should be relayed to the Director expeditiously,
usually by teletype.
(a) A brief description of the incident and the
nature of the injuries sustained.
(b) The name(s) and age(s) of the employee's
immediate family.
(c) Where and when the employee or family may be
reached.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
i'wi1«W«i» kmti.
Hi
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12
38
(d) Any other information that would be helpful
during the Director's contact with employee or family.
(13) Recognizing that the FBI's continuing concern can
significantly help the recovery of our employees and their families,
it may be beneficial for the Director to recontact them. The timing
of this recontact is left to the discretion of the SAC. Recontact
requests should be submitted by teletype to the Director's personal
attention and include the following information:
(a) The information requested above.
(b) An update on the condition of the employee or
family.
(14) More periodic expressions of concern by the immediate
FBI family will be led by the SAC. SACs should be aware of the
extensive support structure that exists in the HCPU of the PD. This
includes peer support, contract mental health professionals, FBI
Chaplains and the EAP. These resources should be used as appropriate
to provide our employees and their families with the support and
assistance they need during times of extreme trauma and sorrow.
EFFECTIVE: 05/20/94
12-11.4 Guidelines for Long-Term Issues (See MAOP, Part II,
8-1.3.2.)
(1) SAC or ASAC will personally make every effort to
facilitate the administrative investigation of a shooting incident.
(2) If a group of Inspectors from FBIHQ is required to
conduct an investigation of the shooting incident, an effort will be
made to ensure that at least one of the Inspectors has received
training in the effects of post-shooting trauma and, if possible, has
personally experienced a shooting incident.
(3) Agents should be allowed to pace their own return to
work following shooting incidents. The Personnel Division (PD) will
furnish guidelines concerning use of administrative leave. The SAC
and supervisor will be involved in this decision-making process.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 39
(A) If a transfer of an Agent to another squad following
a shooting incident is contemplated, consideration will be given to
the effects of the transfer on the adjustment period and the Agent
should be involved in the decision.
(5) The letter announcing the conclusion of a Bureau
investigation of a shooting incident will be phrased in a way that
takes into account the emotional impact on the Agent who has been
involved in a life-threatening situation and may have suffered post-
shooting trauma.
_(6) — SACs-and/or-ASACs or- the-Principal Firearms
Instructor should personally and individually provide the necessary
positive and/or negative feedback to Agents after the administrative
inquiry has been completed. This will also afford an opportunity to
ascertain if the involved Agent (s) is amenable to any formal
recognition, as warranted. Medals or incentive awards following a
shooting incident in which subjects have been seriously injured or
killed can have a negative psychological impact and/or be perceived as
a reward. However, medals or incentive awards may be appropriate, and
will be authorized if recommended and justified. Emphasis will be on
the effort to save lives.
(7) Agents who have been involved in a shooting incident
will not immediately be assigned to duties likely to involve armed
confrontations. This is even more important when a given Agent has
already been involved in a previous shooting incident. This
consideration should take precedence over other, action, including
transfers.
(8) Employees who have been involved in shooting
incidents will be afforded an opportunity to attend a Post-Critical
Incident Seminar at the FBI Academy. These group sessions will be the
basis for future modifications in policy and training and will also
provide a pool of employees able to provide meaningful peer support.
The group sessions provide a therapeutic understanding of the shooting
event. These conferences will be coordinated by the Training
Division's Behavioral Science Services Unit (BSSU) .
(9) PD's Employee Benefits Unit has prepared a booklet
captioned "Your Worker Compensation Benefits" for questions relating
to work-related illnesses and injuries. ,
(10) The PD Transfer Ombudsman had been designated to
serve as a single point of contact at FBIHQ concerning insurance and
compensation matters following a shooting. incident. The Ombudsman
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12
40
will be available on a case-by-case basis to respond following a
critical incident and offer assistance to victims and survivors of
that incident concerning insurance and compensation matters. The
Ombudsman attends Post-Critical Incident Seminars and maintains
contact with the Critical Incident Program Manager.
(11) Six months after the shooting incident, HCPU, PD,
FBIHQ, will contact the SAC of the Agent involved in the shooting
incident to determine if follow-up counseling is necessary.
EFFECTIVE: 05/20/94
c
12-11.5 Guidelines For Training (See MAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1) Training related to post-shooting trauma and its
management will be made available to Bureau administrative personnel.
A training block of this type will be presented by the Behavioral
Science Services Unit, (BSSU) , Firearms Training Unit, and the
Management Science Unit, Training Division. A presentation in this
area should also be incorporated into upcoming SAC Conferences, Senior
Executive Programs, and Executive Development Institute sessions.
(2) An orientation session by the BSSU on an introduction
to post-shooting trauma will be provided. to students during New Agents
training.
(3) In the planning of operations which have a high risk
of armed confrontations and/or may involve the use of deadly force, if
the SAC, ASAC or supervisor is aware of an Agent who is experiencing
high levels of personal and/or family stress or health problems,
consideration should be given to temporarily excuse the SA from
participating in the exercise in order to minimize the risk of
cumulative stress or trauma incidental thereto.
EFFECTIVE: 05/20/94
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
sa9«
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 41
| 12-11.6 Nondisclosure of Agents' Names in Shooting j Incidents |
MAOP, Part II, 5-2 (4) and 8-1.3.2.)
(See
Names of Agents involved in shooting incidents. in
performance of duty should not be volunteered to outsiders since
experience has shown that once their identities become a matter of
public knowledge, the potential that they and their families will be
subjected to harassment and possible retaliation substantially
increases. If identities of Agents involved in shooting incidents
have been made public through inclusion in public records or
_disclosur.e_at_public_proceedings.,_SACs_may_verify^the„AgentsJL —
identities in response to inquiries by news media representatives or
others.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
[ 12—11.7 Investigation of Shootings Involving FBI Personnel
(Formerly 12-11.1.) (See MAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1) An investigative inquiry of the shooting incident
will be conducted under the direction of the SAC or
Inspector/Inspector in Place (IIP), as appropriate, and a
comprehensive report issued.
(a) The SAC is responsible for preserving evidence
and instituting a logical investigation. SAC or SAC's designee should
personally coordinate investigation if an ; Inspector/IIP is not
dispatched to the scene.
(b) .The SAC will designate an investigative team to
conduct those shooting inquiries under his/her direction. The SAC
should use appropriate personnel and resources (Evidence Response Team
(ERT), Photographer, etc.) to conduct a thorough, factual
investigation of the shooting incident and to submit a comprehensive
report to the Shooting Incident Review Group (SIRG) . The SAC should
consider Laboratory Division assistance in appropriate circumstances.
(c) In the event an Inspector/IIP is dispatched to
the scene, the Shooting Incident Response Team (SIRT) will be
comprised of an Inspector or IIP and two or more Assistant Inspectors-
in-Place (AIIP) selected by the Chief Inspector, Inspection Division
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 42
G
(INSD) , and a forensic team comprised of a firearms examiner, visual
information specialist, and photographer selected by the Laboratory
Division.
(d) The SIRT under the direction of the Inspector or
IIP will report directly to the Chief Inspector, Office of
Inspections, during the shooting inquiry and be tasked with completion
of a thorough, factual investigation of the shooting incident and
submission of a comprehensive report to the SIRG, along with any
observations regarding safety and/or training issues identified
through the inquiry.
(2) Local authorities are to be contacted to clarify
jurisdiction and investigative responsibilities.
(3) All personnel and witnesses at the scene are to be
identified, located and interviewed.
(4) Agents involved in a shooting must be given
sufficient time to regain composure before being requested to provide
any statements. The official conducting the inquiry will consult with
the SAC or other appropriate personnel and consider such factors as
physical injuries or trauma experienced by the Agent involved in a
shooting to determine when an interview should take place.
(5) Avoid having involved Agent (s) conduct any
investigation and/or interviews relevant to the shooting. Do not,
however, delay substantive investigation to accomplish this. Separate
and remove involved Agent (s) from the scene as soon as practical.
(6) Forms FD-644 (Warning and Assurance to Employee
Requested to Provide Information on a Voluntary Basis) and FD-645
(Warning and Assurance to Employee Required to Provide Information)
are not to be used in investigations concerning shooting incidents in
the absence of specific, compelling reasons. Such a determination
will be made by the SAC or Inspector/IIP in consultation with the
appropriate FBIHQ officials. Prior to the use of the FD-645 in cases
where there is potential for criminal prosecution of the employee to
be interviewed, OPR, Inspection Division, must present the facts of
the case to OPR, DO J, and obtain an initial opinion that the matter
in question should be handled administratively rather than
criminally. (See MAOP, Part I, 13"6 (3) and MIOG, Part I, 263-5 (3).)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 43
EFFECTIVE: 10/17/95
12-11.8 Shooting Inquiry Report (See MIOG, Part II, 12-11.1;
MAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1) Results of an inquiry in all shooting incidents
involving the intentional use of force by FBI personnel and in all
incidents, intentional or otherwise, WHERE INJURY OCCURS, are to be
submitted to FBIHQ within two weeks -in -the form of an investigative
report. The shooting inquiry is primarily a fact-finding effort and
must be objective, thorough, and factual;' Observations regarding
safety and/or training issues identified during the inquiry should be
included in the report.
(2) Report should be captioned "Shooting Inquiry, Report
of Shooting Incident; (name of Reporting) Division; (date of shooting
incident); Admin Hatters; (66F classification)." The report should
specifically reference, using case caption, the substantive violation,
if any, involving the shooting incident, e.g., "John Doe; First
Savings Bank; 3/6/95; BR; 00: NY; UCFN #." Reference should also be
made to the teletype that initially advised FBIHQ of the shooting and
the communication which forwarded the FD-418s.
(3) The report should contain appropriate enclosures and
exhibits, to include but not limited to: medical reports, coroner or
autopsy reports, police reports, crime scene diagrams, radio logs,
criminal record and NCIC checks, military records of subjects if
pertinent, weather information, firearms and ballistic information
(include Laboratory Reports if available or FD-302 summary of
laboratory analysis) , videos from local news media, shooting incident
reconstructions, and crime scene photographs.
(4) No accomplishments should be claimed in the Shooting
Inquiry report. Any accomplishments achieved at the time of the
shooting incident should be claimed by a communication under the
substantive title.
(5) The Administrative section of the report should
include information concerning decisions regarding interview of
subject (s), pertinent administratively controlled material, informant
information, and observations regarding training and/or safety issues.
SAC analysis and recommehdation(s) for administrative action, if
deemed warranted, should be set forth in this section of the report.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 44
(6) A table of contents should be utilized to organize
and identify report contents. Following is an example of items which
might normally be included:
(a) Interviews of personnel involved - include
signed, sworn statements of all Bureau employees principally involved
in the shooting incident. Interview all Bureau personnel directly
involved in the investigation and/or planning leading to the shooting
incident. Any arrest or raid plans pertinent to the incident should
be carefully spelled out in statements obtained from the person (s) in
charge of the raid/arrest.
Interviews in shooting inquiries should be handled without the use of
Forms FD-644 and FD-645, unless there are specific factual situations
or complaints which might raise concerns about the shooting. Should
these arise, the details should be discussed with the Chief Inspector,
Inspection Division (INSD) , prior to conducting any interview of
Bureau personnel. -
(b) Interviews of witnesses - include FD-302s of all
witnesses to the shooting incident. Persons interviewed should be
apprised of the access provisions of the Privacy Act and afforded the
opportunity to request confidentiality in accordance with MIOG,
Part I, 190-7 and SAC Memo 51-77 (C) dated 11/15/77.
(c) Investigation regarding subject (s) -, include
such information as criminal records, if available, and interviews of
associates which are germane to shooting (i.e., individuals involved
in circumstances surrounding the shooting incident, co-arrestee,
etc.). If possible, include interview of subject (s) regarding the
shooting. Such an interview is often quite productive in obtaining
admissions from the subject (s) directly pertinent to the shooting
incident. Statements made by subject (s) contemporaneous to the
shooting oftentimes^ may be important to the overall evaluation of the
incident by the SIRG.
Apprehension FD-302 should be included. Prepare FD-302 reporting that
subject did not, was not known to have, or refused to comment on the
shooting, if applicable.
(d)* Medical reports - include medical reports and
interviews with medical personnel clarifying the nature and gravity of
all wounds or injuries as a result of the shooting. Indicate weapon,
entry and exit of individual shots, if determinable. If fatalities
involved, include coroner or autopsy reports.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Kanual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ; PAGE 12 - 45
(e) Vehicles involved - describe all pertinent
vehicles and indicate damage incurred. Describe any other property
damage.
(f) Weapons involved - include FD~302s reflecting
weapons and ammunition used by Agent (s), officer(s) and subject (s)
involved and disposition or custody of weapons following the shooting.
(g) Maps, diagrams, photographs, and other graphic
depictions or representations of shooting incident scene and/or
• scenario. — — — ■ — _ _ , . __.. ._
(h) Police reports - include copies of reports, if
available, plus any statements made regarding possible prosecutive
action against Bureau personnel. Include copy of communications with
local prosecuting attorney.
(i) Prosecutive status of subjects.
(j) Laboratory reports - laboratory reports should
be included in the Shooting Inquiry report, if they are available. If
laboratory examinations have not been completed, preliminary results
should be reported by a summary FD-302. Results of forensic
processing conducted at the scene may be' included in the form of a
laboratory report or an FD-302, whichever is deemed most suitable by
the forensic expert (s).
(7) To assure accuracy and completeness of the Shooting
Inquiry report, SAC or Inspector/IIP should confer with the Chief
Inspector, Office of Inspections, INSD.
(8) Submit an original and 12 copies of the
report to the Assistant Director, INSD, Rm. 7129, Attention: SIRG,
with one copy designated to the FTU. The INSD will distribute copies
to members of the SIRG.
EFFECTIVE: 10/17/95
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 46
c
12-11.9 Shooting Incident Review Group (Formerly 12-11.1.) (See
MAOP, Part II, 8-1.3.2.)
(1) The Shooting Incident Review Group (SIRG) is an
independent review committee established to analyze all shooting
incidents involving Bureau personnel and to evaluate the application
of deadly force in such incidents. The SIRG is to provide the
Director with an evaluative analysis, observations, and
recommendations for corrective actions from an operational standpoint,
if any, as well as recommendations concerning training issues, safety
_issues_and_adminis.trative„ act ion, __if _deemed_nec.es sary.
!
■>m
(2) Scope and Purpose: The SIRG will review all shooting
incidents wherein Bureau personnel employ deadly force, as well as all
incidents where a firearm is discharged in a nontraining setting.
(a) The SIRG will determine if the shooting under
review was intentional or unintentional. This will govern the
standards applied in the review as the FBI's Deadly Force Policy will
only be applied where the shooting. was intentional.
(b) The SIRG will deliberate and determine if the
shooting incident falls within the application of the FBI's Deadly
Force Policy and the law.
(c) The SIRG will review operational plans,
procedures, tactics and circumstances leading to the shooting
incident.
(d) The SIRG will review issues associated with
safety, training, and management oversight and make recommendations
for administrative action, if deemed necessary.
(3) The .SIRG will be comprised of representatives from
the following:
(a) Inspection Division (INSD) - Deputy Assistant
Director, (Chairperson) and Chief Inspector, Office of Inspections,
(Alternate Chairperson);
(b) Criminal Investigative Division;
(c) National Security Division;
(d) Training Division;
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 47
G
(e) Personnel Division;
(f) Office of the General Counsel;
(g) Laboratory Division;
(h) Field Supervisor (preferably one who has been
involved in a shooting incident) from the Washington, D.C.
Metropolitan area.
(i ) D epartmen t of Justice Att orney(s ) as del egated
by the Deputy Attorney General.
(4) The SIRG will deliberate and report its analysis by
issuing a memorandum of findings and recommendations to the Director.
This memorandum will be reviewed by the SIRG members, each of whom may
provide additional comments, observations, or recommendations by
attaching an addendum to the memorandum.
(5) The findings and recommendations will be submitted
from the SIRG by the Chairperson to the Assistant Director, INSD, for
approval and forwarding to the Director. An information copy of the
SIRG memorandum of findings will be disseminated to the substantive
Assistant Director (CID or NSD) as appropriate, and to other
appropriate entities (Training, Personnel, etc.).|
EFFECTIVE: 10/17/95
12-12
HOLSTER/ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
(1) SAs must train with holsters and related equipment
normally used on duty at each firearms training session.
(2) Holsters are not provided for personally owned
weapons .
(3) Personally owned holsters must be approved through
[ the | PFI | before use.
(4) Alterations j of any holster, such as removing a thumb
brake, is|not permitted.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
V
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part u PAGE 12 - 48
(5) Accessory equipment, i.e., magazine or speed loader
pouches, ammunition | pouches, etc.,|must be maintained and inspected in
the same manner as |a]holster.
(6) Each SA is responsible for the proper maintenance of
all holsters and accessory equipment under his/her control.
(7) Bureau-issued holsters/accessories, when worn or
damaged beyond repair may be replaced through the FBI Academy Gun
Vault.
^8) All strong side belt holsters will meet the following
requirements:
(a) Must be able to draw and reholster the handgun
with one hand.
(b) The holster must not require the trigger finger
to pass through the trigger guard to release the weapon.
(c) the holster must secure the weapon during
strenuous physical activity (running, climbing, upside down, etc.).
(9) "Miscellaneous holsters" (refers | to shoulder holsters,
belly bands, ankle holsters, inside pants holsters, cross-draw
holsters, fanny (butt) |packs, etc.|
(a) All regulations that exist for strong side hip
holsters apply with the exception that it is permissible for the weak
hand to steady the holster while returning the weapon. However, no
holster will be approved that REQUIRES using both hands to draw the
weapon.
(b) Firearms instructors are to ensure that proper
safety is exercised during training with any miscellaneous holster.
(10) SAs should use both Bureau-issued and personally
owned holsters and other firearms equipment during firearms training
sessions to ensure familiarity.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
"g r s j ' y. ' i f -i.i "4 , - !>»■! ,w ' .; ' . i ' ;t « ;.v, ' , ' ^ " g ■ ■»
■v^V-x^-^^V"^-*"^^.-. v
.. . in . - i .ii i f . „■ ■*, . t , n.- l , . ii,v,iwinn riiv^;,;), , ,^,,,,,,,,,,;,,,, ,-, i.^,,^,,^-, 1 - l .^:.,v^^.-,^.^.^^^-^^AJ^ ^-
OPCA-20 (12*90. - ..#_ H XXXXXX
xxxxxx
XXXXXX
FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION
FOEPA
DELETED PAGE INFORMATION SHEET
G
<?
«/
Page(s) withheld entirely at this location in the file. One or more of the following statements, where indicated
explain this deletion. '
Deletions were made pursuant to the exemptions indicated below with no segregable material available for
release to you.
Section 552 Section 552a
D M 1 ) O (b)(7)(A) □ (d)(5)
"(b)(2) - □ (b)(7)(B) □ (j)( 2 )
n (b)(3) □ (b)(7)(C) D (k)(D
O (b)(7)(D) □ (k)(2)
13 (b)(7)(E) Q (k)(3)
a (b)(7)(F) a <k)<4)
(b)(4) n (b)(8) □ ( k )(5)
n ^X 5 ) a (b)(9) n (k)(6)
a (b)(6) □ m(7)
D Information pertained only to a third party with no reference to the subject of your request or the subject of your
request is listed in the title only.
□ Documents originated with another Government agency(ies). These documents were referred to that agency(ies)
for review and direct response to you.
Pages contain information furnished by another Government agency(ies). You will be advised by the FBI as
to the releasability of this information following our consultation with the other agency (ies).
Page(s) withheld inasmuch as a final release determination has not been made. You will be advised as to the
disposition at a later date.
Pages were not considered for release as they are duplicative of
Page(s) withheld for the following reason(s):
HZ The fdlowinftnumber is to be used for reference regarding these paces:
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
X Deleted Page(s) X
X No Duplication Fee X
X for this page X
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FBI/DOI
>
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ; . PAGE 12 - 58
12-15 DEMONSTRATIONS AND TOURS
(1) Only authorized firearms instructors |may| present
"live fire" | demonstrations, and then only with the express consent of
the SAC or designee. |
(2) Any other SA may present Bureau firearms for
demonstration using "red-handle" weaponry! or live
with trigger guard locks or similar j devices | which
from firing.
weapons equipped
prevent | the weapon
(3) The safe condition of all weapons used for
demonstration- should be]verified by a Bureau firearms instructor
BEFORE use. | (The general safe condition of firearms is action open,
safety on, and weapon free of any live ammunition.) Demonstration
weapons should never be pointed at another person.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-16 MEDICAL PROFILE SYSTEM - MEDICAL MANDATES (RESTRICTIONS)
| (1) | Agents on medical mandates are to be permitted to
participate in firearms training, | including (defensive tactics,
PROVIDED the Agent's evaluating| physician is | fully familiar with the
Agent's (condition, the nature of the | training to be undertaken, and
furnishes a written statement that, in the physician's opinion, such
participation would not be injurious to the Agent's health or
dangerous to others. (See MAOP, Part I, 20-5.2.1 (2).)
| (2) | In instances where the evaluating physician does not
certify the Agent to attend training and the prospects for (future
participationjare remote due to the Agent's condition, authority to
carry a firearm|will be rescinded|and any Bureau-issued weapon turned
in. (See MAOP, Part I, 20-5.2.1 (3).)
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
=**j%Ctt<LV?*K&?r : sz?7:
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12
59
12-17
TRAINING SAFETY
| (1) All training exercises or scenarios which incorporate
the use of loaded or unloaded firearms must be supervised by a
currently qualified Bureau firearms instructor.
(2) The supervising firearms instructor must ensure that:
(a) all necessary firearms and ammunition safety
checks are conducted prior to commencement of training.
(b) all firearms safety rules and precautions are
adhered to by all participants.
(c) all facilities and training props are safe and
absent of potential hazards to all personnel.
(3) The primary instructor may designate assistants as
required; however, the ultimate responsibility for safety rests with
the primary instructor.
(4) Under no circumstances will the primary or assistant
instructors become active participants or role players during the
training exercise or scenarios.!
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
| 12-17.1 |Deleted|
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-17.1.1 Deleted
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■ ■ . ' ■ > \ M ■■ '■y T »T j ... ■ ■' . » ; « ; w ^^. iyfi ./ i H j ii ai i M ffr
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 12 - 60
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-17.1.2 iDeletedl
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
12-17.1.3 (Deleted!
Vr a
j. EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'.' i ;v *."-'■ ■".'.r'Ti'Trn;':
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II s PAGE 13
SECTION 13. LABORATORY DIVISION AIDS TO INVESTIGATIONS
13-1
INTRODUCTION TO FBI LABORATORY DIVISION
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-1.1 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
I 13-2
AVAILABILITY AND USE OF LABORATORY FACILITIES
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-2.1
Availability of the FBI Laboratory
As a general rule, services of the FBI Laboratory are
available to:
(1) U.S. Attorneys, military tribunals, and all other
Federal agencies in both civil and criminal matters. (Requests from
USAs for any Laboratory services (including trial charts) ,
examinations and testimony of FBI Laboratory experts should be made
through FBI field offices.)
(2) All duly constituted state, county, and municipal law
enforcement agencies in the United States and territorial possessions
in connection with their official investigations, but in criminal
matters only.
V
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-2.1.1 Stipulations
PAGE 13 -
All Laboratory services, including expert witnesses, are
rendered free of all cost to the requesting agency, but in offering
these services, experience has dictated the following limitations in
the interest of economy to avoid duplication of effort and to ensure
the proper administration of justice:
(1) No examination will be conducted on any evidence
which has been previously subjected to the same type of technical
examination. This requirement is intended to eliminate duplication of
__ef f or.t .and..ensure._the_integri ty_of _the _evidence. is maintained An
exception may be granted by the Laboratory Division to this policy
when there exist compelling reasons that a reexamination be conducted.
These reasons should be set forth in individual letters from the
director of the laboratory which conducted the original examination,
the prosecuting attorney, and the investigating agency which collected
and submitted the evidence for laboratory analysis. (Note: A check
will be searched through the National Fraudulent Check File even
though it has been technically examined by or searched through a check
file maintained by another agency.)
(2) No testimony will be furnished if testimony on the
same technical subject and in the same case is to be given for the
prosecution by another expert.
(3) No request for examination will be accepted from a
nonfederal law enforcement agency in connection with criminal cases
if it is indicated that only a civil case will grow out of it.
(4) No requests for examination will be accepted from
other laboratories which have the capability of conducting the
requested examinations. (Exceptions to this policy may be made, in
extenuating circumstances, upon approval of the Assistant Director of
the Laboratory.) . .
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
| 13-2.1.2 |Deletedj
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'•(A-
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 -
EFFECTIVE: 09/09/93
13-2.2
Use of Other Laboratories or Other Forensic Experts
Since materials of evidentiary value located at a crime
scene or otherwise obtained during FBI investigative activities offer
invaluable potential for investigative information and probative
J results, these materials |should|be submitted, except in circumstances
detailed in subsection 13-2.2.2 below, to the FBI Laboratory in lieu
of„other_laboratories„or. other__f or ens ic_ experts, because.
(1) The facilities of and the expertise within the FBI
Laboratory provide the best in available scientific analyses and
technical services
(2) The FBI is appropriated money yearly by Congress to
operate its own Laboratory to provide laboratory services in matters
of interest to the Bureau.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-2.2.1 Cases Involving Joint Jurisdiction
Diplomacy and good judgment must be exercised in the
instances which arise in cases of joint jurisdiction where state,
local, and/or other Federal laboratories either handle or maintain
custody of materials of evidentiary value obtained by their personnel
either prior to or after FBI involvement so as to:
(1) Prjotect the integrity and "chain of custody" of these
materials of evidentiary value in the event the final mutual agreement
is that the matter under investigation is to be prosecuted in the
Federal judicial system with the FBI having the responsibility of
primary jurisdiction and
(2) Demonstrate the FBI has the proper professional
respect for the technical and scientific, competence of these other
laboratories and the investigative efforts of their law enforcement
personnel.
(3) In matters where physical evidence has been
Sensitive ■
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Hanual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II „* . ■ - PAGE 13 _
previously examined by a state or local crime laboratory and the FBI
Laboratory is directed by the Department of Justice to conduct a
reexamination, the head of the laboratory which conducted the original
analysis will be promptly notified of this action by the Laboratory
Division.
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
.13-2.2.2__.Cases_Involving_Sole_EBI_Jurisdiction_| (See_MI0G, PartJI,
13-2.2.) |
[ When circumstances dictate, FBIHQ will consider requests
for the use "of non-Bureau forensic experts. The following conditions
.must be observed:
(1) Only the FBI Laboratory should conduct forensic
| examinations of evidence in FBI investigations. Only under
extenuating circumstances should other laboratories or forensic
experts in private practice be consulted or their services requested.
This should only occur after prior contact, and with the approval of,
| the FBI Laboratory by [electronic communication (EC) , | teletype, or
| telephone and then confirmed by|EC|or teletype. Such communications
should include:
(a) A synopsis of the circumstances necessitating
the use of an outside forensic expert.
(b) The name of the local expert (s) and their local
laboratory affiliation, if any,
(c) The name and office telephone number of the case
Agent , and
(d) The personal endorsement of the SAC that such
action is needed.
(2) this procedure is necessary to ensure:
(a) That the needed services or examinations cannot
be performed in a timely fashion by submitting the evidence to the FBI
Laboratory due to extreme urgency of the situation, or that FBI
Laboratory personnel could not travel to the requesting location and
perform the services or examinations;
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 -
. (b) That when circumstances so warrant, and FBI
Laboratory approval is given, only competent and reputable forensic
experts be utilized who are recognized as reliable within the forensic
science community.
(3) If FBI Laboratory approval is obtained for the use of
non-FBI Laboratory experts, those experts must assure that all
necessary examinations are being performed since federal violations
frequently require different elements of proof than do state or local
violations of the same or similar nature and,
(a) That nothing will be do~ne which will destroy "the
usefulness of the evidentiary material;
(b) That the local expert be advised of the
willingness of the FBI Laboratory to be consulted on the scientific
and technical aspects of the examination (s) and to provide additional
examinations which may not be possible locally;
(c) That a copy of the local expert's examinations
report be promptly furnished to the FBI Laboratory.
(A) Under no circumstances should "curbstone" opinions be
sought of local scientific or technical personnel to assess the
potential value of evidentiary materials prior to submitting these
items to. the FBI Laboratory for examination. Preliminary local
analyses could
materials,
(a) Cause alteration and/or contamination of these
(b) Create a conflict of opinion due to variations
in testing procedures,
(c) Unduly complicate the "chain of custody,"
(d) Severely hamper the effectiveness of the
Bureau's efforts, and
(e) Create unnecessary legal issues which could
arise subsequently in the prosecution process.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part XI . PAGE 13 - 6
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-3 REQUESTING LABORATORY ASSISTANCE
The information under this caption as well as that
contained elsewhere in this section under the particular type of
examination or assistance desired should be consulted to facilitate
the submission of requests to the Laboratory Division.
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
*3 3.1 Requests for Examination(s) of Evidence (See MIOG, Part
I, 9-7; II, 13-17.3.)
A request for an examination must be in written form and
forwarded with the evidence. A telephonic request must be followed
with a written official communication. The incoming communication
must be sent with each case and should include a listing of ' the
suspect/subject, victim, violation, location and date of offense, case
file number, a brief description of the case, a detailed description
of the evidence enclosed, the request of the Laboratory and a contact
name and number. A written request for Laboratory Division services
must bear a single title and a single Universal Case File Number. If
additional cases need to be intercorapared with the listed title, that
request should be in the body of the incoming communication, not
identified by additional titles. All requests should be addressed to
the Director, Federal Bureau of Investigation, with an attention line
in accordance with 13-3.1.1 below and contain the following
information:
(1) Reference to any previous correspondence submitted to
the Laboratory in the case.
(2) The nature of and the basic facts concerning the
violation insofar as they pertain to the laboratory examination.
(3) The name(s) and sufficient descriptive data of any
subject, suspect, or victim.
(4) Each case submitted to the Laboratory must be
individually packaged and placed in an appropriate evidence container.
The evidence container must be placed under proper seal, labeled with
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 -
appropriate warning labels, contain a single titled communication, and
shipped via trackable carrier. Lab exam requests should contain a
list of the evidence being submitted either "herewith" or "under
separate cover." (Note: Due to evidential "chain of custody"
requirements, all evidence sent through the U.S. Postal Service (USPS)
system must be registered mail and not by parcel post or regular mail.
If United Parcel Service, Federal Express, or air freight is used,
utilize their "acknowledgment of delivery," "protective signature,"
"security signature," or any other such service which provides the
same protection as USPS registered mail.) Only evidence for the first
captioned case should be submitted with each communication. (See
JiIOg.._Pgr$_II t _13r3..-1.2 (9), 13-6. 7 and 13-6 .7.1. )
■■nt-
(a) "Herewith": This method is limited to certain
small items of evidence which are not endangered by transmission in an
envelope. Utilize the specially designed evidence envelope (Form FD-
632). Execute written portion of envelope BEFORE placing evidence
inside to preclude damaging or altering evidence and to prevent
addition of indented writing. Insert the evidence and securely seal
the envelope. Fold up the flap marked "PLEASE STAPLE CORRESPONDENCE
TO THIS FLAP" and. securely attach the written communication which
should state "Submitted herewith are the following items of evidence."
(b) "Under separate cover": This method is
generally used for shipment of numerous and/or bulky items of
evidence. The written communication should state "Submitted under
separate cover by (list the method of shipment be it USPS, United
Parcel Service, Federal Express, or air freight) are the following
items of evidence." For further information concerning the
preparation of packages sent under separate cover see 13-3.1.2 below
as well as 13-6.6 (Packaging Chart) illustrated in the "Electronic
Reference Library Searching Guide" Appendix.
(c) "Packaging": An evidence container is defined
as any container that houses items of evidence in a manner which
maintains the integrity of those items. To further this definition, a
primary container is the container that is in direct contact with the
evidence. For example, an envelope housing a fraudulent document or a
vial containing blood would be considered a primary container. A
primary container must be placed in a secondary container which must
be leakproof and puncture-resistant, when the evidence so warrants
additional protections. A secondary container is needed only when wet
evidence, such as liquid blood, or a sharp item, such as a needle or a
knife, is submitted to the Laboratory for examination. Each item of
evidence must be packaged separately to avoid contamination. Each
case must be submitted individually. The Laboratory Division will
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
■ *"S?
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 -
strictly endorse the related portions of MIOG, Part II, 13-3.1.2(3)
and 13-3.1.2(4) .
. -(d) "Sealing": All containers must be properly
[ sealed with| tamper-evident | tape. A container is properly sealed only
if its contents cannot readily escape and if entering the container
results in obvious damage/alteration to the container or its seal. A
proper seal consists of taping the evidence container over or
I along the opening with| tamper-evident | tape and placing the initials of
the person creating the seal over the tape. A proper seal is not
created by simply stapling the evidence container closed, nor is it
LP ro P e y I y sealed when a c ontain er opening_ijs_exposed. | Tamper-evident j
tape is available through FBI central supply or " thTTvi dence ConTrbl" -
Technician. (See 13-3.1.2.)
(e) "Warning Labels": A warning label alerts the
recipient of the potential hazards of the evidence enclosed, therefore
appropriate warning labels must be placed on an evidence container in
a visible area. Biological hazards (biohazards) fall under the
Bloodborne Pathogen guidelines. (See 13-3.1.2.)
Biohazardous evidence (evidence containing any biological
material) must be labeled with a biohazard sticker. If the item is or
contains dried body fluids, such as blood, semen, or saliva, a primary
container is the only container needed and the biohazard sticker is
placed on the outside of the primary container. If the item is or
contains wet body fluids, the primary container must be placed in a
secondary container and the secondary container must be labeled with a
biohazard sticker. (See 13-12.4.1.)
Because of the importance of compliance with using proper warning
labels, FBIHQ will remind the field of the policy when a noncompliant
submission is received. If the case Agent or Evidence Control
Technician neglects to affix appropriate warning labels, the | examiner
orjexaminer's Unit Chief will call the supervisor of the case Agent or
Evidence Control Technician to alert that supervisor of the
noncompliant submission. Pursuant to the contact, a letter describing
the noncompliant submission will be sent to the Assistant Director in
Charge (ADIC) or Special Agent in Charge (SAC).
(5) A request stating what types of examinations are
desired. Include, if applicable, comparisons with other cases,
listing captions of these cases and Bureau file numbers, if available.
(6) Information as to where the original evidence is to
be returned as well as where the original Laboratory report is to be
...jff..
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
sent.
PAGE 13 -
(7) A statement, if applicable, as to whether
„„ rtf u t . ^ The evide "ce has been examined previously bv
»!£?? T Pert ^ the Same technical ^eld (provide a copy of any
report (s) generated by other experts, if available)
or
(b) Any local controversy is involved in the case,
.(c)_ : _Any . non-Bure«u^law_enXo_r«ment ...agencie_s have an
interest in the case.
(8) Notification of the need and reason(s) for an
rou P Snel 1 rre^U^ i ° n ^^ '" Ui " th " t '~ t -» t sh <~ ld "" be
(9) If damage occurs in the mail system or evidence is
Uoo^-i y / aCkaged r the «'•«»* ° f the evidence has D eeT
jeopardized as a result, the case Agent will be notified. If the
made e8 bv " ° ^ t^T* h " bMn ««P«.i..d, a decisis w 1 l be
made by appropriate laboratory personnel as to what, if any, forensic
examinations can or will be conducted. This policy is imperative to
weirbT "V^'"* of the -^ence and to'protect tnHIJe ^
well being of the persons handling these submitted materials.
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-3.1.1 Attention Lines for Communications and Packages (See MIOG,
Part II, 13-3.1, 13-3.1.2(8) and (10).)
as oos ,iM P 16 fo ^ owin * guidelines should be adhered to as closely
FBI P SX:rte°rs a :° ld "" "^""^ d * la * '« 'he routing of mail Jt
markad "At-V.^ A11 J eq "" tS f ° r a iabor atory examination should be
marked Attention: FBI Laboratory, Evidence Control Center."
(2) Deleted
(3) Deleted
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part " PAGE 13 - 10
t . ^ Requests for photographic processing ONLY should be
submitted on the FD-523. (Note: . Whenever a package containing
exposed film is sent to the Laboratory the word "FILM" should be
clearly marked on the outside of the package.)
(5) Requests for photographic laboratory examination of
any kind should be marked "Attention: FBI Laboratory, Special
Photographic Unit." . V
(6) Requests for BOTH photographic processing and a
fingerprint examination should be submitted on the FD-523 and, in the
_area„for_reque.st.,ja_rJced^AtteiLtion:_J i ^oratory Division, Evidence
Control Center." " "7 ~ ~ " — ~ —
C) Requests for the enhancement, processing and
examination of video imagery where no comparison with known
photographs or items of clothing are required or requests for the
production of video tape demonstrative evidence should be marked
| Attention: FBI Laboratory, j Special Photographic |Unit."
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13 3.1.2 Shipment of Evidence "Under Separate Cover" (See MIOG
Part II, 13-3.1(4) (b).)
The following steps should be followed to properly prepare
a package for shipment of numerous and/or bulky items of evidence
apart from the original written request for the examination (s) . For
additional guidance and instructions see 13-3.1(4) (b) , (c) , (d) , and
(e) above and 13-6.6 (Packaging Chart) below. (Note: Comply with the
following steps (1) through (9) if a cardboard box is used and step
(10) if a wooden bo* is used):
CD Take every precaution to preserve the items of
evidence as outlined in the applicable sections of the Evidence Chart
U3 6.7) as well as afford appropriate physical protection of the
if™/.* n8 2; pr£ /^ ther * on t0 include identification with the word
LATENT. (.See (10) below.)
(2) Choose a cardboard box suitable in si
ze.
(3) Place nonporous items of evidence in a separate
container to avoid contamination and for preservation of latent
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•fe
Sensitive ■ •. . ■"■'*.
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part H PAGE 13 - 11
prints. (See Part II, 13-3.1(4) (c) and 13-3.1.2 (10) below.)
(4) Do not place evidence from more than one case in the
same box. (See Part II, 13-3.1(4) (c) and 13-3.1.2 (10) below.)
(5) Pack the evidence securely within the box to avoid
transit or puncture of box and protrusions/loss of
(See (10) below.)
(6) Seal the box with gummed tape and clearly mark the
outer portions of the box with the word "EVIDENCE." (Note: If any of
the evidence in the box is to be sub jected t o_a_ latent-_fj ng g^pj^t
examination, also clearly mark the outer portions of the box with'the - ~ —
word "LATENT.")
damage in
evidence.
(7) Place a copy of the original written request for the
examination(s) in an envelope marked "INVOICE" and securely affix this
envelope to the outside of the sealed box.
(8) Enclose the sealed box in wrapping paper and seal the
wrapping paper with gummed tape. Prepare the address label,
addressing the package to the Director, Federal Bureau of
Investigation, 935 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Washington, D.C. 20535-
0001, with the proper attention line as outlined above in 13-3.1.1.
Cover the label with yellow transparent tape to identify the shipment
as evidence and place it securely on the package.
(9) Ship the package by U.S. Postal Service, United
Parcel Service, Federal Express, or air freight in accordance with the
note in 13-3.1(4) above and the Evidence Chart (13-6.7).
(10) Choose a durable wooden box suitable in size and
<»> Comply with the above steps (1), (3), (4), and
(b) Securely fasten the lid on the box and address
it to the Director, Federal Bureau of Investigation, 935 Pennsylvania
Avenue, NW, Washington, D.C. 20535-0001, with the proper attention
line as outlined above in 13-3.1.1.
. 5°^ Place a C0 Py of the original written request for
the examination (s) in an envelope marked "INVOICE." Place the invoice
envelope. in a clear plastic cover, and tack it to the box.
(d) Comply with step (9) above.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^~* T**J~ r*WT-,7Ty;
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
' PAGE 13 - 12
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-3.2 Requests for Other Laboratory Assistance
F„™ pn *«■» ^ests for artist conceptions should be submitted on
For* FD-383. Requests for photographic processing, printing,
2 llKZvl' ll C " Where "° examination ^ involved must be submitted
-opn fJ^m Lt._ RequesXs _Iqr^other SpecialJ>rojects Section services
should be submitted on an FD-790. | Requests for translations, " tr"ul"~
exhibits, and on-the-scene Laboratory assistance in photographic
surveillances, evidence examinations, or crime scene searches (e.g.,
bombings) and questions concerning photographic, polygraphs, forensic
training, or other Laboratory matters should be submitted in a written
communication, m triplicate, directed to the FBI Laboratory.
«^rTV f ,, tin,e J? ° f the eS86nce ° r the •*i*«nei« of the case are
"IIt'i I lep J onica ! lv contact the Laboratory Division, referring to the
FBI Laboratory Directory of Support Services," for the unit which
provides the desired assistance. If after consulting the Directory,
problems or questions still exist, call the office of the Assistant
Director, extension 4410.
EFFECTIVE; 09/03/93
13-4 RESULTS OF EXAMINATION (S) OF EVIDENCE
The results of evidential examinations conducted in the
Laboratory are recorded in a written report.
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87
Sensitive'
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
''■■'ill
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ... .
PAGE 13 - 13
13-4.1 Dissemination of Laboratory Report I (See MAOP, Part II
10-13.13.) |
J Normally| three | copies of each laboratory report are
furnished to the
(1) Office(s) contributing evidence,
(2) Office of origin,
— —(3) — ° f fic.es_designated_by_the_contributor(s).,_and
(4) Those offices determined by the Laboratory to have an
interest in the case depending on the results of the examination(s) .
(a) The original] and two copies | of the report will
usually be sent to the office of origin in those instances where there
are several offices contributing evidence, as well as those instances
in which a contributing office makes such a request.
(b) If evidence is submitted to the Laboratory by a
non-Bureau agency in a case in which the Bureau has or may have a
joint jurisdiction, a report will be furnished the contributor
with | three I copies of the report designated for interested Bureau
offices, to include the office of origin.
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
13-4.2
Inclusion of Laboratory Report in Other Reports
A copy .pf a laboratory report may be included in other
| reports prepared in the field. J Some (laboratory reports are sent to
the field under the cover of a Laboratory Transmittal Form (7-72)
commonly referred to as the Administrative Page(s). These
I Administrative|Pages|are not part of the laboratory report and
therefore should not be included in any reports prepared in the field.
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■Ml
Sensitive
...-.■# .4-
MJfi:
PAGE 13 - 14 - l --$#
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-4.3 Rule 16. (Discovery and Inspection)
A portion of Rule 16 of the Federal Rules of Criminal
Procedure states "Reports of Examinations and Tests. Upon request of
a defendant the government shall permit „the defendant to inspect and
copy or photograph any results or reports of physical or mental
examinations, and of scientific tests or experiments, or copies
thereof, which are within the possession, custody, or control of the
government, the existence of which is known, or by the exercise of due
diligence may become known, to the attorney for the government, and
which are material to the preparation of the defense or are intended
_i°JLme^y_J:h_e_,gpj^ejrnm^^^ chief at the_ trial . "_ Thi s_
request must be made before the court and "Upon a" suf flcient "showing
the court may at any time order that the discovery or inspection be
denied, restricted, or deferred, or make such other order as is
appropriate."
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83 -f
13-4.4 Laboratory Reports and the Disposition of Submitted tl"
Evidence
(1) Each laboratory report will normally contain a
statement concerning the original evidence being returned herewith,
under separate cover, or with the results of another examination such .'^
as a latent fingerprint examination. ■ - '■#*>
(2) Whenever original evidence is returned by the
Laboratory to the contributing office(s) or to the office of origin,
upon the request of the contributor (s) , it should be checked against
those items listed in the written request as well as in the laboratory
report to ensure all the evidence has been returned.
(a) If any discrepancies exist, extreme care should
be exercised in examining all of the packing material utilized in the
shipment of the evidence in order that the missing items will not be
inadvertently disposed of with this material. The FBI Laboratory
should be advised immediately of any discrepancies.
(b) |Deletedl
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
..sv
4 >"•."
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 15
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-5
TESTIMONY OF LABORATORY EXAMINERS
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
13-5,1
Availability of Service
Laboratory examiners are available for expert "testimony ~~
concerning their examinations provided no other expert is used by the
prosecution in the same scientific field. (Note: This restriction is
generally used in the interest of economy and to avoid duplication of
effort.)
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
13-5.1.1 Testimony at Trials
The absence of examiners from FBIHQ should be kept to a
minimum; therefore,
(1) Every effort should be made to utilize the services
of these witnesses as quickly as possible, consistent with good trial
procedures.
(2) Whenever practical, arrange for their immediate
release following court appearance.
(3) In_most cases the presence of an expert witness is
NOT required by the court during the jury selection and, consequently,
he/she need not be present when the case is called.
(4) Whenever it is possible to anticipate when the expert
testimony will be required, arrangements should then be made to have
the witness present at that time, rather than earlier in the trial.
| (5) Laboratory should be notified of the trial dates or
other judicial deadlines as soon as they are known or set. I
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II.
PAGE 13 - 16
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13 5.1.2 Grand Juries and Preliminary Hearings
| (1) | Laboratory experts are available to testify at such
hearings but requests for their appearance should not be made unless
absolutely necessary because in most cases the laboratory report, an
affidavit, or the testimony of the case Agent will suffice.
(2)
If. all attempts to obviate the appearance of a
Laboratory expert have been exhausted, the FBI~LabolraFol^h6irid~be~
advised in detail of the unusual circumstances which make the presence
of an expert absolutely necessary.
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
§!■'■
13-6
HANDLING OF PHYSICAL EVIDENCE
V-Tf-
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
13-6.1
Definitions of Evidence
(1) That which is legally submitted to a competent
tribunal as a means of ascertaining the truth of any alleged matter of
fact under investigation before it.
(2) Anything which a suspect leaves at a crime scene or
takes from the scene or which may be otherwise connected with the
crime.
•rife?
"3S'
&
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'■■Ts%
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
, Patt " ■:: " PAGE 13- 17
13-6.1.1 Terminology '"'.'-
», . fc „ " Phvsical »" "real," "tangible," "laboratory," and
t i „l, " e 8l1 » d J •««*•■ to describe the types of evidence which
| the FBI | Laboratory Division examines. |
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
_J-«b£ ?_2 Pur pose of Ph ysi cal Evi dence ___
(1) Aids in the solution of the case because it can
(a) Develop M.O.'s or show similar M.O.'s.
(b) Develop or identify suspects.
(c) Prove or dispose an alibi.
. (d) Connect or eliminate suspects.
(e) Identify loot or contraband.
(f) Provide leads.
(2) Proves an element of the offense, for example.
(a) Safe insulation, glass or building materials on
suspect s clothing may prove entry.
00 Stomach contents, bullets, residue at scene of
fire, semen, blood, toolmarks may all prove elements of certain
offenses.
(c) Safe insulation on tools may be sufficient to
prove violation of possession of burglary tools statutes.
(3) Proves theory of a case, for example,
(a) Footprints may show how many were at scene.
00 Auto paint on clothing may show that a person
was hit by car instead of otherwise injured.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 18
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
13-6.3
Nature of Physical Evidence
•r- .. F ° r the m ° St part ' P h y sic al evidence falls into two
classifications.
EFFECTIVE: 01/26/83
13-6.3.1
Evidence with Individual Identifying Characterise
cs
This evidence can be positively identified as having come
from a specific source or person if sufficent identifying
characteristics or sufficient microscopic or accidental markings are
present. (Examples are: fingerprints, handwriting, bullets,
e^r^' h Sh °%^ i !J tS * ! ie " S ° f glaSS and plastic whe " the broken
edges can be matched, and wood where broken/cut surfaces can be
|matched and fabric and tape (torn ends).)!
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
13 6.3.2 Evidence With Class Characteristics Only
„„i„ k. , C i 3 - I hiS e y idence ' no mat ter how thoroughly examined, can
only be placed into a class. A definite identification as to its
source can never be made since there is the possibility of more than
one sourc? for the evidence found. (Examples are: soil, blood,
IT!'. M ''/ ainffrM a S3fe ° r car ' * U " ^agments too small to
match broken edges, and toolmarks, shoe prints, or bullets, in those
instances where the microscopic or accidental markings are
insufficient for positive identification.)
. (2) Ifc is desirable to have evidence that can be
positively identified, but the value of evidence with class
characteristics only should not be minimized. In cases involving
evidence with class characteristics only, the following are desirable:
(a) A preponderance of such evidence.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 19
. , . ' ^ A preponderance of class characteristics within
a singe item of evidence such as paint with many layers all matching
or soil with foreign matter such as paint chips, odd seeds, and safe
insulation.
(c) Elimination specimens such as soil from where a
suspect claims he/she was or where he/she claims a car was; soil from
the surrounding areas to show that a variation does exist; and paint
or other materials from a source mentioned in an alibi.
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
13-6.4
Crime Scene Search
A crime scene search is a planned, coordinated, legal
search by competent law enforcement officials to locate physical
evidence or witnesses to the crime under investigation. In order to
be effective a crime scene search should include the steps outlined in
paragraphs 13-6.4.1 through 13-6.4.8 below. (Note: For additional
information concerning a bombing crime scene search see paragraph
13-6.5 below.)
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-6.4.1 Protect|and Secure|the Crime Scene
u ,. v ,° nly P? rsons wh0 have a legitimate investigative interest
should be allowed into the crime scene. This number should be kept to
a minimum. Too many people in a crime scene can lead to evidence '
being moved or destroyed before its value as evidence is recognized.
jOnce the scene is established, it should be protected diligently. |
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 20
13-6.4.2 Conduct a Preliminary Survey of the Crime Scene for the
Purposes of Establishing Firm Organizational and Planning
Guidelines
This is the planning stage of the search. The plans
should include:
(1) Form objectives of the search - what is to be found.
(2) Take special note of evidence that may be easily
destroyed such as shoe prints in dust, footprints, etc.
(3) Organize the search.
• < a > Make assignments for photographs, fingerprints,
plaster casts, and evidence handling.
. , (b) Decide on search pattern, i.e., lane, grid,
spiral or zone searches.
(c) Issue instructions to assisting personnel.
(4) Write a narrative description of the general
conditions of the crime scene. These are the investigator's original
notes which will be used to refresh his/her memory at the trial. They
should be an accurate description of the crime scene and should
include:
(a) Date, time, and location of the search.
(b) Weather and lighting conditions.
(c) Identity of others participating in the search.
(d\ Assignments given other personnel.
(e) Condition and position of evidence found.
I
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■WW
Sensitive!
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-6.4.3 Photograph the Crime Scene
PAGE 13 - 21
(1) Crime scenes will not remain undisturbed for very
long, and therefore should be photographed as soon as possible,
preferably before anyone is allowed into the scene.
(2) |When possible, a medium-format (120-roll film) camera
such as the Mamiya 645 should be used. If not available, then the
35mm camera should be used. Crime-scene photographs will be taken in
daylight or with electronic flash; therefore, the best film choice is
either Kodacolor Gold 100 or Vericolor Professional III Type S (VPS)
--If.using„yPS,_set_camera_and flash.ISO settings at 80 instead of 160
which is indicated on the film instructions. It is noted that numerous"
stages of a crime scene investigation will involve photography. A
constant awareness must be maintained in order to ensure that the
original crime scene is photographically recorded. As discoveries are
made, these also should be photographed. I
(a) Exterior crime scene:
1 ' Establish the location of the scene by
taking a series of overall photographs to include a landmark. (360
degrees coverage if possible)
2 « Establish the location of the building
through a series of overall photographs. (Aerial photographs obtained
at a later date may be useful.) Oblique and verticals.
... . 3 ' l^y item of importance should have two
additional photographs made of it. A MEDIUM-di stance photograph that
depicts the item and shows its relative position to other items in the
immediate area and a CLOSE-UP photograph with a scale if possible. |
..... . *• Take a series of close-up photographs of
individual items of. evidence to include filling the film frame
showing proper perspective and avoiding oblique angles if possible.
QBlack and white slow-speed film should be used as needed to record
shoe prints in dust, documents, fingerprints, etc.)
5. |A11 entrances/exits into the crime scene
area should be photographed. |
(b) Interior crime scene:
*• Utilizing a series of overall photographs,
photograph rooms and other interior areas from all sidesTin an
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 22
overlapping series. It may be useful to make some photographs with a
wide-angle lens, but, as mentioned before, these should be noted on
the "photo log," Form FD-674. |
..... 2 - I Any iten > of importance should have two
additional photographs made of it. A MEDIUK-distance photograph that
depicts the item and shows its relative position to other items in the
immediate area and a CLOSE-UP photograph with a scale if possible. |
3. IDeletedl
4. IDeletedl
(c) Evidence photographs are needed to:
1« Record the condition of individual items of
evidence before recovery. (Photographs must show the evidence in
detail and should include a scale, photographer's initials, and the
date.)
2. Conduct laboratory examinations of evidence
such as shoe prints, tire impressions, and that obtained from bank
robberies. (Photography should be performed before any attempts to
lift or cast. Photographs should show identifying data as indicated
above.)
3. Support testimony given in court.
(Photographs should be of professional quality and very detailed.)
,C3) I The sequence of photographs varies with each scene.
Logic should dictate what order to proceed with photography based on
the fragility of a given area and your ability to maintain control of
the scene. If you feel that exterior areas are in danger of being
contaminated, then start with those. As long as all the needed
photographs are made, the order in which they are made is not
critical. |
(*) | Crime-scene photographs should be made with the
normal lens for the camera in use (80mm lens with the 120-roll film
camera, 50mm lens with the 35mm camera) whenever possible. The
normal '> lens maintains the same perspective that your eye gives you
looking at the scene. A series of overlapping photographs can be made
ILl It S » are ?» ? glVen SpaCC 3re recorded - " »^ng a lens other
than the normal" lens, such as a "wide-angle" lens, to be able to
photograph a larger area in a single photograph, it should be noted in
the photo log (FD-674). (See paragraph (5).)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13— 23
.. v t , ,. A record of Photographs taken should be kept on a
photo log, Form FD-674. It is not necessary to record the shutter
speed and f/stop used. It will be very useful to record the item
description and, in some cases, the location of an item and/or the
photographer may be significant. A quick drawing showing this should
be done in the provided space on the form. (This drawing in no way is
a substitute for the crime scene sketch.) This information can then
be used later for identifying photographs and as an aid in testimony. I
EFXE_CTJVE;_02/_12/92_
13-6.4.4 Sketch the Crime Scene
A crime scene sketch is a handmade pictorial
representation of conditions at a crime scene. (Floor, plans are
sometimes available from commercial concerns to aid in sketching.) It
is useful in clarifying investigative data and to make the situation
easier to understand by eliminating unnecessary detail. A sketch does
not replace photographs at the crime scene and should be used to show:
(1) Dimensions of rooms, furniture, doors, windows, etc.
(2) Distances from objects to entrances and exits
(3) Distances between objects (including persons/bodies)
(4) Measurements showing the exact location of items of
evidence. Each object should be located by two measurements from
nonmovable items, such as doors, walls, etc.
(5) Point-of-view locations of photographs
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-6.4.5 Process for Fingerprints
See Part II, Section 15, of this manual for instructions
on fingerprinting a crime scene.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 24
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-6.4.6 Make Shoe Print/Tire Tread Casts and/or Lifts
-.,.*• * See Paragraphs 13-19.1 through 13-19.1.3 elsewhere in this
«H/i° n ,-S instructl0ns on the "»""« of ^oe print/tire tread cases
ana/ or xitcs*
E FFECTIVE; 2/12/92
Q
13-6.4.7 Collect, Identify and Preserve the Evidence
. . For additional information on the collection,
J! e 2 t 7 fl ^*'i 0n ' *"? P reserv » tion <>f items of evidence, see paragraph
13-6.7 (Evidence Chart) and/or the appropriate paragraphs eLewSere in
this section concerning the type of examination desired.
(1) Collection.
.._,., < a) A11 evidence must be collected legally in order
In ?K.*f' ,1S T-? le l n C - Urt at S iat " date - For further instructions
on the legality of crime scene searches, refer to the Legal Handbook
ror Special Agents.
. ( b) Evidence found during a search should be
displayed immediately to another Special Agent so that both Agents can
testify Co its source.
t , (c ^ A11 evidence should be fully described in the
searcher s notes and photographed in place prior to being picked up.
t „ < d) I£ appropriate, Form FD-597 (Receipt for
Property Received/Returned/Released/Seized) should be properly
executed and the copy furnished to the contributor and/or the
?«™ m!«5°- Wh r u^ ? ro P ertv iB bein « surrendered. The original of
Form FD-597 is to be placed m the 1-A exhibit envelope of the case
(2) Identification.
, ., L _, AU f rti <=les of an evidentiary nature should be
carefully marked for identification, preferably on the article itself,
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II '
PAGE 13 - 25
in a manner not to injure the evidence itself and not to be
obliterated. These markings, to include initials, date and case
number enable the person finding the evidence to testify, at a later
date, to the finding of it.
(3) Preservation.
(*) Each item of evidence should be placed in a
suitable container, such as pillboxes, plastic vials or strong
cardboard boxes. The container should be suitably identified and
sealed.
G>) Prepare appropriate 1-A envelopes | (FD-340a
and/or FD-340b) J and/or Forms FD-192 and store the evidence in
designated areas.
^ For submission of evidence to the laboratory for
examination see 13-3 (Requesting Laboratory Assistance), 13-6.6
(.Packaging Chart), and 13-6.7 (Evidence Chart).
....... (d) The legal "chain of custody" must be maintained
at all times.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-6.5 Bombing Crime Scene Search
Bombing crime scenes, in spite of their massive
destruction, must be conducted on the theory that everything at the
scene prior to the explosion is still in existence unless it has been
vaporized by the explosion. Locating and identifying items is the
problem. The often-used statement that so much is destroyed by the
explosion that the cause must remain unknown is rarely true. Due to
various factors, the exact amount of explosives used cannot
(normally | be determined based on an evaluation of the damage at the
scene. (Note: The information contained in 13-6.4
through) 13-6. 4. 7|concerning a crime scene search also applies to a
bombing crime scene search.)
EFFECTIVE: 12/05/85
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
nm
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 26
13-6.5.1 Purpose of|Bombing Crime|Scene Search
. ' J (1 ^l The P^Pose of a|bombing crime|scene search is to
determine what happened, how it happened,, and gather evidence to
identify bomb components, reconstruct the explosive device and compare
it with items of evidence identifiable to a|suspect or to previous
bombings. | r
| (2) The office of origin should contact the Laboratory as
soon as feasible to advise of the bombing and pertinent details. The
^.»WAtpry_wi.ll_8.ear_ch_U«_ar.chiie^j.n_oxd.e.r_to_advi««_the_fie.ld
office of any similar bombing incidents- from the past. I ~
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
i.
I 13-6.5.2 Special Considerations for a|Bombing Crime|Scene Search
The following steps are to assist in the preparation,
supervision, and evaluation activity connected with the scene of a
bombing. The topics covered are not meant to be all inclusive and no
attempt has been made to comment on the. many aspects of the bombine
investigation. *
W p } an of action: Formulate a plan adapted to the
particulars of the | bombing (crime scene. This plan will include
consideration of the creation of an on-scene command post;
establishment of lines of supervision; assignment of various tasks
such as photographing, fingerprint processing, crowd control,
collection of evidence, etc.; protection of the crime scene;
obtainment of needed equipment; periodic evaluation of progress-
providing of pertinent information to the public;" safety; etc. '
(2) Command post: Consider establishing an on-scene
command|post, separate from the investigative command post I
particularly at a large bombing which may require days or weeks to
complete the crime scene search. The command post should coordinate
efforts amongst Bureau personnel and between representatives of other
agencies and utilities as well as handle inquiries from sighseers,
persons associated with the scene, relatives of the victims, and the
press.
■ Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13
27
One person should be in overall charge of the bombing investigation,
ano her over the actual crime scene search, and another over fhe
collection of the evidence. These three individuals must maintain
close coordination^ and expeditiously exchange information on a
continual basis. The evidence coordinator will report directly to the
crime scene coordinator who in turn will report directly to the
individual responsible for the overall bombing investigation.
f . . (3) Safe ty: Evaluate safety conditions at the outset of
the crime scene search and on a continual basis throughout the search
consider the possibility of a second bomb, a "jammed" bomb, or Hve
-explosives. being_ in.„the.debris_and..the..safety of crowds, nearby
residents, and personnel at the crime scene not only from additional
explosions but also from such dangers created by utilities, weakened
„-t-v t - 'f 8 ?, En ? ure a11 crime scene personnel are current
with Tetanus and Hepatitis B vaccine.
(b) Dust masks should be worn at all times while
present at the crime scene, especially when death occurs and suspect
carcinogens are present. p
(c) Annual physical for potential crime scene
personnel and individuals which have worked on major crime scenes is
recommended.
(d) All crime scene clothing should be detoxified
prior to leaving the crime scene, even if the crime scene personnel
are returning the following day. Caution should be exercised when
storing soiled crime scene clothing in a hotel room or at the
searcher s residence. Many contaminants may be adhering to this
clothing and could cause illness to an individual not associated with
the crime scene.
(e) Prior to allowing the search team access to the
crime scene, especially in the event of a large bombing, the crime
scene should be examined for the presence of a radioactive residue,
either associated with the bomb or the bombing scene. |
NOTE: Bureau bomb technicians, Laboratory explosive specialists
public safety bomb squad or military EOD personnel should be contacted
it a DOfflb is located.
f« .- - -i 4) Protection of crime scene: Take adequate safeguards
to protect the crime scene from fire, law enforcement, utility, and
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•'.'■• Sensitive : ;~".
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part " PAGE 13 - 28
rescue personnel as well as others such as sightseers, victims, and
individuals with a personal interest in the property. Also, since
most residues remaining after an initiation of an explosive are water
soluble, the crime scene, as ' much as possible, should be protected
against exposure to excessive moisture be it from rain, snow, broken
water pipes, or any other source. '
(5) Photographs: Take appropriate photographs to give a
photographic representation of the crime scene (see 13-6.4.3 as a
guide). These photographs should be made immediately before,
periodically during, and at the completion of the crime scene
^activity. Properly J, dent ify each photograph, coordinate the
photographs wi th diagrams and/or blueprint s-of- SapsT-and "cbrirrde r" the— — -
advisability of aerial photographs.
(6) Bomb scene specialists: Have some specialists
trained in handling and processing bomb scenes or make arrangements
for obtaining such individuals from the Laboratory
[ |Materials and Devices Unit. | Although the basic principles of
conducting a crime scene search apply in a bomb scene search,
individuals with specialized knowledge of explosives, improvised
explosive devices, damage produced by explosive charges, and other
facets associated with bomb scene searches, such as the search and
collection of physical bombing evidence, are extremely valuable to the
processing of a bomb scene effectively and efficiently. These
specialists need not be qualified bomb disposal specialists. They
should be the first persons, if possible, to be selected for the
evidence and crime scene search coordinator positions.
(7) Equipment: Promptly make arrangements to obtain the
necessary equipment to move the debris and material at the scene.
Although the equipment needed at the scene varies, the foil owing have
been used:
(a) Hand tools: Shovels, rakes, brooms,
boltcutters, wire cutters, sledgehammer, hammer, screwdrivers,
wrenches, chisels, hacksaw, magnet, flashlights, knife, 50-foot
measuring tape, and traffic wheel measuring device.
(b) Other light equipment: Screens for sifting
debris, wheelbarrows, metal trash cans, power saw, cutting torch
equipment, ladders, portable lighting equipment, metal detector, large
plastic sheets, photographic equipment, . and parachute harness with
related rope and pulleys.
(c) Heavy equipment: Truck, front-end loader,
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
■i
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
.■■(■'
bulldozer, crane, and shoring materials.
PAGE 13 - 29
(d) Personal equipment: Hard hats, safety goggles,
gloves (work and rubber types), foul weather clothing, coveralls, and
work shoes.
(<*) Crime scene kit: Usual equipment used for the
collection, preservation, and identification of physical evidence.
■.. (f) Vehicle: If the bombed target was a vehicle,
bring an identical vehicle, if possible, to the scene to assist in
-^4gEtjjy_i n g_fj:ag mented and mutilated it ems.
(8) Search for evidence: Bear in mind the search for
evidence at a bombing crime scene is important because the crime may
contain principal evidence which will lead to the identification of
the bomber (s) and/or assist in the successful prosecution of the
matter. The following guidelines are general in nature as the exact
method of searching depends on various uncontrollable factors:
(a) Place one person in overall charge of the
collection of the evidence from the various collectors as valuable
evidence may not be admissible in court if a proper "chain of custody"
cannot be established.
(b) Do not stop the search after a few items of
evidence have been found. Experience has shown that a thorough,
persistent search will locate remains of most of the bomb components.
(c) Avoid the tendency to concentrate only on
physical evidence, such as safety fuse, detonating cord, blasting
caps, leg (electrical) wire, dynamite wrappers, batteries, clock and
timing devices, electronic and electrical components, metal end cap
from a TNT block, plastic end cap from a C4 block, explosive residues,
and unconsumed explosives, which may represent a bomb as this can
result in overlooking other valuable evidence, such as fingerprints,
hair, fibers, soil, blood, paint, plastic, tape, tools, toolmarks,
metals, writing, paper, printing, cardboard, wood, leather, and tire
tread-shoe print impressions.
(d) Conduct a well organized, thorough, and careful
search to prevent the necessity of a second search. However, have a
secure "dump" area for debris in the event a second search is
necessary.
(e) [Simultaneously commence the scene search f
rom
43f
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 30
th! ,! I sx f e ° f the explosion and from the extreme perimeter toward
SI II- "^ ".'?! b ° mb CraUr " in earth ' obtain ■•" "mples from
Jllilt , °i- th * CraUr * " Wel1 as Ero » the side * and bottom,
nJl?.? Ur \f . dlS . X M O ^ fiubstrata « ■■" th « crater is in another
material, obtain similar samples.
nntn ,„ . . ^ (f) . Sift Sffla11 de bris through a 1/4-inch wire screen
onto an insect-type wire screen. Usually these screens are placed on
2 foot square wooden frames constructed from 2- by 4-inch lumber.
||NO more than three workers should work on a screen. |
. ^ : _<«)__ .fcr«y_th« .. bp.di es_of _liy i ng.. and_deceas ed vi c t ims
who were in close proximity of the explosion site for possible ~~
physical evidence and if possible, have the evidence removed. Their
clothing should be retained as it may contain explosive residues.
Also, obtain all medical reports concerning the victims'
injuries/circumstances of death.
... , . M Search a sufficient distance from the site of
the explosion as evidence has been found several blocks from the sites
or large explosions.
(i) Determine the possible flight paths of bomb
components to prevent needless searching.
, J (j) Search trees, shrubbery, telephone poles, and
the roofs, ledges, and gutters of buildings.
,. . (k > Establish a search pattern for large areas. A
line of searchers moving forward has been found to be a satisfactory
method. A bomb scene specialist should follow the line of searchers
to evaluate the items found, control the searchers, and furnish
guidance. If a second search is desired, the positions of the
searchers on the line should be rotated.
uK . . ... ,_ (1) Retain all items foreign to the scene and items
which the searchers cannot identify after seeking the assistance of
those familiar with the bombed target.
On) Obtain known standards of wire and buildine
material from the bomb scene to be submitted to the Laboratory for
elimination purposes. '
. . t l (n } Coll ect and preserve street signs, such as no
parking or stop signs that may have captured explosives residue
following the bombing. If it is not possible to remove and collect
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/i8/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 31
the sign immediately, a plastic bag should be placed over the sign
until explosives residues can be removed and packaged for analysis.
(o) Have a chemist screen each crime scene worker
for possible contamination with explosives in accordance with
existing policy.
(p) Do not wear crime scene clothing that has been
used for explosive training, research with explosives, clothing
normally used for firearms practice or has been worn at other bombing
crime scene searches or the search of a bombing suspect or bomb
factory unl ess the clothing has been thoroughly cleaned by a
commercial laundry. | ~ — ~ " ~~ ~~ — — —
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-6.6 Packaging Chart (See MIOG, Part II, 13-3. 1 (4) (b) ,
13-3.1.2, 13-6.4.7(3) (c), | 13-6. 7 (20) (d); NF IP Manual, Part
I, 5-6.3(14) (b).) |
The following chart should be followed to properly prepare
a package for shipment of numerous and/or bulky items of evidence
apart from the original written request for an examination (s) . For
additional guidance and instructions see 13-3.1.2 (Shipment of
Evidence "Under Separate Cover") above.
ILLUSTRATION NOT SHOWN - SEE "ERL SEARCHING GUIDE," APPENDIX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pack bulk evidence securely in box.
SEAL box and mark as evidence. Mark "Latent" if
necessary.
Place copy of transmittal letter in envelope and mark
' "Invoice."
Stick envelope to OUTSIDE of sealed box.
Wrap sealed box in outside wrapper and SEAL with
gummed paper.
Address to: Director
Federal Bureau of Investigation
| 935 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW
Washington, D.C. | 20535-0001
"Attention FBI | Laboratory, Evidence
Control Center." |
Cover label with yellow transparent tape and attach
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 32
it securely to the package.
7. If packing box is wooden — tack invoice envelope to
top under a transparent yellow cover.
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
13-6.7
G
Evidence Chart (See MIOG, Part I, 91-8(11), 139-3- p ar t
II, 13-3.1(4), 13-3.1.2 (1),(9), 13-6.4.7 (3)(c).j
,, *. T he f0ll0Min g ^art is provided to give assistance in the
collection, identification, preservation, packaging, and sending of
evidence to the Laboratory. This chart should be used in conjunction
with similar evidence information contained elsewhere in this section
under each type of examination desired. This evidence information and
chart are not intended to be all inclusive, and does not pertain to
latent fingerprint evidence.
SAND, ETC.:
ounce
(1) SPECIMEN - ABRASIVES, INCLUDING CARBORUNDUM, EMERY,
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Not less than one
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail or Federal Express
<*> IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container: Type
of material, date obtained, name or initials
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use sturdy containers,
such as 35 mm fUm canister or pharmaceutical container. Seal to
prevent any loss. . • "*■
(f) REMARKS - Avoid use of envelopes
(2) SPECIMEN - ACIDS:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 100 milliliters
(ml.)
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 100 ml.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Par t II „,_ ,„
PAGE 13 - 33
Service
(c) SEND BY - Federal Express or United Parcel
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of . container: Type
of material, date obtained, name or initials
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Plastic or all-glass
bottle. Tape stopper. Pack in vermiculite or other absorbent
material.
(f) REMARKS - Label "acids-corrosive."
(3) SPECIMEN -ADHESIVE TAPE:" " ' "
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Recovered roll
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container: Type
of material, date obtained, name or initials
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Place on waxed paper
cellophane.
(f) REMARKS - Do not cut, wad or distort.
_ # W SPECIMEN - ALKALIES - CAUSTIC SODA, POTASH, AMMONIA,
, , < a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 100 ml., 100 grams
vgm.)
* M EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 100 ml., All
to 100 gm.
„ (c) SEND BY - Federal Express or United Parcel
Service
<<*> IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container: Type
of material, date obtained, name or initials
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Plastic or glass bottle
with rubber stopper held with adhesive tape. Pack in sawdust or
vermiculite. Label "Corrosive Material-Alkali" and volume.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sens i t ive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13
34
G
(f) REMARKS - Label alkali-corrosive.
(5) SPECIMEN - AMMUNITION (CARTRIDGES):: (See (29).)
(a) SEND BY - For instructions re: shipping live
ammunition, see 13-12.4.2 in this section.
(b) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container: Type
of material, date obtained, name or initials
— — Is) WRAPPING^AND PACKING - For instr uction s re:
shipping of live ammunition, see 13-12.4.2 in this section. "~(SeV ~~
also 13-12.4.3.)
( d ) REMARKS - Unless specific examination of
cartridge is essential, do not submit.
(6) SPECIMEN - ANONYMOUS LETTERS, EXTORTION LETTERS, BANK
ROBBERY NOTES: (See (19), (20), (22), (23), (43) , (52) , (65))
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Ail (Original
documents, not copies, whenever possible)
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Initial and date each unless
legal aspects or good judgment dictates otherwise.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Place in proper enclosure
envelope and seal with "Evidence" tape or transparent cellophane tape.
Flap side of envelope should show (1) wording "Enclosure (s) to FBIHQ
from (name of submitting office)," (2) title of case, (3) brief
description of contents, and (4) file number, if known. Staple to
original letter ^of transmittal.
(e) REMARKS - Do not handle with bare hands. Advise
if evidence should be treated for latent fingerprints.
(7) SPECIMEN - BILE:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 10 milliliters
(b) SEND BY - Most expeditious means available
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Label container identifying
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
#
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
sample name of subject, date taken, initials of Agent.
PAGE 13- 35
' .^ (d > . WRAPPING AND PACKING - Container in cardboard
box with paper or styrofoam packing.
^ REMARKS - Hold in freezer until personally
delivered or pack in dry ice for mailing by most expeditious means
available. Attach autopsy report.
™t,„*« ™ (8) SPECIMEN " BLASTING CAPS (CONTACT MATERIALS AND
DEVICES UNIT FOR INSTRUCTIONS.)
„ t , „ a f 9) SPECIMEN - BLOOD -LIQUID KNOWN SAMPLES : '(S^eTS-
8.1.4, 13-8.2.5 (3) & 13-8.4 (5).)
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 1 red top (no
preservative) vacutainer vial for serological analysis and 1 purple
top (.EDTA) vacutainer vial for DNA analysis
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Air mail special delivery - air
freight or similar rapid transit method
,„..,. (d) IDENTIFICATION - Use adhesive tape on outside of
test tube. Name of donor, date taken, doctor's name, name or initials
of Agent.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap in cotton, soft
paper. Place in mailing tube or suitably strong mailing carton.
(f) REMARKS - Submit immediately. Don't hold
awaiting additional items for comparison. Keep under refrigeration,
NOT freezing, until mailing. NO refrigerants and/or dry ice should be
added to sample ^during transit. Fragile label.
(10) SPECIMEN - BLOOD - SMALL QUANTITIES (LIOUID
QUESTIONED SAMPLES) : (See MIOG, Part II, 13-8.1.4.)
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Air mail special delivery - air
freight or similar rapid transit method
' (c) IDENTIFICATION - Use adhesive tape on outside of
test tube. Name of donor, date taken, doctor's name, name or initials
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■),
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
rart II
of Agent.
PAGE 13 - 36
paper Placa in f* • i ."^P 6 *»> PACKING " Wrap in cotton, soft
paper. Place m mailing tube or suitably strong mailing carton.
, " ,, ^ RE MARKS - If unable to EXPEDITIOUSLY furnish
off? c^ : l W l ^ th0r °^ hl y on the —P-ous surface a pe
off or collect by usxng eyedropper or clean spoon, transfer to
nonporous surface and let dry; or absorb in sterile gauze and let dry.
ON FABRICS) . (11 Lf!;Tnr E V l^f To^ N UANTIT IES (DRY STAINS NOT
-¥ w f abkic&J _; (.See MIO G, Par tlj .13-8 . 1 . b. , )
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - As much as possible
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
n1 . ,. . , „ (c) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of pillbox or
plastic vial. Type of specimen date secured, name or initials
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Seal to prevent leakage.
scrapings. M REMA * KS " KeeP dry ' AV ° id USe of ^elopes for
™v™,^ <12) SPECIMEN " BLOOD - SMALL QUANTITIES (FOR
TOXICOLOGICAL USE): (See MIOG, Part II, 13-8.1.4, 13-8.2.4 (3).)
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 20 cc. (Blood and
preservative mixture) vbiooo and
(b > SEND BY - Air mail special delivery - air
freight or similar rapid transit method
f«f * h » ' ( ? IDENTIFI CATI0N - Use adhesive tape on outside of
of Igent' * ° f d0n ° r ' d3te Uken ' doct -'» -ame, name or initial
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Medical examiner should
use a standard blood collection kit. examiner should
5 e * REMARKS - Preservative desired (identifv
preservation used). Refrigerate. CAN freeze. ° ^"entity
(See MIOG, Part II^Tl^T " ^^ CL ° THING ' '^^ ETC ' '
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 37
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - As found
„ ... A , ( ^ SEND BY - Registered mail, Federal Express,
United Parcel Service (UPS) F '
e l„M, r C (C) P ENTIFICATI °N " Use tag or mark directly on
clothes. Type of specimens, date secured, name or initials.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Each article wrapped
separately and identified on outside of package. Place in strong box
—P^lM^pre^^^^ should be
used for air-dried, blood-stained clothing items. ^~~~ ~~~~ — ~~ "
USE NO »PAT -rn n»v 6) A RE ^^ * lf W6t Whe ° f0Und » DRY BY HANGING.
USE NO HEAT TO DRY. Avoid direct sunlight while drying. Use no
preservatives.
te.. (K\ ( J 4> ^n? P f C i [MEN " B ° DY ° RGANS (BRAIN ' KIDNEY - LIVER . LU NG):
(See (33) and (70) below, and MIOG, Part II, 13-10.1.5.)
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 75 grams of each
(b) SEND BY - Most expeditious means available
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Label container indicating
organ, name of subject, date taken, initials of Agent
. ' (d) "RAPPING AND PACKING - Styrofoam container
preferred to keep specimens frozen
... (•) REMARKS - Hold in freezer until personally
delivered or pack in dry ice for mailing by most expeditious means
available. Attach autopsy report.
II, 13-12. 4 ( 3 5 ) SPECIMEN " BULLETS (N0T CARTRIDGES): (See MIOG, Part
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All found
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - | Initial or otherwise mark
primary container only)
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Pack tightly in cotton or
Sensitive.
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•■': in-
sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
rart II
PAGE 13- 38
contend" " '*"• "^ " ^^ b ° X * Ubel 0utsid * of bo * « to
(e) REMARKS - Unnecessary handling, obliterates marks
(16) SPECIMEN - CARTRIDGES (LIVE AMMUNITION) :
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All found
(b) SEND BY ~ For instructions re: shipping live
ammunition, see paragraph 13-12.4.2 in this section.
orimarv ,*„, • (c) * DENTIFICATI0N "I I"i tiaro7^e7^^a7lT~ ~
primary container only|
. (d) CAPPING AND PACKING - Pack tightly in cotton or
coftenjr ^ Pi "' matCh ° r P ° Wder b0X ' Label <"*£«* *' box as ?o
! II, 13-12.4. ( ") SPECIMEN ' CARTRIDGE CA SES (SHELLS): (See MIOG, Part
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
, . (c) IDENTIFICATION -|lnitial or otherwise mark
primary container only]
. (d) CAPPING AND PACKING - Pack tightly in cotton or
con entr " PiU ' "'* " P0Wder b ° X ' Ubel 0uts ^ of Cox as to
C Will. 9X1 LS *
(13) ) (18) SPECIMEN " CH ARRED OR BURNED DOCUMENTS: (See 13-17.4
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
. (b) SEND BY - Registered mail
,-«H,'„f * ■, ^l IDENTIFIC ATION - On outside of container
indicate fragile nature of evidence, date obtained, name or initials.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Utilize oolvester film
I Teiui: T ion ■ t ; cha :? ue ^ contact inves t£ « ative op.r:t&r«; r a »£ r t
| Section for instructions) OR Ship charred paper in original container
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PA<
in which it was burned at crime scene OR Pack in rigid container
between layers of cotton. Do not compress layers.
„. . .,„ ^ REMARKS - Added moisture, with atomizer or
otherwise, NOT RECOMMENDED.
(19) SPECIMEN - CHECKS (FRAUDULENT) :
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All (Original
documents, not copies, whenever possible)
____(b). _SH*D_ B I^Reg i s it ered_mai 1
(c) IDENTIFICATION - See Anonymous Letters (6) above
above (<1) WRAPPING ^ PACKING - See Anonymous Letters (6)
P.im,-«h «».„.• i i^ * EMARKS " Advise what P«ts questioned or known.
Furnish physical description of subject.
STAMP KNnuw^Lnf™*"^ " CHECK PROTE CTOR, RUBBER STAMP AND/OR DATER
STAMP KNOWN STANDARDS (NOTE: SEND ACTUAL DEVICE WHEN POSSIBLE)
• . < a > STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Obtain several
^T!V n 1. word -f or - word " d ^ of each questioned check-writer
™H n ',u ^« nal?le t0 f ° rWard rubber sta *P 8 ' P"P a « numerous
samples with different degrees of pressure.
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(e) IDENTIFICATION - Place name or initials, date,
name of make and model, etc., on sample impressions.
, (d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - See Anonymous Letters (6)
above and/or Packaging Chart (paragraph 13-6.6) above
printing device, ^ ""^ " D ° ^ ^^ £nking -danisms on
(21) . SPECIMEN - CLOTHING:
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
United Parcel Service (55)" " ^^ -"• " federal Express or
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 40
' .. t T (c) e IDENTIFICATION - Mark directly on garment or use
string tag. Type of evidence, name or initials, date.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING -Each article individually
wrapped with identification written on outside of package. Place !n
strong container. Clothing items should be individually packaged in
paper bags.
,. . Tx: (e) REMARKS - Leave clothing whole. Do not cut out
stains. If wet, HANG IN ROOM TO DRY before packing.
„ 1TniT1I (i2) SPECIMEN - CODES, ^CIPHERS AND FOREIGN LANGUAGE^ --
■ MATERIAL:
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
afeove (c > IDENTIFICATION - Same as Anonymous Letters (6)
(6) above ^ WRAPPING AND PA <*ING - Same as Anonymous Letters
„..,., (e) REMARKS - Furnish pertinent background and
technical information,
(46)) (23) SPECIMEN " C0MPUTE R AND COMPUTER-RELATED ITEMS: (See
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
... . . (b) SEND BY " Floppy disks - registered mail; hard
disks - by overnight express.
ta *» n . a • ■*• , (C) « IDENTIFICATI0N " ^bel container indicating date
taken and initials of Agent.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - See Anonymous Letters (6)
J!!!/" ^ "envelope *hould be marked "Magnetic Media Evidence
Enclosed. Do not X-ray.
(e) REMARKS - If computer diskettes are submitted,
accompanying communication should, if possible, contain information
regarding the make and model of computer used in their preparation.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
p a*"t II „ A -„ ,„
PAGE 13 - 41
(24) SPECIMEN - DRUGS - LIQUIDS: (See (35), (36), (49))
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
e j . , . ' (c) VERIFICATION - Affix label to bottle in which
round, including name or initials and date.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Bottle with sealable top.
(*) REMARKS - Determine alleged normal use of drug
and if prescription, check with druggist for supposed ingredients.
^ „n^ (25) SPECIMEN " DRUG S " POWDERS, PILLS, SOLIDS: (See
(.35;, (49))
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
;! ( b > SEND B * - Registered mail, UPS or air express
(c) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of pillbox, name or
initials and date
< d > WRAPPING AND PACKING - Seal to prevent any loss
by use of tape .
? 6) SPECIMEN " DYNAMITE AND OTHER EXPLOSIVES OR SUSPECTED
EXPLOSIVES (CONTACT MATERIALS AND DEVICES UNIT FOR INSTRUCTIONS AND
SHIPPING CONTAINERS.)
(27) SPECIMEN - FIBERS:
- < a > STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Entire garment or
other cloth item
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of sealed container
or on object to which fibers are adhering.
_ ■ (e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Folded paper or pillbox.
Seal edges and openings with tape.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive '''T$
, . ut a (d) WRAPPING ■~AW)-pACKIMG^^If ^-dt-devel-oped-wrap-iir
lightproof container. F
(29) 5 PECIMEN ~ FIREARMS: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-12.4.3,
13-12.5; MAOP, Part II, 2-2.2.2, 6-2.3.9:) "•*..»,
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
''$ (b) SEND BY _ Registered mail or Federal Express
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Mark inconspicuously as if it
were your own. Investigative notes should reflect how and where gun
narked. ' *
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap in paper and
identify contents of package. Place in cardboard box or wooden box.
(«) REMARKS - Unload all weapons before shipping.
Keep from rusting. See Ammunition (5) above, if applicable.
(30) SPECIMEN - FLASH PAPER:
- ^ SEND BY " Contac t Investigative Operations and
Support Section for instructions
(b) IDENTIFICATION - Initials and date.
(c) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Individual polyethylene
envelopes double wrapped in manila envelopes. Inner wrapper sealed
with paper tape.
c , _ ^ REMARKS - Store between moistened sheets of
blotter paper, with dry ice. Refrigerate if extended storage is
necessary. °
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
.ai.'"?-5;(,
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines ;?•
?art - 11 ., PAGE 13-42 £
■A
(f) REMARKS - Do not place loose in envelope.
(28) SPECIMEN - FILM:
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
"DO NOT X-RAY." ^ IDENTIFICATI0N ' If not developed mark outside
:£
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 43
nRVTrrc TTKTT <3 i.L SPECIMEN - FUSE. (SAFETY) (CONTACT MATERIALS AND
DEVICES UNIT FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS)
(32) SPECIMEN - GASOLINE: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-10.3.4.)
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 100 ml.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 100 ml.
(c) SEND BY - UPS or Federal Express
„-m, - * . ( ^ IDENTIFI CATI0N - On outside of container, labe7~
with type of material, name or initials, and date.
break . nrn , . ,„, (e) W R AP"NG AND PACKING - Use sturdy box containing
break-proof bottles and absorbent packing.
(f) REMARKS - Shipping regulation - allow 4 oz.
maximum per bottle.
(33) SPECIMEN - GASTRIC CONTENTS s
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All available
(b) SEND BY - Most expeditious means available
„ ,. . < c > IDENTIFICATION - Label container indicating
gastric contents," name of subject, date taken, initials of Agent.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Bottle with sealable top
and pack as indicated under "Body organs," (14) above.
(e) REMARKS - Mark package "Keep Refrigerated."
(34) SPECIMEN - GEMS: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-11.7.)
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use 35 mm film canister
or pharmaceutical container.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive v^
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13-44 «*
(35) SPECIMEN - GENERAL UNKNOWN - SOLIDS (NONHAZARDOUS) ;
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 100 gins.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 100 gms.
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
,,..„, , (d) IDENTIFICATION - Name or initials, date on
outside of sealed container.
(?«0 above -< e >— "RAPPING. AND. .PACKING_^Same_.as., Drugs ,_,(24)„ and
t ( f ) REMARKS - If item is suspected of being a
hazardous material, treat as such and contact Materials and Devices
Unit for shipping instructions. 4
(36) SPECIMEN - GENERAL UNKNOWN - LIQUIDS (NONHAZARDOUS) :
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT. DESIRED) - 100 ml. r
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 100 ml.
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - Same as for liquid drugs, (24)
above,
above.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Same as drugs, (24)
•ii&l
# ( f ) REMARKS - If item is suspected of being a
hazardous material, treat as such and contact Materials and Devices
Unit for shipping instructions.
11.1.3.) (3?) SPECIMEN " GLASS FRAGMENTS: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
Nam . A • •►• , ( °l J IDEOTIFI CATIOM - Adhesive tape on each piece.
Name or initials and date on tape. Separate questioned and known.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive'
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 45
'■ _ (d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap each piece
llltltl ', Y S C °M° n - PaCk in Str ° ng b0X t0 P revent lifting and
breakage. Identify contents.
11.1.3.)
(e) REMARKS - Avoid chipping and mark "Fragile."
(38) SPECIMEN - GLASS PARTICLES: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-
u .,- ..' (a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All of bottle or
headlight. Small piece of each broken pane.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
t ^ < d > IDENTIFICATION - Name or initials, date on
outside of sealed container
• . (e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use 35 mm film canister
or pharmaceutical container.
will tear.
(f) REMARKS - Do not use envelopes or bags which
(39) SPECIMEN - GLASS WOOL INSULATION: (See (45))
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 1-inch mass from
each suspect area
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
■ .^ .. -GO IDENTIFICATION - Name or initials, date on
outside of sealed container
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Sealed container
(40) DELETED
(41) SPECIMEN - GUNSHOT RESIDUES - ON CLOTH: (See (57)
and MIOG, Part II, 13-12.4.1.) ^umi. U>ee u>/>
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
ParTlI^ InVestigative Operations and Guidelines
PAGE 13 - 46
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
*■* -, T (C> IDENTI FICATI0N - Attach string tag or mark
Erectly. Type of material, date, and name or initials
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Place fabrir n.r >,<.*-.,
I7'",u p * p " Kd then «•* ■• ">*< ~.*~i*i^f! ta t'JL'«:£r
(e) REMARKS - Avoid shaking.
— (A2) S PECIMEN^ JMTPj
<b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
of material „ r M * DENTIFI CATI0N - On outside of container. Type
of material, date, and name or initials. ■ P
/
<!«! a , (C) - WRAPPING AND PACKING - Folded paper or pillbox
Seal edges and openings with tape. pmDox.
(£) REMARKS - Do not place loose in envelope.
STANDARDS: ^ SPECIMEN " HABITING AND HAND PRINTING, KNOWN
' w*. • ■ *. U) STAN DARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - For instructions r..
obtamxng known standards, see paragraph 13-17.2.3 in this secL'n
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Name or in.'ti.i. j * *
(6) above. ™ ^^^ *** PACKING " Same as Anonymous Letters
(44) SPECIMEN - HOAX BOMB DEVICES AND/OR COMPONENTS (FOR
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 47
INSTRUCTIONS, CONTACT THE MATERIALS AND DEVICES UNIT.) (See also
MIOG, Part I, 91-8; Part II, 13-16.6.)
(39) ) (45) SPECIMEN ~ INSULATI0N <SEE GLASS WOOL INSULATION,
(46) SPECIMEN - MAGNETIC MEDIA (SEE COMPUTER, (23) ABOVE.)
T ,™ „,„J\ 7) SPECIMEN " MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDINGS (SEE MIOG, PART
I, 139-3(2) (d), PART II, SECTION 16, PARAGRAPHS 16-8 TO 16-8. 2. A.)
. (48) SPECIMEN - MATCHES:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - One to two books of
paper. One full box of wood.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - UPS or Federal Express
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, date, and name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Metal container and
packed in larger package to prevent shifting. Matches in box or metal
container packed to prevent friction between matches.
(f) REMARKS - Keep away from fire. "Keep away from
(49) SPECIMEN - MEDICINES (SEE DRUGS, (24) AND (25)
(50) SPECIMEN - METAL:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - One pound
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to one pound
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, date, and name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use paper boxes or
containers. Seal and use strong paper or wooden box.
fire" label
ABOVE.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
p * rt II PAGE 13 - 48
(f) REMARKS - Melt number, heat treatment, and other
specifications of foundry if available. Keep from rusting.
(51) SPECIMEN - OIL: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-10.3.4.)
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 250 ml. together
with specifications
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 250 ml.
( c) .SEND BY . - _ Any met hod
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, date, and name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Container with tight
screw top. Pack in strong box using excelsior or similar material.
(f) REMARKS - Keep away from fire.
(52) SPECIMEN - OBLITERATED, ERADICATED, OR INDENTED
WRITING:
above
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Same as Anonymous Letters, (6)
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Same as Anonymous
Letters, (6) above
„ (e) REMARKS - Advise whether bleaching or staining
methods may be used. Avoid folding.
(53) SPECIMEN - PAINT - LIQUID:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Original unopened,
container, up to 1 gallon if possible
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All to 1/4 pint
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
o
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 49
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, origin if known, date, name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Friction-top paint can or
large-mouth, screw-top jars. If glass, pack to prevent breakage. Use
heavy corrugated paper or wooden box.
(54) SPECIMEN - PAINT - SOLID (PAINT CHIPS OR SCRAPINGS) :
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - At least 1/2 square
inch of painted area if possible, with all layers represented. Take
-representative samples from„.seyeral areas of known source and secure
separately.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All. If on small
object, send object.
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, origin if known, date, name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use 35 mm film canister
or pharmaceutical container. Seal to prevent leakage. Paper and
plastic envelopes are not satisfactory. Do not pack in cotton.
(f) REMARKS - Avoid contact with adhesive materials
such as fingerprint lifting tape or other pressure sensitive tape.
Wrap so as to protect smear.
(55) SPECIMEN - PHOTOGRAPHS:
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - If not developed mark outside
"DO NOT X-RAY"
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - If not developed wrap in
lightproof container.
(56) SPECIMEN - DENTAL STONE CASTS OF TIRE TREADS AND SHOE
PRINTS: (See 13-19.1.2.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 50
(41) ABOVE.)
(57) SPECIMEN - POWDER PATTERNS (SEE GUN SHOT RESIDUES,
available
(58) SPECIMEN - ROPE, TWINE, AND CORDAGE:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - One yard or amount
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
. (d) IDENTIFICATION - On tag or container. Typ7~o'F
material, date, name or initials.
11.3.2.)
areas
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap securely.
(59) SPECIMEN - SAFE INSULATION: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Sample all damaged
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
a t . (d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, date, name or initials
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use 35 mm film canister
or pharmaceutical container. Seal to prevent any loss.
envelopes.
13-8.2.4.)
(f) REMARKS - Avoid use of glass containers and
(60) SPECIMENS - SALIVA SAMPLES: (See MIOG, Part II,
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Collect on saliva
swab (cotton-tipped applicator), generally, five-inch long wooden
stick with cotton tip.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
G
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
, PAGE 13 - 51
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside envelope put type of
sample, date and place of collection and collector's initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Seal in envelope.
( f ) REMARKS - Applicators can be purchased in
individually wrapped sterile packets which contain a single sterile
swab. Allow to dry before placing in envelope.
n ( ^ 1} SPECIMEN " SH0E p RINT LIFTS (IMPRESSIONS ON HARD
..SURFACES).: _.(S.ee_MI0.G, Par.t_II,_l_3-19_..l'...3..)_ ___
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Photograph before
making of dust impression.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On lifting tape or paper
attached to tape. Name or initials and date.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Prints in dust are easily
damaged. Fasten print or lift to bottom of a box so that nothing will
rub against it.
(f) REMARKS - Always rope off crime scene area until
shoe prints or tire treads are located and preserved.
„„,, (62 > SPECIMEN - SOILS AND MINERALS: (See MIOG, Part II,
13~ 11.2. 2 and 13~1L2«3.)
t
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Samples from areas
near pertinent sj>ot.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
'(d) IDENTIFICATION - On outside of container. Type
of material, date, name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use 35 mm film canister
or pharmaceutical container.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
ss
Sensitive
■if
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
■ . . • PAGE 13
(f) REMARKS - Avoid glass containers and envelopes.
(63) SPECIMEN - TOOLS:
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
t * ► , ., U) . IDENT1FI CATION - On tools or use string tag.
Type of tool, identifying number, date, name or initials.
- 52
-(d)— WRAPPING_AND..PACKING_-_.Wrap_each_tool„in. paper.
Use strong cardboard or wooden box with tools packed to prevent
shifting. r
13-13.3, n-Js^.f^ 1 ^ " T00LMARKS: (See < 72 > ™* MIOG. Part II,
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Send in the tool.
If impractical, call Firearms/Toolmarks Unit for instructions.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail, UPS or air express
„r „„ „ •► i d i IDENTIFICATI0N - On object or on tag attached to
or on opposite end from where toolmarks appear. Name or initials and
dab © •
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - After marks have been
«r"™ k Wlt V 0ft Pf pef ' Wra * in stron * capping paper, place in
strong box, and pack to prevent shifting.
(65) SPECIMEN - TYPEWRITING, KNOWN STANDARDS:
'. . ,. (a) STAN DARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - For instructions re:
obtaining known standards see paragraph 13-17.2.4 in this section
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Place name or initials, date,
serial number, name of make and model, etc., on specimens..
, „„ ,^ (d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Same as Anonymous
Letters, (6) above.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
- -t.-
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
(e) REMARKS - Examine ribbon for evidence of
questioned message thereon.
PAGE 13 - 53
(66) SPECIMEN - URINE:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 50 cc minimum
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Label container indicating
"urine," name of subject, date taken, initials of Agent.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Bottle witiTYailibU"top7
surrounded with absorbent material to prevent breakage. Strong
cardboard or wooden box, refrigerate if possible.
(e) REMARKS - Mark package "Keep Refrigerated."
(67) SPECIMEN - VAGINAL SAMPLES - SLIDES (MICROSCOPE) :
(See (68) and MIOG, Part II, 13-8.2.5.)
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Minimum of two
slides
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Label with type of sample, name
of donor, date and place of collection and collector's initials.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use commercial slide box.
(e) REMARKS - Slide box available at hospitals.
Doctor should not fix slides. No cover slips. Air dry.
(68) SPECIMEN - VAGINAL SAMPLES - SWABS: (See MIOG, Part
II, 13-8.2.5.) '
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Two unstained swabs
from same package as stained.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Minimum of two swabs
(c) SEND BY - Express mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - Same as (67) above.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 54
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Seal in envelope.
. ( f ) REMARKS - Allow swabs to dry before packaging,
refrigerate or freeze.
(69) SPECIMEN - VIDEO TAPES:
(a) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Always submit
(b) SEND BY - Registered mail
original
(c) IDENTIFICATION - Place name or initials, date
and identification number on cassette housing.
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap securely. Strong
cardboard box with three inches of paper crumpled around all sides of
the video tapes. Do not use foam packing material.
(e) REMARKS - Mark the package "Video Tape" or
"Recorded Magnetic Medium."
(70) SPECIMEN - VITREOUS HUMOR:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(b) SEND BY - Most, expeditious means available
„ . W IDENTIFICATION - Label container indicating
vitreous humor," name of subject, date taken, initials of Agent
(d) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Glass bottle with
sealable top and pack as indicated for "Body organs," (14) above.
.. (e) REMARKS - Refrigerate only (do not freeze) until
personally delivered. Keep cool during delivery time. Attach autopsy
report. '
(71) SPECIMEN - WATER:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 1 Liter
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - 1 Liter
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part H PAGE 13 - 55
(d) IDENTIFICATION - Date and initial
top.
kink.)
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Use bottle with sealable
(72) SPECIMEN - WIRE (SEE ALSO TOOLMARKS, (64) ABOVE.):
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - Three feet (Do not
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All (Do not kink.)
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On label or tag. Type of
material, date, name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap securely.
(f) REMARKS - Do not kink wire.
(73) SPECIMEN - WOOD:
(a) STANDARD (AMOUNT DESIRED) - One foot or amount
available.
(b) EVIDENCE (AMOUNT DESIRED) - All
(c) SEND BY - Registered mail
(d) IDENTIFICATION - On label or tag. Type of
material, date, name or initials.
(e) WRAPPING AND PACKING - Wrap securely
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
¥1
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■m
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 56
13-6.7.1 Hazardous Materials (See MIOG, Part II, 13-3.1(4) and
I [13-15.1.6; MAOP, Part II, 2-4.4.3.) |
Over 3,000 items, including flash paper,, live ammunition,
explosives, radioactive materials, flammable liquids and solids,
flammable and nonflammable gases, spontaneously combustible
substances, and oxidizing and corrosive materials are currently
considered as hazardous materials. All require special packaging and
the amount of each item which can be shipped is regulated. Therefore,
the applicable action listed below is to be taken:
( 1) Flash pape r; Contac t Investigative Operations and
Support Section for shipping instructions EACH AND EVERY TIME this
item is to be submitted to the Laboratory.
(2) Live ammunition:
12.4.2 elsewhere in this section.
For shipping instructions see 13-
(3) Other hazardous materials: Contact the (Materials
and Devices Unit) for shipping instructions EACH AND EVERY TIME any
hazardous material, except flash paper or live ammunition, is to be
submitted to the Laboratory.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-6.7.2
Nonhazardous Materials
If evidence of this type is not found in this chart or
elsewhere in this section, locate a specimen which is most similar in
nature and take the appropriate actions or call the Laboratory at 202-
FBI-4410 for general instructions.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/83
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part n . PAGE 13 - 57
13-7 FIELD PHOTOGRAPHY
The purpose of the information under this caption is to
provide some of the general guidelines pertaining to Bureau
photographic matters and to list by name, description, and use the
types of document copying, microfilming, general photographing, and
surveillance equipment available to the various field offices. For
information concerning photographic examinations conducted in the
Laboratory seeJMIOG, Part II, 13-7.6 and 13-7.6.1.)!
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97 " " """
13-7.1 General Guidelines
EFFECTIVE: 04/19/91
13-7.1.1 Laboratory Photographic Responsibilities
^K
I (1) I The Sne^^ Photographic Unit (SPU) of the Laboratory
(Room 3449, Extensionjj^^^His responsible for all photographic
matters to include surve^TTance photography, nonroutine requests,
unusual processing requirements, examination of photographic evidence,
and all other photographic equipment requests, repairs, problems, or
other inquiries. SPU has been funded to supply the field with most
photographic equipment; therefore, requests for routine photographic
equipment should be directed to SPU through the field office
Photographic Technician. SPU|is|the funding| source) for all
photographic equipment (there is no other source available to the
field). If there is any doubt regarding equipment, contact SPU, for
assistance and clarification. SPU also handles all photographic
tradecraft in FCI matters.
| (2) | The|SPU alsojhandles all general processing and mass
production photographic work. This | includes | the capability of doing
copy work on film of documents, objects, i.e., photographs, jewelry,
etc., and duplication of slides and making of slides from original art
work for training purposes. | SPU | handles equipment needs for darkroom
and "mug shot" photography. This is defined as photographic
processing and finishing, studio and "mug shot" areas to include those
£ facilities in use within the field office and off-site facilities.
$ ||SPU|will also handle the design of field office darkrooms and those
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive - ; v-
•':1K
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
p art II PAGE .13.- 58
related areas due to moves or renovations. All related equipment
selection, procurement, inventory and distribution, including sinks,
cabinets, enlargers, miscellaneous darkroom equipment, processing and
finishing equipment, mug shot and copying equipment that relate to the
darkroom areas will also be handled by |SPU. |
(3) |The SPU is responsible for the processing of the
video imagery where the image requires enhancement and the
preparation of a photographic print. This video imagery may
originate from time-lapse or full-motion video tapes of any format or
from still video disks. SPU can provide photographic prints and/or
video t apes of these enhanced images. Requests for comparisons of
vi deo imagery to known phoTograph~ic""pr r ints or to" other submitted
evidence (guns, articles of clothing, bags, hats, etc.) should be
forwarded directly to SPU. (See 13-7.6.1.) |
| (4) | Submissions to the SPU should be by | electronic
communication | under the case caption.
\ I . | (5) | The|SPU|of the Laboratory Division oversees the areas
*' of film processing, color and black and white enlarging and camera
copy work, and slide reproduction, all on a quantitative basis. | These
requests should be submitted with an FD-523. |
| (6) j The film^processing functions are inclusive of color
negative (C-Al) , color positive (E-6) , microfilms, and all black and
white negatives.
| (7) | Color and black and white enlargements made from
negatives are processed to specifications which can vary in dimensions
of 3 1/2 by 5|inches|to 40 by 60|inches.| There is also the capability
of processing color enlargements from slides; however, this involves
the preparation of an internegative which can result in the loss of
resolution and color reproduction in larger prints.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
PAGE 13 - 59
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-7.1.2 Personal Identification ("mug") Photographs
|(SeeMIOG, Part II, 11-4.9.) |
Personal identification color ("mug") photographs should
include the head and shoulders in full face view and profile. If not
otherwise equipped, use the Mamiya 645, with flash equipment or flood
lamps and, if available, a white background. Include identifying
data and a visible gray scale in all pictures. If the equipment for
this purpose isjyj^^vjilable, contact the | Special Photographic Unitf
(Room 1 3449, I Ext.
M
k*
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-7.1.3 Polaroid Photographs
Polaroid cameras and 4- by 5-inch (Speed Graphic) polaroid
film holders are available in many offices. The use of polaroid
should be limited to those situations in which an immediate
photographic print. will definitely further the investigation. In
other situations, conventional photography should be used.
EFFECTIVE: 04/19/91
13-7.1.4 Color Photography
The use of color photography should be considered during
the course of all investigations where a record of the color or color
contrast may be a factor in the evaluation of the evidence. Color
photographs may be 'particularly helpful and important in recording the
bloodstains in a crime scene; | color negative (processing should be
used. When color photographs are to be made, 120 or 35mm film is
preferred. Closely follow the instructions provided with the film as
to lighting and exposure data. Good quality color prints can be made
from a color negative. If projection slides are desired, color
reversal (positive) properly exposed film, such as Ektachrome or 3M CS
Type Film and FUJI can be used. (Under no circumstances should
Kodachrome film be used.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13
60
EFFECTIVE: 04/19/91
13-7.2
General Photographic Equipment
G
Name of
Equipment
Hamiya 645
Canon j and Nikon |
Camera Systems
Description
120mm roll film camera.
Kit includes camera,
motor dr i ye , ._ f 1 a sh and
lens.
35mm camera. Lens .
available 24mm- | 2000 | mm.
Numerous other special
application accessories
are supplied or are
available on request.
Use
Aerial, crime scene,
"mug" and document
. pho t pgraphy.
Primarily intended
for use as a
surveillance system.
Also used in
some concealments and
remote applications.
EFFECTIVE: 04/19/91
13-7.3
Microfilming Equipment
Name of
Equipment
Attache
photocopy
units
Description
Portable, completely
self-contained, collap-
sible document copy
equipment carried in an
attache case, 18" by 12"
by 4 3/4", weighing 16
lbs. Electronic photo-
flash lights powered by
self-contained 6-volt
(four "C" cells) battery
pack or AC/DC. Camera is
standard 36 exposure 35mm
Olympus with lens. Newer
models will have AC/DC
Use
Rapid photography of
small number of
documents including
bound and large-size
documents. Do not use
color film.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 61
operation and larger film
capacity options.
EFFECTIVE: 04/19/91
13-7. A
Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-7.5
Photographic Surveillance
The objective of surveillance photography is generally to
obtain recognizable, identification images of individuals or items, or
to record events as they occur, or over a long period of time.
Conventional still photography should be used in all instances where
recognition or identifiable detail is required. Still video is not to
be used unless the immediate electronic transmission of the image is
of prime importance and quality is secondary. Motion pictures (if
detail is of high importance) or closed circuit TV (CCTV) ( should be
used if the prime objective is to record the action taking place or an
event that occurs over a long period of time. When both
identification and action are required still photography and CCTV
should be used simultaneously. CCTV images and motion picture images
cannot be substituted for conventional still photography since it is
not possible to make high-quality, hard-copy enlargements from these
processes. (See Part II, 9-1(5) of this manual concerning the use of
photographic technicians for photographic surveillances.) |The SPU
will design and install unmanned automatic still-camera surveillance
systems
U| tit
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 62
13-7.5.1 Long Range Photography With Telephoto Equipment
The lens used depends upon the distance from the subject
to the cover available.
(1) Telephoto lenses are available for still photography
at distances up to 1500':
Distance Range Rec. Lens Focal Length (2mm 's per foot)
50' - 150' up to 300mm.
150' - 300' 300mm to 600mm.
300' - 600' 600mm to 1200mm.
600* - 1500' 1200mm to 3000mm.
(2) Fast telephoto lenses are available for photography
in situations in which the intensity of the light available is low.
These are limited to up to 400mm.
(3) Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-7.5.2 Night Surveillance Equipment
(1) Night photographic surveillance problems may be •■"*
solved with the utilization of light intensification equipment
provided to each Special Operations Group (SOG) and maintained by the
Special Photographic Unit, Laboratory Division. Night viewing devices
are not designed for photography.
(2) Ultrahigh-speed films for surveillance photography in
low-light-level .situations, such as a dimly lighted street or entryway
at night, are available. The use of such films with available fast
lenses extends surveillance photography to many nighttime. and other
situations where the available light is extremely low. Film,
equipment, and assistance for these applications can be obtained from
the Laboratory.
(3) Infrared photography can be used to obtain
photographs in total darkness. High-speed infrared film, infrared
flashbulbs, light sources and infrared filters for light sources are
available for such installations.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 63
appropri
units.
offices are equipped with a|
Personnel in those offices have been
rained. Only those personnel are to utilize the]
M^
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-7.5.3 Photography With Concealed Cameras
_(1) Conceal ed.. earner as | are [ moj
aents available incli
^ le to solve specific problems.
Special equipment and concealments are available for FCI cases.
Contact the Special Photographic Unit on the secure phone system.
(2) The concealments can be activated by individuals at
the scene or by remote control for unmanned surveillances or camera
traps. Such equipment can be operated by direct wire connection,
timers, tripping devices or radio control.
(3) Camera equipment is available which is readily
adaptable for use from cover in mobile equipment-automobiles, panel
trucks, etc. Reflex (through the lens) focusing cameras are
particularly useful for this application.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-7.5.4 Aerial Photography
Aerial photography! can be used for planning, intelligence
gathering and court purposes. The Mamiya 645 provided to the field
is the recommended camera for aerial photography fro m fixed wing
aircraft or heli<
jontact the Special Photographic unit
lor information and scheduling.
extension J
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 64
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-7.5.5
[Emergency Operational Support
A specialized photographic Emergency Response Team will
.provide immediate on-scene photographic intelligence during a crisis
.situation or any case requiring immediate results. Equipment,
including a portable darkroom system, is prepackaged for immediate
deployment to anywhere in the world. This whole-team concept and
equipment-is- designed ,to_ provide _photographic_results_.without_any
outside source of personnel or other resources su^^^f^electricity.
Contact the Special Photographic Unit, Extension^^^^Vfor
information and scheduling.! ^^^^^
fc
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
I 13-7.5.6 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 11/20/90
{ 13—7.6 } Photographic Examinations | (See MIOG, Part II, 10-3, 13-7,
and 13-7.6.1.) (Formerly 13-18) |
(1) Forensic examinations of photographic evidence are
available from the Special Photographic Unit. Photographic evidence
may include:
* (a) Film negatives
(b) Slides
(c) Instant prints/slides
(d) Photographs
(e) Cameras
(f) Video tape
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive -
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 65
(g) Unexposed film
(h) Undeveloped film
(i) Photographic accessories
(j) Pornography
GO FCI Tradecraft
(1) Motion Pictures
^ I^-g*g— pj; oce gg-£ jjg— picture^f i 1 es ~ ~—
(n) Digital camera image files
(2) Also, any other evidence may be submitted for studio
photographic examinations using, for example, infrared, and
ultraviolet techniques. This nonphotographic evidence includes, but
is not limited to:
(a) Documents
(b) Clothing
(c) Any obliterated writing or printing
(d) Defaced or altered surfaces
(e) Items with hollows or cavities
(3) The following are examinations of photographic
evidence available from the Special Photographic Unit:
(a) Bank Robbery Film Examinations - Bank Robbery
film (or video tape) is examined and compared to other submitted
evidence (guns, clothing, mug shots, bags, hats, etc.). This
examination may help establish a subject's presence at a crime scene
by identifying clothing, weapons, or any other items linked to the
subject. These examinations include surveillance video tapes that are
increasingly popular for bank surveillance. Also subject height
determinations may be made from these images (see Photogrammetry
Examinations below at (3) (e)).
Note: It is important to remember that the negatives or the original
video tape are the best evidence and should always be submitted when
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'$
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 66
an examination is requested. Before submitting, any prints needed for
continuing the investigation should be made from the negatives, and at
least one copy of the video tape should be retained in the field
division.
In conjunction with the | Firearms/Toolmarks | Unit, bullet trajectories
may be calculated through photogrammetric techniques.
(b) Photographic Comparisons - Photographic evidence
is examined and compared to other evidence or photographs of evidence.
Various photographs of a subject taken at* different times and places
may be co mpa red to det ermine if_ thephq^tographs^ are indeed_of the same
subject. The subject may be a suspect individual, vehicle, weapon, or
virtually anything that may be photographed. Also, any items within a
photograph may be compared, for example, a pendant around an
individual's neck, rings, or tattoos.
(c) Time and Location Examinations - Photographic
evidence may be examined to determine the location, time, and date
that an image was taken.
(d) Authenticity Examinations - Photographic
evidence may be examined to determine if the image is the result of a
composite, a copy, or of some other alteration method to cause a
misrepresentation.. Evidence may also be examined to see if it is a
copy of copyrighted or pornographic material.
r
(e) Photogrammetry - Actual dimensions may be
derived from photographic images through the use of various geometric
formulae. The most common is determining the height of bank robbery
suspects. As an adjunct to this type of examination, plan drawings,
or views may be generated. These are "overhead" representations of a
scene depicted in a photographic image. These may be used for mapping
a major crime scene from photographs taken of the scene. This may
include onsite sjurveys by SPU personnel coupled with photographs taken
by specially calibrated cameras.
(f) Infrared (IR) , Ultraviolet (UV) , and X-Ray
Examinations ~ Obliterated writing or other marks may be made evident
by examining evidence with IR, UV, and X-ray photography. These
examinations are based on the principle that various substances may
reflect, fluoresce, or luminesce at different rates. Examples include
overwritten documents, documents with altered writing, objects with
defaced serial numbers, or other identifying marks, or marks that may
be invisible against a similarly colored background.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 67
(g) FCI Tradecraft - The Special Photographic Unit
examines and maintains a collection of foreign counterintelligence
tradecraft. This is not necessarily limited to FCI cases. Any cases
of items designed for concealed cameras, money, drugs, etc., may be
examined for evidentiary purposes.
(h) Source and Age Examinations - In some cases
photographic products (including film and prints) may be dated and
source established by an examination of their manufactured
characteristics. This may be helpful in establishing the time frame
that a photograph may have been taken.
(i) Camera Examinations - Cameras may be examined to
determine if they exposed a particular image. Also they may be
examined to determine if they have been altered (including serial
numbers), and for the purposes they may have been altered. These
examinations include any photographic equipment or supplies that may
have been seized as evidence.
(j) Image Processing - Photographic images that have
been degraded as the result of being out-of-focus, blurred, under or
overexposed, or any other problems contributing to a poor image may be
corrected through the use of computer digital image processing.
(k) Scene Reconstruction - Photography may be used
to "reconstruct" what may have been visible to a subject or witness
under a given set of circumstances. This may also be used to
establish the veracity of photographs introduced in court purporting
to depict lighting conditions at a certain time and place.
(1) Analysis of Time and Motion - The speed of
objects may be calculated in motion pictures, video tapes, or other
images from sequential frame cameras.
_ (m) Photographic Consultation - The SPU is available
to provide assistance on how to best preserve and transport
photographic evidence. In cases where exposed or unknown film or
other photographic materials are seized as evidence, the SPU may be
able to determine whether or not the items have been exposed, and if
so how they should be developed.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
V
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 68
| 13-7.6.1 | Video Tape Enhancement/Examination and Support
| (See also MIOG, Part II, 13-7.1.1 and 13-7.6.1.)
(Formerly 13-29, 13-29.1, 13-29.2 and 13-29.3) |
The | Special J^^^zraphic Unit (SPU) | of the Laboratory
(Room 1 3449, Extension ^^^Bf is responsible for the processing of video
imagery where the imagerequires enhancement and the preparation of a
photographic print. This video imagery may originate from time-lapse
or full-motion video tapes of any format or from still video disks,
j SPU | can provide photographic prints and/or video tapes of these
._enhanced_images..__J Request s.|.f or _compar.is.ons_of_video,_imagery_to_known__
photographic prints or to other submitted evidence (guns, articles of
clothing, bags, hats, etc.) should be forwarded to the | SPU. |
| SPU I can also provide the following forensic video support
services:
(1) Reconstruction of physically damaged video tapes.
This includes tapes that have been damaged due to mechanical
malfunction of a video tape machine or video tapes that have been
deliberately damaged.
(2) |Slow-motionjor frame-by-frame playback of video
tapes. This is often beneficial when actions | or (activities occur
quickly and are not readily apparent to the viewer. This process is
also valuable for recovering partially recorded video frames that also
are not readily apparent to the viewer.
(3) Conversion of foreign video standards. There are
three primary worldwide video standards (NTSC, PAL, and SECAM) . These
standards are not directly compatible. Tapes received from or
destined to foreign countries may require standards conversion. In
addition to providing this conversion process, the | SPU | can provide
consultation and, technical assistance in determining proper video
standards.
(4) Production of demonstrative evidence video tapes for
courtroom presentation. This is to include video tapes produced for
crime scene documentation or reenactment and the preparation of video
tapes containing English-translated subtitles of surveillance video
tapes where the recorded conversation is in a foreign language. '
(5) Where appropriate, |SPU|can edit and/or compile video
segments for briefings or as investigative or demonstrative aids-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 69
[ (6) | Submission to the | SPU | should be by electronic
communication under the case caption. Video frames or sequences that
require enhancement or processing should be identified by using the
time/date recorded on the video tapes when available. Should there be
no time/date or an incorrect time/date recorded on the video tape, a
complete description of the subject or activities in question should
be provided and the tape stopped at the beginning of the pertinent
segment. Also, if available, the manufacturer and model of the
recording video tape machine should be. included.
j (7) [ It should be noted that video-based imagery does not
contain the resolution of film and should not be used as a replacement^
for film, where image detail for identification purposes is required.
| (8) ( Attempts should be made to minimize the number of
times a video tape is played or reviewed. Continued or repeated use
of video tapes, especially time-lapse video tapes, can cause physical
degradation of the tape and can severely limit enhancement efforts.
Original video tape should always be submitted.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-8
SEROLOGY EXAMINATIONS
(1) Forensic serology consists of the identification and
characterization of blood and other body fluids in the crime
laboratory. Evidence is received mainly in connection with violent
crimes, such as murder, rape, robbery, assault-and~battery. Evidence
in burglary, hit-and-run cases and game violation cases is also
frequently received.
(2) __ In cases where it has been determined that a person
is infected with, or is suspected of being infected with either
acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS), tuberculosis or
hepatitis | (A, B, or C) , the Laboratory MUST be notified of the
condition both in the incoming communication and the evidence labeled
accordingly. |
(3) If an investigator is not familiar with or is unsure
about the submission of any particular evidence to the Laboratory,
he/she should call to get advice.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
_ -^ «_-* *t, ■
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 70
EFFECTIVE: 11/20/90
13-8.1
Blood
EFFECTIVE: 11/20/90
13-8.1.1 Blood Examinations Aid Investigations
— — — (1) — in - location~of ~the~crime~scene Identif ication~of -
huraan blood can pinpoint the area for a crime search.
(2) , In determining the possible commission of a crime -
Occasionally, the identification of human blood on a highway,
sidewalk, porch, or in a car is the first indication of a crime's
occurrence.
(3) In identifying the weapon used - The|DNA typing) of
human blood identified on a club, knife or hammer can be of
considerable investigative and prosecutive value.
(4) In proving or disproving a suspect's alibi - The
identification of human blood on an item belonging to a suspect who
claims an animal as the blood source. The identification of animal
blood can substantiate the claim of an innocent person.
(5) In eliminating suspects - The determination byJDNA
typing | tests that human blood on suspect items is different from the
victim's blood can facilitate the release of a suspect or help to
substantiate a suspect's claim of injury.
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
\
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ' . '
13-8.1.2 Information Determinable by Blood Tests
PAGE 13- 71
{ (1) Identification of stains as blood - Chemical analyses
are necessary to positively identify blood. The appearance of blood
can vary greatly depending on the age of stains and on other factors.
(2) Determination whether blood is of human or animal
origin - If animal, determination of specific animal family.
(3) DNA analysis of blood,
(a) Deleted
(b) Deleted
(c) Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
13-8.1.3 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-8.1.4 Collection, Identification and Wrapping of Bloodstained
Evidence (See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7 (9), (10), (11),
(12), (13).)
(1) Agents conducting crime scenes and handling any body
fluids should wear latex gloves inasmuch as the status of infectious
microorganisms (e.g., AIDS, Hepatitis B) that may be contained in body
fluids will not be known. If aerosol droplets or airborne particles
are produced during the crime scene search, surgical masks and eye
protection are recommended. Particular care should also be taken when
handling or searching for secreted sharp instruments such as knives
and hypodermic needles. Agents should use mirrors and flashlights to
look for secreted hypodermic needles and syringes prior to inserting
the hand in areas they cannot clearly see. In any instance where an
injury occurs and a body fluid comes in contact with a wound, however
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 72
minor, medical attention should be sought immediately. (See MIOG,
Part II, 13-8.4 (5).)
(2) Deleted
(3) Garments and fabrics:
(a) Investigator's identifying marks should be put
directly on the fabric in ink, away from stained areas if possible.
(b) Each item should be wrapped separately.
(c) Stains which are moist must be dried out
thoroughly before wrapping or putrefaction of blood will occur.
(d) Drying should be done by exposure to the
atmosphere in a secure, well-ventilated room and not be exposed to
direct sunlight or heat.
(4) Blood on surfaces such as walls or floors - If
possible, remove stained portion of wall or floor. If this is not
possible, stains can be swabbed from surface using swabs slightly
moistened with water. Air dry swabs and place in paper envelopes. DO
NOT PLACE IN PLASTIC.
(5) Blood on automobiles involved in "hit and run" cases
where a paint examination will also be requested should not be scraped
off. It should be chipped off along with appropriate paint specimens
with a sharp object such as a chisel or screwdriver and shipped to the
Laboratory in one piece.
(6) Blood on pieces of glass:
(a) Pieces should be submitted if stains are too
thin for removal, of adequate amount by scraping.
(b) Specimens should be insulated in package to
avoid breakage in transit.
(c) Mark item itself or on container holding pieces
or scrapings.
(d) In circumstances where objects contain
handprints or friction ridge detail present in blood, consideration
should be given to removing sections of walls, floors, glass, etc.,
for submission to the Latent Fingerprint Section for examination and
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
M>
' Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ■ - PAGE 13 - 73
chemical enhancement of these impressions for identification purposes.
(7) Blood in dirt or sand:
(a) If blood is encrusted on surface, the crusts
should be removed and enclosed in separate pillboxes to avoid further
contamination with dirt and sand during shipment. . Remainder of
specimen may be submitted in circular ice cream-type container.
(b) Mark containers appropriately.
(8 ) Blood on l arg e metallic ob jects, such as c ar bumpers
or pipes:
(a) If shipped in wooden box, the use of wooden
cleats or wires inside box is suggested to hold specimen securely and
avoid frictional removal of stains during shipment.
(b) Mark items themselves.
. I (9) Liquid blood samples: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7
(9).)
submitted.
to the sample.
(a) Samples from victim and suspect should always be
(b) No refrigerants and/or dry ice should be added
(c) Blood samples (at least five cubic centimeters)
from the victim and suspect should be collected in two vacutainer
tubes, one containing EDTA (purple top) for DNA analysis and the other
with no preservative (red top) for serological analysis. Package to
protect from | breakage and contain a spill. The internal packaging
should include tjie "Biohazard" labels. |. (See also 13-8.4 (5).)
(d) No other anticoagulant or preservative is
recommended. . Package to protect from breakage, and submit at least 5
cubic centimeters of blood. ,
(e) Sample should be shipped refrigerated without
delay to the Laboratory (air freight or similar rapid transit method).
(f) Stopper should be sealed with tape to avoid
loosening due to air pressure differences in plane and possible loss
of blood.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 74
(g) While in storage, keep under refrigeration but
DO NOT FREEZE.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-8.1.5 Blood Evidence Transmittal Letter
Th.e_l>U:er_Af_rje.ques,t_sAQ
information:
| (1) |A brief statement of the facts surrounding the case.
| (2) | Any claims made by the suspect as to the source of
blood on evidence items.
(3) Deleted
(4) Information concerning weather conditions to which
the evidence might have been exposed, contaminating substances, etc.
(5) Information concerning disease state (s) of subject (s)
and/or victim(s) (examples: AIDS, Tuberculosis, Venereal Disease,
Hepatitis, etc.)
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
13-8.2 Other Significant Body Fluids
EFFECTIVE: 06/10/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 75
13-8.2.1 Body Fluid Examinations Aid Investigations
(1) Seminal Stains:
(a) Their identification by chemical and microscopic
means on vaginal smears or swabs or on a rape victim's clothing may be
of value in corroborating the claims of victim. Seminal fluid
analysis will be performed by DNA analysis.
(b) Deleted
(c) Deleted
| (2) Saliva Stains: In FBI cases, | suspected| saliva stains
will be examined by DNA analysis. (See MIOG, Part II, 13-8.4 (3).)
(a) Deleted
(b) Deleted
j (3) Urine Stains - May be qualitatively identified based
on chemical testing; however, absolute identification may not be
possible. DNA testing on urine stains may be attempted.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-8.2.2 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 76
] 13-8.2.3 Limitations on Seminal Stain and Saliva Stain |DNA Typing|
(1) Sometimes semen is mixed with urine or vaginal
secretion of the victim and interpretation of DNA typing tests is more
difficult.
(2) Saliva on cigarette stubs and on cigar butts may be
DNA typable. Ash trays SHOULD NOT be simply emptied into a container.
Individual butts should be separately packaged and care taken to avoid
ash and debris contamination of any saliva present.
(3) Deleted
(4) ACCURATE EVALUATION OF | DNA TYPING | RESULTS ON
QUESTIONED SEMEN AND SALIVA STAINS REQUIRES KNOWN LIQUID|OR
DRIEDl BLOOD SAMPLES FROM THE VICTIM AND SUSPECT.
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
13-8.2.4 Collection, Identification and Packaging of Evidence
Stained with Body Fluids | (See MIOG, Part II, 13-8.2.5.) |
(1) Semen Samples - Clothing or other material bearing
suspected semen stains should be marked with dates and initials, DRIED
IF MOIST, and each item packaged | separately in paper, NOT PLASTIC.)
(2) Saliva Samples: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-8.2.5.)
(a) Questioned samples should be handled as above
for semen.
13-6.7 (60).)
(b) For Dried Saliva Samples: (See MIOG, Part II,
1. Saliva swabs (also called buccal swabs) can
be collected using sterile cotton-tipped "Q tip" applicators.
Generally these applicators can be purchased in individually wrapped
sterile packets which contain a single sterile swab — generally a five-
inch-long wooden stick with cotton tip.
2. The swab should be put in the mouth of the
individual and placed firmly up against the inside of the cheek and
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•**
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 77
rotated. Generally two swabs, one from each cheek are collected. The
swabs should be allowed to COMPLETELY AIR DRY, then packed and sealed
in clean envelopes, paper packets, or in their original packet and
conveyed to the Laboratory. After drying is. complete, label
appropriate envelope with type of sample, collector's initials, date
and place of collection.
(c) NEVER submit liquid saliva samples.
(3) For Dried Blood Samples: From a fingerprick, or
whole blood sample collected in a purple top (EDTA preservative) tube,
a bloodstain, ia made on sterile, clean cotton cloth (usually washed
~cot"t"o"n""shTeets)T ^Two^t¥ins~"aTe"ljsuairy~pre^ared. The"stains~shourd
be approximately one to two inches in diameter (about the size of a
United States 50-cent piece). The stain should be allowed to
COMPLETELY AIR DRY. The stain can be placed in a paper packet or
envelope for shipping. The stains can then be stored in
refrigerator/freezer conditions for a long period of time. (See MIOG,
Part II, 13-6.7 (12).)
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-8.2.5 The Rape Case - Special Evidence Considerations (See MIOG,
Part II, | 10-3, 13-6.7 (67) & (68).) |
(1) Because of the possibilities of serological evidence
in rape being composed of possible mixtures of body fluids, evidence
collection and preservation in a rape case warrant special
consideration. The forensic serologist can often provide the
investigator with valuable information beyond the statement that
"semen is present" on an item if the necessary samples are obtained
and properly preserved prior to submission to the Laboratory. The
situation outlined below represents the ideal case; however, in many
instances, much of the evidence listed may be obtained without
excessive difficulty.
(2) It should be realized, however, that the majority of
this evidence should be collected as soon as possible (within hours)
of the crime.
(3) The following evidence should be obtained FROM THE
VICTIM in a rape case:
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■'&?
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 78
| (a) | Two liquid blood samples at least 5 cc in
volume. One red-topped tube for conventional serology analysis and
one purple-topped tube for possible DNA analysis. These samples will
enable the laboratory examiner to determine the victim's DNA
characteristics for comparison with the evidence and the suspect's
samples. (See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7 (9) i 13-8.4 (5).)
| (b) | Four vaginal swabs (dry before packaging) .
These would be used for jgenetic |grouping| determination. |
| (c) | Two (2) vaginal smear slides for use as a means
o f showin g that sperm atozoa (and semen ) are , in fact, present. Slides
to be sent to the FBI Laboratory should not be fixed or | stained and
all made from the vaginal swabs from step (b) . |
(d) Two clean swabs from the same package as the
above vaginal swabs. These would be used as unstained control swabs
to show that any result obtained from stained swabs is or is not due
to the cotton of the swabs themselves.
(e) Deleted
(f) In addition to the above, items of clothing, bed
clothes, etc., would logically be obtained from the scene and victim
at this time or as soon after as possible.
(g) Appropriate hair samples should be collected
from the victim (known head and pubic hairs, combed head and pubic
hairs) .
(4) Evidence collected from the SUSPECT (s) would
logically include clothing, a liquid blood sample and a saliva sample,
taken as described in 13-8.2.4 above, and hair samples.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13- 79
( 13-8.3 DNA Analysis |Unit l|
The DNA Analysis | Units (DNA I and II) analyze|
deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) | from biological tissues | recovered from
physical evidence in violent crimes. Evidence examined by the | units j
consists of known liquid and dried blood samples, j hairs, bones,
teeth, | portions of rape kit swabs and extracts, and body fluid stained
cuttings from homicide, sexual assault and serious aggravated assault
cases. These items of evidence are normally examined first to
determine the probative value of DNA analysis.
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-8. A
DNA Evidence Examination Policy
In general, this policy states that the FBI Laboratory
will accept evidence for DNA analysis from current, violent personal
crimes where appropriate standards for comparison are available. The
policy is specified as follows:
(1) BUREAU CASES
(a) Physical evidence submitted for DNA analysis in
connection with FBI investigations will be examined where appropriate.
(b) A known blood sample from the victim and suspect
for comparison purposes is required. No DNA analysis will be
conducted until known blood samples from both the suspect and the
victim have been received. Preliminary examinations, such as the
identification of blood or semen|or hair comparison, | may be conducted
without a known -blood sample from the suspect, where appropriate.
(2) NON-BUREAU CASES
(a) DNA analysis on state and l'ocal cases will be
limited to homicide, sexual assault and serious aggravated assault
cases in which a suspect has been identified. In certain cases,
evidence will be accepted by the FBI Laboratory for DNA analysis even
though a suspect has not been identified. These exceptions include
serial homicide/rape cases and sexual assaults on young children.
(b) A known blood sample from the victim and suspect
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■m
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 80
for comparison purposes is required. No DNA analysis will be
conducted until known blood samples from both the suspect and the
victim have been received in the DNA Analysis (Units. j
(c) Requests for DNA analysis on previously
adjudicated cases should not be submitted to the FBI Laboratory but
should be referred by the investigative agency to one of the private
DNA testing laboratories. Names and addresses of these laboratories
can be provided on request.
(3) PCR TESTING (See MIOG, Part II, 13-8.2.1 (2).)
(a) The DNA Analysis | Units | now | have | on-line a
technique called PCR (POLYMERASE CHAIN REACTION) testing. This
technology allows the Laboratory to obtain a DNA type from| other |
biological materials. Because of limited resources being devoted to
this technology, strict case acceptance policy has been established by
the Laboratory Division.
(b) Evidence for PCR analysis will be accepted only
in FBI cases when a known blood sample from the suspect has been
obtained and submitted along with the evidence. The Laboratory will
not accept state or local cases or domestic police cooperation cases
for PCR analysis unless previously authorized by the Assistant
Director, Laboratory Division.
(4) REEXAMINATION POLICY
(a) It is the policy of the FBI Laboratory that no
examination will be conducted on evidence which has been previously
examined by another expert. However, the Laboratory will accept
evidence samples for DNA analysis even though another crime laboratory
may have conducted traditional tests on the evidence items if that
crime laboratory does not have the capability to perform the DNA tests
and if the submitted samples are determined to be of a quality and
condition conducive to DNA analysis. The, local forensic laboratory
should be encouraged to contact the DNA Analysis |llnits | of the FBI
Laboratory prior to submission of this kind of evidence.
(b) Paternity or parentage testing involving a
paternity index is not done by the DNA Analysis |Units, |even in
criminal cases. The Laboratory does not currently perform these types
of tests. Private paternity testing laboratories should be contacted
for these services.
(c) In cases where conventional serology and no DNA
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and' Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 81
analysis is requested because of judicial rulings, trial delays, etc.,
it is the policy of the Laboratory that no analysis will be conducted.
(5) Evidence submitted for DNA analysis can be collected,
preserved and transmitted to the Laboratory according to the •
guidelines set forth in Section 13-8.1.4 ("Collection, Identification
and Wrapping of Bloodstained Evidence") ; Bloodstained evidence should
be completely air-dried before packaging and submitted promptly to the
Laboratory. Two liquid blood samples, at least 5cc in volume, should
be collected from both the suspect and victim; one red-top tube for
conventional serology analysis (containing no preservatives) and one
purplertop. tube._(containing_EDTA)„_.for_DNA_analysis._ .. These blood_
samples should be' submitted to the Laboratory without delay. In the
event there will be a delay in submission of the dried stain evidence
to the Laboratory, it should be kept frozen. (See MIOG, Part II,
13-6.7 (9), 13-8.1.4(9) (c) & 13-8.2.5 (3).)
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-9
MICROSCOPIC EXAMINATIONS
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-9.1
I Trace Evidence
Trace evidence (hairs and fibers) examinations are
conducted by the Trace Evidence Unit.j
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
, Sensitive
Hanual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II v ■ ■ PAGE 13 - 82
| 13-9.1.1 jTrace Evidence | Examinations Aid the Investigation
These examinations are valuable in that they assist in:
(1) Placing the suspect at the scene of the crime
(a) Transfer of hairs oir fibers between the victim's
and suspect's clothing in crimes of violence such as rape, assault and
murder.
' .(b) Hairs_jjr_f ibers_f rom_a_suspect_lef t„at_the__scene_ ■
:■%¥. '
of crimes such as burglaries, armed robberies and car thefts.
(2) Identifying the scene of the crime - Hairs or fibers
left at the scene of crimes such as burglaries and armed robberies.
(3) Identifying the weapon or the instrument of a crime -
Hairs or fibers on wrenches, knives or clubs.
(4) Identifying hit-and-run vehicles - Hairs or fibers
adhering to suspect automobile.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-9.1.2 Information Determined from an Examination of a Hair
Whether animal or human
(1) If animal, the species and/or family from which it
originated (dog, cat, deer, beef, etc.)
(2) If human, the race, body area, method of removal from
the body, damage, and alteration (bleaching or dyeing) and suitability
for comparison with known hair samples, may be determined.
(3) A comparison with known hair samples will result in a
possible association, an elimination or a no conclusion.
| (4) If a microscopic association is made between a
questioned and known hair sample, DNA analysis may be performed on
the questioned hair and compared to a known blood/saliva sample. |
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
4;
■ V-.
Sensitive '
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 83
■v.**
)
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-9.1.3 Information Determined From Fiber Examinations
(1) Identification of the type of fiber
(a) Animal (wool)
(b) Vegetable (cotton)
(c) Synthetic (man-made)
(d) Mineral (glass)
(2) Determination as to whether or not questioned fibers
are the same type and/or color and match in microscopic
characteristics as those fibers comprising a suspect garment.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
■*wp
13-9.1.4
Limitations of Hair Examinations
(1) Not absolute identification; however, is good
circumstantial evidence.
(2) Age cannot be determined.
(3) Although racial | characteristics, hair color and
length | may be of value for investigative lead purposes, [microscopic
characteristics exhibited by hairs |are not. Furthermore, significant
hair comparisons can only be conducted with known samples of hair,
best obtained by collecting both pluckings and combings from an
individual.
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
*.- ' i,-.V ■> ' «■■ V.-Jiy. ' l.Vav.^-.t,- i" 7Xi-;\£.=-l: ?y7!r ! ''
BiiaBjHHHHaHii
it
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
part II PAGE 13 - 84
13-9.2 Fabric
A positive identification can be made if a questioned torn
piece of fabric can be fitted to the known torn material.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-9.3 Deleted
"EFFECTIVE :~027 12/92 ~~~~
13-9.4 Cordage/Rope
A piece of rope left at the scene of the crime may be
compared with similar, suspect rope.
(1) Composition, construction, color and diameter can be
determined.
(2) Manufacturer can sometimes be determined, if tracer
present.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-9.5 Botanical
Botanical examinations are conducted where plant material
from a known source is compared with plant material from a questioned
locale.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
■v$
M
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98 , ■£*".
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 85
13-9.6 Anthropological
(1) Frequent identifications are made through comparisons
of teeth with dental records and X-rays with corresponding bone
structures.
(2) Examinations may be made to determine if skeletal
remains are animal or human. If human, the race, sex, approximate
height and stature and approximate age at death may be determined.
| (3) DNA analysis may also be performed on the skeletal
_remains-and-compared-to-known-blood/saliva-samples-in-an -at tempt— to
assist in the identification process.)
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-9.7 Wood
The presence of a suspect at the crime scene can often be
established from a comparison of wood from his/her clothing, vehicle
or possession with wood from the crime scene.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-9.7.1 Types of Wood Examinations
(1) Specific source
(a) Side or end matching.
(b) Fracture matching.
(2) Species identification
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-9.8 iDeletedl
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
}M :
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 86
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-9.9 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-9.10 Miscellaneous Examinations
These examinations include the' following:
(1) Fabric impressions
(2) Glove prints
(3) Feather Identification
•f:
' EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-10 CHEMICAL EXAMINATIONS
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.1 Toxicological Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.1.1 Purpose
Assists the medical examiner in determining the cause of
death in suspected cases of poisoning.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II - " '" - PAGE 13 - 87
13-10.1.2 Types of Poisons
(1) Volatiles, such as carbon monoxide, alcohols, cyanide
and solvents.
(2) Heavy metals, such as arsenic, mercury, lead and
antimony.
(3) (Nonvolatile organic poisons, such as drugs of abuse,
pharmaceuticals and pesticides.)
(4) Miscellaneous, such ,as„inorganic compounds, {plant _ —
materials, caustic substances , | and insects.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.1.3 Background Information Useful to Toxicological Examiner
| (1) Copy of autopsy report.
(2) Symptoms exhibited prior to death.
(3) List of drugs administered to victim.
(4) List of toxic chemicals normally encountered by
victim in employment or at home.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.1.4 Desirable Specimens for Complete Laboratory Examination
(1) Brain (75 grams)
(2) Liver (75 grams)
(3) Kidney (75 grams)
(4) Blood (20 cc) (add preservative and identify)
(5) Urine (all)
(6) Gastric contents (all)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
.n * "" 1 - ' — ■ ' t—
Sensitive
Manual o£ Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 ■" 88
(7) Vitreous Humor
(8) Any suspect food, drugs or chemicals
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.1.5 Preparation for Shipment to Laboratory
( 1 ) pia c e each organ and fluid in a se par ate sealed
■■j<>
container.
(2) Have pathologist label and initial each specimen.
(3) Place container in insulated box with dry ice | or
freezer block] (do not allow| coolant | to touch glass jars).
(A) Mark package "Keep Cool" and transmit by | overnight
express. |
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.2 Pharmaceutical and Drug Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.2.1 Information Helpful to Laboratory Examiner
(1) „ Interview of suspect regarding source and use.
(2) Prescription data.
(3) If possible, submit sample in original container.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
PAGE 13 - 89
Sensitive
Hanual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part. II
13-10.2.2 Collection and Preservation
(1) Each item packaged separately and securely.
(2) Each item and/or its container clearly identified by
initials and item number.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13- 10. 2j3__j!if?.rJl^lL Q JLJl£?Argine<l fro m the E xaminations _._.. —
(1) Weight of pharmaceuticals.
(2) Quantitation of active ingredients.
(3) Whether a controlled substance or prescription item.
I EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.3 Arson Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.3.1 Reasons for Arson
(1) Insurance | fraud. |
(2) Revenge.
(3) (Destruction of a crime scene.
(4) Pyromania.
(5) Civil disobedience.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-10.3.2
PAGE 13 - 90
| Arson Evidence |
(1) [Location
(a) Area of intense burning.
(b) Multiple areas of origin.
(c) "V" pattern areas. j
(2) Arson | time delay) devices
(a) Candle plants
(b) Cigarette in matchbook
(c) Molotov cocktail
(d) | Fused chemicals |
| (e) Electronic devices |
(3) Fire trails
(a) Cloth ropes
(b) Burn trails on carpeting
(c) Deep charring trails in hardwood
(4) Removal of property - No typical remains of household
goods in debris
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 91
13-10.3.3 Types of Evidence
|Any sample from the point or area of origin, especially
specimens that are | absorbent in nature or of a type that will retain a
flammable liquid, such as:
10)
I (2)
|(3)
| (5)
M(6)
Padded furniture
Carpets
Plasterboard
Soil
Clothing
Molotov cocktails
'•■$%
}*^%ii
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.3.4 Preservation of Evidence
Most readily flammable liquids are volatile and are easily
lost through evaporation.
(1) Use air tight containers
(a) Clean metal cans (preferable)
| (b) Kapak bags |
| (c) | Clean glass jars ,
(2) ' Properly identify specimen - Initial specimen or
container
-<&•
•,;.» ; -
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
;j— y*T.»77Tj^vj;'55'-'?;'
Sensitive
~*$fe
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-10.3.5 Interpretation of Laboratory Results
PAGE 13 - 92
(1) Gas. Chromatography examination of distillates
recovered from suspected arson debris usually aids in classifying the
{ product |with regardjto distillation range such as gasoline, fuel oil
and paint solvents.
(2) Limitations: Generally unable to identify specific
brand of gasoline or fuel oil due to weathering, common intermixing of
commercial brands and lack of distinguishing characteristics between
brands .
i
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.4 General Chemical Analysis Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.4.1 Definition
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of miscellaneous
chemical evidence.
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
13-10.4.2 Examples of Sources of Materials
| (1) |Deleted|
(2) ' Fraud cases: Verification or disproving
specifications in government purchases, product verification in
"pyramiding" operations, con games, replacement of valuable product
constituents with worthless constituents, etc.
(a) Desired information - Claims made for product by
manufacturers or distributors, alleged constituents, complaints by
users, etc.
(b) Limitations - Products cannot be tested
mechanically or to determine pros or cons of use. Analysis i& limited
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•*%<
..:$
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II : PAGE 13 - 93
to determination of constituents and literature search in reference
thereto. Consideration of use of outside laboratories can be given to
other necessary testing.
(3) Chemical destruction cases: Destruction of paint
surfaces, lawns, and other valuables with harsh chemicals.
(4) Assault cases: Use of harsh chemicals on assault
victims, lubricants used in rape and sodomy cases, miscellaneous
unknown chemicals found at assault scene, etc.
( 5) Sa botage: J^£sh_ch^mi_cal_s L _and other _aduJLJterants_jLn _._
fuel~tanks and oil pans, gears, etc., of drive trains; sea water
contamination aboard ships.
(6) Ink Analysis
(a) Scope - Comparison of the formulations of
questioned and/or known ink specimens including typewriter ribbons and
stamp pad inks.
(b) Limitations - When ink formulations are the
same, it is not possible to determine whether or not they originated
from the same source to the exclusion of other inks having similar
formulations.
(c) Standard ink reference files necessary for
possible association of a questioned ink with a manufacturer are
available to the Laboratory.
(d) Determination of whether or not a document was
written after the date shown thereon can only be made if a date
taggant is in the ink. Only a limited number of companies utilize the
taggant.
(7) Explosives and explosives residue analysis
(a) Post-explosion evidence
1. Scope - Examine evidence after an explosion
for the presence of residues left behind from an explosive.
2. Types of Evidence - Metal, glass, plastics,
rubber close to the seat of the explosion. Soil from the crater
should be removed. Attempt to collect control samples from the
surrounding area.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II :•.': ~ :: ■ . .
PAGE 13 - 94
"■:$
contamination.
in Kapak bags
3. Take necessary precautions to avoid
4. Containers for evidence
a. clean metal paint cans
b. plastic evidence bags' placed and sealed
c. clean glass jars
(b) Preexplosion - raw explosive samples
1. Containers
a. metal cans or glass jars
b. be aware of shipping requirements for
explosives.
2. Limitations - In some cases the manufacturer
of a material can be obtained. Comparison with samples for batch
comparisons is possible.
. (8) Paint and plastics analysis
(a) Faints
1. Scope - Comparison of paint samples from
known source to a paint sample removed from a specimen.
2. Limitations - When paint samples match, it
can only be said that the specimen may have come from the known source
or one just like it. Only in rare cases can a positive match, to the
exclusion of all others, be made.
3. National Automotive Paint File (NAPF) is
housed in the Laboratory.
(b) Plastics
1. Scope - Analysis of plastic or polymeric
materials. Plastic fragments from hit and run accidents can be
reconstructed into its original shape.
: i.
'•«*:
t
fm ■
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
\ i 1 1 i j iii —ij j— ; *■— .] — ■ if i ^ }« ;i"i> i> ; »— i. in" Hf ^W . P W. 'f—
j^-v-r^ry-"-" ;-v ;
j,^! f j : ^ H 'li?"- ^T - ''' - nir ^ 7r: ^^ rt ^ i
I
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
p ar t ii PAGE 13 - 95
(9) Tape Analysis
(a) Scope - Tapes come in a variety of forms such as
masking, electrical, and duct tape. These materials have been used to
bind homicide victims, cover drug packs, and components of improvised
explosive devices. End matches are the most powerful results.
(10) Miscellaneous chemical examinations such as:
(a) Chemical agents on bank robbery packets
(b) Dyes encountered in bank dummy packets or
security devices can be compared with known standards in the
Laboratory
espionage cases
TFIS cases, and
cases,
(e) Verification of stolen chemicals in ITSP and
(f) Harsh chemicals or sugars in DAMV cases.
(g) Adulterants in Tampering With Consumer Product
(h) Trace drugs in money, clothing, suitcases, and
other containers
(i) Smokeless powder comparisons
, (j) Food analyses
(k) Cosmetic examinations
(1) Button examinations
(m) Lubricants - such as Vaseline in rape cases.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
HfiBfiifiifil
-v-
- *%•
s
■&S&
(c) Constituent determination in patent cases .
(d) Flash and water soluble paper' in gambling and .-^
::>-
"••'7ft
■ -^'Tr-
.- <\:>
.-I'
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-11 MINERALOGY EXAMINATIONS
(1) Mineralogy is part of the Trace Evidence Unit.
PAGE 13 - 96
'-ill
&
(2) Mineralogy examinations are conducted on those
materials which are mostly inorganic, crystalline or mineraL in
character, and include glass, building materials, soil, debris,
industrial dusts, safe insulations, minerals, abrasives , and gems.
Compar isons - can , by 1 inference, connect a suspect or object with a
crime scene, prove or disprove an alibi, provide investigative leads
or substantiate a theorized chain of events. (See MIOG, Part II, 13-
15 (2).)
$>
. % EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-11.1
Glass
>■<£''
Glass, a noncrystalline, rigid material usually exhibits
excellent | physical, optical and, compositional (properties for
comparison purposes. When a window breaks, glass particles can shower
10 feet or more toward the direction of the force. Particles,
therefore, get onto hair and clothing of the perpetrator. Particles
|also|become embedded in bullets and/or objects used to break windows.
Particles of broken glass from a hit-and-run vehicle are often found
on the victim's clothing.
;$
"704
(1) [Deleted)
(2) The Laboratory | examiner | cannot identify the source to
the exclusion of ALL other sources; however, it can be stated and
demonstrated that it is highly improbable that the particles came from
a source other than the matching known source; if two or more
different known sources can be matched, the conclusion is greatly
enhanced.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'*
'•VbiJ
%<•
■■:■■&■
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 97
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-11.1.1 Glass Fractures
Fracture patterns are unique. A physical match of two
pieces of glass establishes that they came from a |mutual | source to the
exclusion of all other sources; examinations also result in valuable
information as to the direction of the breaking force.
(1) Penetration of gl ass panes by bullets or high speed
"projectiles - produces - ac^ne "pat fern from which the direction and the
angle of penetration can be determined. If the cone is not present,
stress line patterns as described below' are used to determine the
direction of the force.
(2) By a study of stress lines on radial cracks near the
point of impact, the direction of the force which broke the glass can
be determined.
(a) This determination depends on identification of
the radial cracks and the point or points of impact. A sufficient
amount of glass must be submitted to reconstruct a portion of the pane
from the edge to the point of impact. All, or as much as possible, of
the pane should be submitted.
(b) The pieces of glass remaining in the window
after the breaking should each be labeled to indicate inside or
outside, left, right, top or bottom prior to submission to the
Laboratory. (See 13-11.1.3 below.)
(c) The direction of the breaking force usually
cannot be determined from tempered glass (commonly found in side and
rear auto windows) or very small panes of glass.
(d) Laminated glass, such as windshields, present
special problems. Submit entire windshield if possible.
(e) Heat breaks can be identified, but the side on
which the heat was applied cannot be determined from fracture edges.
(3) Pieces of glass may often be fitted together.
(a) By fitting pieces together with microscopic
matching of stress lines, the Laboratory examiner can positively
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II - • PAGE 13 _ 98
identify the pieces as originally having been broken from a single -■:• .
pane, bottle or headlight. (See 13-11.1.3 below.)
(b) If pertinent portions of a bottle or headlight
can be fitted together, the manufacturer, type, etc., may be
determined for lead purposes.
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
"13-117172 Glass Fibers arid~'Fib~erglass Insulation" 'Materials
Glass fibers from boats, auto fenders, filters and most
often building or duct insulations may adhere to the clothing or
belongings of suspects. By|microscopic comparison, [glass fibers are
identified and compared with the known source.
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
13-11.1.3 Collection of Glass Specimens (See MIOG, Part II,
13-11.1.1(2) (b) & (3) (a).)
(1) In cases where the direction of breaking force is
required, pieces left undisturbed in the window must be marked as to
inside or outside, top, bottom, left, right and all available glass
must be submitted so. that enough pieces can be fitted together to
identify the radial cracks near and at the point of impact.
(2) Where pieces are large enough to fit together, all
available glass must be submitted to increase the probability of
finding matching edges.
(3) Do not place glass samples in paper | or plastic bags
and | envelopes. Wrap each piece securely and package tightly.
(4) Send all available items of clothing of the suspect,
comb his/her hair and check for particles in sweat on skin and in
wounds .
(5) Where fiberglass insulation is involved, be sure all
sources from various areas are sampled. .Look for added insulation
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■yffr
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 " "
over older insulation. Send both.
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
13-11.2 Soils, Dusts, Debris
Soil is defined as any finely divided material on the
surface of the earth and may contain such' man-made materials as
cinders, shingle stones .glass particles , paint, rust, etc. Soil;j»^
"a^Tfelory, - incl!Tdeir"debFir, indusfrial" dusts, oily"soil from under
vehicles as well as natural soils.
EFFECTIVE: 06/15/81
??*. 13-11.2.1 Value of Soil as Evidence
(1) Soil varies widely from point to point on the surface
of the earth and even more with depth. Many small samples are better
than one large sample.
(2) Soil cannot be positively identified as coming from
one source to the exclusion of all others; but the Laboratory expert
can associate questioned soil with a most probable source, conclude
that a source cannot be eliminated or that a point or area could not
be the source of the questioned soil. Such conclusions have proven
extremely valuable in the proof of criminal cases.
(3) Industrial dust specimens or soil near factories, are
often distinctive.
(A) " Debris may contain particles characteristic of a
specific area.
EFFECTIVE: 06/15/81
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■■■■
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 100
I
13-11.2.2 Collection of Soil Specimens
13-6.7 (62).) | -
(See MIOG, Part II,
(1) The investigator should seek likely areas at the
crime scene such as shoe prints, tire marks, burial sites or muddy
areas where a transfer of soil to the suspect is logical. The
investigator should attempt to get samples which visually appear to be
the same as the soil on the suspect's shoes or belongings.
(2) Several samples should be taken from crime scene
areas because of the above-mentioned variation in small areas;
additional samples in at least four directions up to 300 feet from the
scene should be sampled to show that a variation does exist and to
allow the Laboratory to "judge" the probability that the questioned
soil could have come from the area. Samples should be taken from the
surface no deeper than shoes or tires would depress the soil. Many
small samples are desirable, a mixture from a large area or a sample
taken too deep may introduce unwanted variations.
(3) Alibi areas such as the suspect's yard or work area
should be sampled.
(4) |Deleted|
(5) Where soil has fallen or been deposited inside
buildings or cars send carpets or attempt to keep lumps intact by
secure packing; lumps break up in a too large, unpacked container.
(6) Soil from under car fenders may be in layers. Such
soil should be chipped or cut off and packaged so that layers can be
kept intact for comparison with similar lumps that may be found at the
crime scene.
(7) __ Shoes, tires and other items should be submitted to
the Laboratory. ' Attempts to remove the soil in the field may destroy
valuable soil characteristics.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
/V^V.'.w-" 1
&
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 101
13-11.2.3 Packaging of Soil Specimens | (See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7
(62).) |
(1) |Air dry soil before packaging. |
| (2) | Do not use envelopes or glass jars for soil.
| (3) | Use leakproof containers such as film canisters or
plastic pill bottles.
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/97
13-11.3 Safe Insulations
Safe insulation is found between the walls of fire
■>, resistant safes in vaults and safe cabinets. It is readily
transferred to tools and clothing.
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
13-11.3.1 Value as Evidence
(1) ' Safe insulation can usually be identified as such.
(2) The make of safe can often be determined by
examination of the insulation.
(3) Microscopic comparison of particles or deposits with
insulation from the broken safe connects, by inference, clothing or
tools with the safe.
(4) Safe insulation on tools may "make" a case for
possession of burglar's tools.
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
•.V^i:,-.-:.-.7:::..>.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 102
13-11.3.2 Collection and Packaging
(1) Sample near broken edge of insulation.
(2) Send tools or clothing to Laboratory; do not remove
deposits in the field.
(3) Pack to keep lumps intact; protect deposits on tools
by wrapping.
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-11.4 Building Materials
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-11.4.1 Value as Evidence
(1) Where entry is through a roof or wall, particles
adhere to clothing or tools and may be on the loot or in toolbags or
vehicles.
(2) These materials are usually common materials.
[ Maximum value as evidence | is gained through | the presence of several
types, such as brick, mortar, plaster, stucco, etc.
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-11.4.2 Collection and Packaging
(1) The hole should be examined and materials of each
type should be obtained.
(2) Submit in leakproof containers.
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
o
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations, and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 103
13-11.5 Minerals, Rocks, Ceramics
These materials will be examined or compared as requested.
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-11.6 Abrasive Materials
In sabotage and malicious damage to engines, cars, trains,
etc., abrasive materials may be put in oil or lubricants. These
-mat eria Is- can-be- identified -as-sand-or-commercial-abrasives-and-are-of
some value for comparison.
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-11.6.1 Collection of Specimens for Abrasives
(1) If oil, the oil from the engine sump and/or filters
should be submitted; abrasives settle in oil or fuel.
(2) Send affected bearings or parts; the abrasive may be
embedded; scratches or cuts may be typical of abrasive damage.
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-11.7 Gems, Precious Stones, Synthetic and Fake Gems
The Laboratory can determine whether gemstones are
genuine, synthetic or fake. If expedient, a Laboratory examiner is
available for on scene examinations. The Laboratory! can, on a limited
basis depending on inventory, [provide identifiable or Bureau property
gemstones for undercover | operations whether or not recovery of the
gemstones is anticipated. |
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and' Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 104
13-12
FIREARMS IDENTIFICATION
Firearms identif ication|deals with the comparison of
bullets, cartridge cases and other ammunition components to a
particular firearm to determine if they had been fired by that
particular firearm to the exclusion of all other manufactured
firearms. I
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.1
Conclusions
Either one of the three conclusions listed below can be
reached. If either (1) or (2) is reached, that conclusion is positive
as in fingerprint identification.
(1) The bullet, cartridge case, or shotshell casing was
fired by the weapon.
(2) The bullet, cartridge case, or shotshell casing was
not fired by the weapon.
(3) There are not sufficient microscopic marks remaining
on the bullet, cartridge case, or shotshell casing to determine if it
was fired by the weapon or the condition of the weapon precludes the
possibility of making an identification.
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-12.2 Terminology
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
%.
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part n PAGE 13 - 105
13-12.2.1 Caliber
In general, caliber denotes the nominal bore diameter of a
barrel measured in either hundredths of an inch (.01) or in
millimeters (mm). This provides an initial grouping capability, such
as referring to .22 caliber, .30 caliber or .38 caliber.
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-12.2.2 | Car t r i dge | De s igna t i on s
These designations expand from the basic | cartridge J
grouping in a variety of ways. Each one of these designations denotes
a specific cartridge case size and configuration. While some
cartridges will interchange, most are specific for a firearm of a
particular cartridge designation. Among cartridge designations are
the following:
<
(1) Descriptive words: .38 Special, .41 Magnum, .380
Auto, 9mm Corto.
(2) Original powder charge: .30-40 Krag.
(3) Manufacturer's or designer's name: .30 Remington,
6mm Remington, .257 Roberts
(4) Velocity: .250-3000
(5) Year of adoption: .30-06 Springfield
(6) Diameter in millimeters and length of case: 9 x 19, 8
x 57.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■*;
' ; Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13-106
13-12.2.3 General Rifling Characteristics
These vary from manufacturer to manufacturer and consist
of:
(1) Number of lands and grooves.
(2) The | widths | of the lands and grooves.
(3) Direction of twist of rifling.
(4 ) Caliber.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-12.3 Types of Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-12.3.1 Bullets .
Marks on bullets can be produced by rifling in the barrel
of the firearm or possibly in loading.
(1) Recovered evidence bullet: Determine manufacturer,
specific caliber, type and make of firearm from which fired and
whether sufficient marks are present for identification. (Make of
firearm involved based on general rifling characteristics.)
(2) , Bullet versus firearm: Determine whether bullet
fired from firearm.
(3) Shot pellets, buckshot and slugs from the victim or
scene: Can identify size of the shot and gauge of the slug.
Occasionally,- shot can be identified to the barrel of a particular
shotgun.
(A) When a bullet and/or fragments bearing no microscopic
marks of value for identification purposes are encountered, it is
often useful to perform a quantitative analysis of the bullet and/or
fragment and compare them to the similarly analyzed bullets of any
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 107
recovered suspect ammunition (for example, cartridges remaining in
suspect's firearm, cartridges in suspect's pockets, partial boxes of
cartridges in suspect's residence). When two or more lead samples are
determined to be compositionally indistinguishable from one another, a
common manufacturer's source of lead is indicated. Lead composition
information in conjunction with other circumstantial information is
often useful in linking a suspect to a shooting. | (Lead examinations
are conducted by the Materials and Devices Unit. See MIOG, Part II,
13-14.) I
Compositional analysis of shot pellets and rifled slugs can provide
similar useful circumstantial information.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-12.3.2 Fired Cartridge Case or Shotshell Casing
Marks on a fired cartridge case or shotshell casing can be
produced by breech. face, firing pin, chamber, extractor and ejector.
(1) Fired cartridge case found at scene: Determine
specific caliber, type and possibly make of | firearm | in which fired,
and whether sufficient marks are present for identification.
(2) Fired shotshell casing found at scene: Determine
gauge, original factory loading and whether sufficient marks are
present for identification.
(3) Wadding or shot from victim or scene: From wadding
determine gauge and possibly manufacturer of wadding. From shot,
determine size. Shot not identifiable with a suspect | firearm. |
(4) ' Fired cartridge case/shotshell casing
versus | firearm: | To determine whether loaded into and/or fired in
[firearm. I
(a) Based on identifiable firing pin impression,
breech face or chamber marks, can establish as fired in specific
I firearm. I
„t
(b) Based on extractor or ejector marks, can only
identify as having been loaded into and extracted from specific
| firearm. |
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
WmZMBWZ
■■'iTISV'"'
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Par t II PAGE 13 - 108
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.3.3 Unfired Cartridge or Shotshell
(Note: See 13-12.4.2 regarding "Shipping of Live
Ammunition.") Sometimes it is important to determine whether the
unfired cartridge or shotshell was loaded into and extracted from a
I f irearmjbased on the presence of extractor and/or ejector marks. The
"following" can"'be~ determined: ~~ ~~~ ~
(1) Cartridge: Specific caliber, type of|firearm|
involved and whether sufficient marks for identification.
(2) Shotshell: Gauge and whether sufficient marks are
present for identification.
(3) Cartridge/shotshell versus | firearm: | Determine if
loaded into and extracted from a suspect J firearm. | Does not apply to
revolvers.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.3.4 Gunshot Residues
Gunshot residues may be located, depending on the muzzle-
to-garment distance, by
(1) Microscopic examination of the area surrounding the
hole for gunpowder particles and gunpowder residues, smudging and
singeing.
(2) Chemical processing of area surrounding hole to
develop a graphic representation of powder residues and lead residues
around hole. Test patterns obtained compared with those produced at
various distances using suspect firearm and ammunition like that used
in the case — from same source if possible.
| (3) The Firearms/Toolmarks Unit (FTU) only examines
victim's clothing for gunshot residues in order to determine distance
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
tf^ T -J ' '. ' ■' ' ' ■*■■ * " ' " " ■: ". - ^ , "" " " " ''- ; ' "-"J ' r * " .'. mv '-t . ' "". — r— "
/..
Sensitive ■•■ : ^j.
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 109
of the muzzle of the firearm to the clothing at the time of
discharge. Therefore, only the clothing from the area where the
victim was shot should be submitted for examination for gunshot
residues. For example, if the victim was shot in the chest, requests
for examination of the victim's pants, shoes, etc., for gunshot
residues should not be made.
(4) In rare occasions the FTU will examine shooter's
clothing for gunshot residues, primarily when there is evidence of a
struggle between the victim and the subject. The FTU does not
examine suspected shooter's clothing for the presence of gunshot
residues in order to prove _that^ they discharged a firearm. In the
event an examination of a shooter's clothes for the presence of
gunshot residues is needed, the request should be directed to the
Chemistry Unit. |
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-12.3.5 Shot Pattern
The distance at which a shotgun was fired can be
determined. It is necessary to test fire THE SUSPECT | firearm} at
various distances using the same type of ammunition as involved in the
case being investigated. Fired shotshells from the suspect | firearm|
can be submitted. See paragraph 13-12.4.2 regarding the shipment of
live ammunition.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.3.6 Trigger Pull
The amount of pressure necessary to fire a weapon can be
determined.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
J?
13-12.3.8 Identif ication.. of- Gun Parts-
Gun parts found can be identified as to
(1) Type of | firearm [from which it originated
(2) In some cases, it might be possible to determine the
part that came from a suspect firearm; however, in most instances,
examination of the part will only determine if the part is consistent
in observable physical characteristics with the type of parts utilized
in the suspect firearm.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.4 Submission of Evidence
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
1
13-12.4.1 Clothing for Gunshot Residue Examination
(1) Protect each, article of clothing at the time of
removal and wrap each separately. (Each article of clothing that has
blood on it must have a biohazard label placed on the outside of its
individual package. A biohazard label must also be placed on the
outside of the box containing the separate wrapped packages, as well
as on the outer wrapping of the box. (See MIOG, Part II, 13-3.1
(4)(e).)|
(2) Make certain all garments are AIR-DRIED in shade
before submitting to the Laboratory.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive -v?;
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part . n "'•' PAGE 13 " U0
13-12.3.7 Determination of Accidental Firing
("Accidental" is a determination of a state of mind;
however, a firearm] can be examined to determine if it can or cannot be
[fired without pulling the trigger. |
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
ttyjf
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 111
(3) Provide autopsy reports and/or copies of autopsy
photos if victim is deceased. Otherwise advise as to location of
gunshot wounds.
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
13-12. A. 2 Live Ammunition (See KIOG, Part II, _13-6V7_(5) , J {16) ,
13-6.7.1, 13-12.3.3, 13-12.3.5, 13-12.4.3; MAOP.Part II,"
2-2.2.1, 6-2.3.9.)!
Live ammunition cannot be sent through the U.S. |Postal
Service | but can be shipped via Federal Express. The following
guidelines must be strictly followed in order to comply with
Department of Transportation regulations:
(1) |Deleted|
(2) Air Shipments (Federal Express) -
(a) Cardboard box with appropriate label and
invoices marked "Federal Express."
(b) Shipper's certification for restricted articles.
(c) "Small Arms Ammunition" stamped on outside of
box.
EFFECTIVE: 04/0Z/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ' PAGE 13 - 112
13-12.4.3 Bullets, Cartridge Cases and/or Firearms
(1) Ammunition components such as bullets, cartridge
eases, wads and firearms can be sent to the Laboratory by registered
mail, U.S. Postal Service. Complete cartridges, gunpowder and/or
unfired primers. must be shipped by Federal Express. (SeeJMIOG, Part
II, 13-6.7 (5), (15), (17), (29);|MA0P, Part II, 6-2.3.9.)
(2) Firearms have been submitted to the Laboratory with
foreign objects such as flex cuffs, pencils, etc., in the
barrel/chamber area, or the actions have been left open which allowed
p acki ng m aterial (styrof oam /s hredded pa per) to e nter th e se are as.
While safety is certainly paramount, and every effort' should be made
to make sure a firearm is unloaded when it is sent to the laboratory,
it should be recognized that certain practices, while serving the
purpose of rendering the firearm safe, can adversely affect some of
the Laboratory examinations for which the firearm is being submitted.
(3) In firearms examinations, the most critical areas of
a firearm are the bore, chamber and breech face. Placing a flex cuff
through the barrel of a pistol, for example, could result in the cuff
material rubbing against, and changing the microscopic marks in the
bore and chamber areas of the barrel and the breech face area of the
slide or dislodging trace evidence in these areas. Likewise, placing
a pencil or rolled-up piece of paper in the action to keep it opened,
could also adversely affect the marks on the breech face and also
allow packing material to enter the firearm. In some instances, a
firearm has been received which would not function due to shredded
paper or styrofoam pellets having entered the action/chamber areas.
(4) As an examination of a firearm can involve additional
Laboratory examinations for latent fingerprints, blood, etc., firearms
evidence should be packaged to eliminate or reduce as much as possible
the likelihood of damage to such evidence.
Firearms can be sent by registered mail, U.S. Postal Service.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive '
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
■«
PAGE 13 - 113
13-12.5
Marking Specimens for Identification
(1) |Bullets, cartridge cases, shotshell casings,
cartridges, shotshells and other firearms-related evidence should be
marked with initials or other personal identifying data on the
primary evidence container only. (Caution: Do not place markings on
the item(s) itself. Any trace evidence on the item and the
microscopic marks need protection from possible loss or
destruction.) |
'"• | (2) | Firearms: (See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7 (29).)
| The primary container with the firearm should be marked
with initials or other personal identifying data. (Caution: Do not •
place markings on the firearm itself. The firearm may need to undergo
various examinations, such as DNA, Trace, or Latent Fingerprint;
therefore, protection must be afforded to the firearm to avoid
possible loss or destruction of evidence.) |
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-12.6 Obtaining Test Specimens
Whenever possible, the firearm should be submitted to the
Laboratory. If the firearm cannot be submitted, j call the
Firearms/Toolmarks Unit for instructions.)
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-12.7 Standard Reference Files-
EFFECTIVE: 06/26/91
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
,-',¥ owh'W")' 1 4" iii.iTu^niiiiiiiin ip r-
Sensitive .■£
•■'■r
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 114
13-12.7.1 Reference Firearms Collection
This collection contains over | 3 , 000 | handguns
and|2,000| shoulder weapons and is used for such things as:
(1) Locating serial numbers
(2) Replacing inoperable | firearms | parts
(3) Identifying gun parts
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.7.2 Standard Ammunition File
| The Standard Ammunition File is maintained in the FBI
Laboratory's Firearms-Toolmarks Unit (FTU) . This file is
continuously updated and contains over 15,000 commercial and military
ammunition specimens of both domestic and foreign manufacture. These
specimens serve as standards which assist in the determination of
ammunition type and manufacture. A computerized database permits
comprehensive searching of this file on the basis of the observable
physical characteristics present on unknown ammunition components.!
EFFECTIVE: 04/01/96
13-12.7.3 Reference Fired Specimen File
This file contains test bullets and cartridge cases
obtained from| firearms |which have been| f ired| in the Laboratory.
(Note: An "Unidentified Ammunition File," "Open Case File" or
"Unsolved Crime File" consisting of bullets and cartridge cases
recovered from crime scenes is no longer maintained by the
Laboratory.)
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 115
| f 13-12.7.4 General Rifling Characteristics File (GRC)
This computerized data file contains information relating
to the general rifling characteristics of a number of firearms. In
those cases in which no firearm is provided, the GRC file is used by
the Firearms-Toolmarks Unit to provide a list of firearms which could
possibly have fired the submitted bullet or cartridge case.]
-?.»>•
-EEFECTIVE:-04/01/-96-
| 13-12.8 Disposition of | Firearms | and Related Property
The following guidelines are to be used in Bureau cases.
\ | (1) Any | firearm | to be disposed of should be done so by
the Laboratory.
| (2) The Laboratory can dispose of | firearms | and related
property with a court order, Declaration of Forfeiture, and a
Declaration of Abandonment Vesting Title to the United States. If
such cannot be obtained, see United States Marshal's Manual, Section
709.01 (Prisoner's Property) or Section 322.01 (Abandoned Property).
When obtaining a court order, the requesting attorney should be
| advised to seek an order directing the j firearms | into the custody of
the FBI "for its use or for any other official purpose." The court
order must be signed by a judge. (See MAOP, Part II, 2-4.4.6.)
[ (3) The Laboratory can dispose of j firearms) and related
property purchased with Bureau funds when all investigations and court
proceedings have- been adjudicated.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-12.9 (Deleted!
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 116
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
| 13-12.9.1 |Dele.ted[
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
13-12.9.2 [Deleted!
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
| 13-12.9.3 |Deleted|
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
13-13
TOOLMARK IDENTIFICATION
I
Toolmark examinations include, but are not limited to,
microscopic studies to determine if a given toolmark was produced by a
specific tool. In a broader sense, they also include the
identification of objects which forcibly contacted each other; were
joined together under pressure for a period of time and then removed
from contact; and were originally a single item before being broken or
cut apart. The inclusion of these latter areas results from the
general consideration that when two objects come in contact, the
harder (the "tool") will mark the softer. (Saws, files and grinding
wheels are generally not identifiable with marks they produce.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
•;*?•
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 117
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-13.1 Conclusions
(1) That the tool produced the toolroark
(2) That the tool did not produce the toolmark, or
(3) That there are not sufficient individual
ch aracteristics remain ing within the t oolroark to det ermi n e if the tool
did or did not produce it. ~
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-13.2 Types of Toolmark Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-13.2.1 Toolmark with Tool
Several comparisons can be made between a tool and a
toolmark such as the:
(1) Examination of the tool for foreign deposits such as
paint or metal for comparison with a marked object.
(2). Establishment of the presence or nonpresence of
consistent class characteristics.
(3) Microscopic comparison of a marked object with
several test marks or cuts made with the tool.
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
a
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 118
13-13.2.2 Toolmark Without Tool
Examination of the toolmark can determine:
(1) Type of tool used (class characteristics)
(2) Size of tool used (class characteristics)
(3) Unusual features of tool (class or individual
characteristics)
__(4) .AcXi.on_emp,lpye.d3y_the_topJ^_in_.its operation
(5) Most importantly, if the toolmark is of value for
identification purposes.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-13.2.3 Metal Fracture
Fracture examinations are conducted to ascertain if a
piece of metal from an item such as a bolt, automobile ornament,
knife, screwdriver,- etc., was or was not broken from a like damaged
item available for comparison. This type of examination may be
requested along with ajmetallurgical | examination (see major topic 13-
14 elsewhere in this section).
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-13.2.4 Marks in Wood
This examination is conducted to ascertain whether or not
the marks left in a wood specimen can be associated with the tool used
to cut them, such as pruning shears, auger bits, etc. This
examination may be requested along with a wood examination (see
secondary topic 13-9.7 elsewhere in this section).
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 119
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-13.2.5 Pressure/Contact
Pressure or Contact examinations are conducted to
ascertain whether or not any two objects were or were not in contact
with each other either momentarily or for a more extended time.
EFFECTIVE: 01/31/78
13-13.2.6 Theftingate Cast Material
Theftingate Cast Material impressions of stamped numbers
in metal, such as altered vehicle identification numbers, can be
examined and compared with other | cast impressions , | as well as
with|suspect die stamps. Instructions for use of this casting
material can be obtained from the Firearms/Toolmarks Unit, FBI
Laboratory. | (See MIOG, Part II, 13-13.3.1.)
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-13.2.7 Lock and Key Examinations
(1) The purpose of a lock examination is to
possible, if toolmarks are present that indicate attempts
pick the lock, or- if some type of tool or instrument was
the lock. When such a request is made, only the lock or
of the lock which have visible toolmarks on them should b
For example, if "the outer doorknob was forced, then only
should be submitted for examination. Also, in the case o
marks that were already on the lock at the time of the cr
noted in the request for examination.
determine, if
were made to
used to force
those parts
e submitted.
that knob
f worn locks,
ime should be
(2) Examination of keys can determine their observable
physical characteristics, such as number and depth of cuts, blade
style, etc. A determination of whether key will operate a specific
lock can only be made after the key is actually tested in the
questioned| lock and does hot require an examination by an examiner
from the Firearms/Toolmarks Unit.j
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
%
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 120
(3) As the main thrust of the FTU examination is
concerned with toolmarks, if there are questions about the operation
of a particular style lock, consideration should be given to
contacting a local locksmith with those questions.
EFFECTIVE; 07/25/97
13-13.3 Obtaining Evidence in Toolmark Cases | (See MIOG, Part II,
13-6.7 (64).) |
(1) It is most desirable, if possible, to submit the
actual toolmarked area for direct comparison. (Note: In number
restoration cases, the Laboratory will routinely make a cast of the
toolmark for a possible future comparison with[any suspect die|
stamps.)
(2) If it is impossible to submit the original, prepare
and submit a cast, preferably | using Theftingate Casting Material or a
suitable silicone-based material. | For instructions on how to prepare
a plastic cast/impression see paragraph 13-13.3.1 below.
(3) Photographs, although helpful in presenting an
overall location of the mark, are of no value for identification
purposes.
(4) Do not forget to obtain samples of paint, safe
insulation, and any other material likely to appear as foreign
deposits on tools.
(5) . DO NOT place the tool against the toolmark for size
evaluation.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
V ."ST
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13-121
13-13.3.1 Theftingate Cast Material Impressions (See HIOG, Part I;
| 26-2.8; Part II, 10-3, 13-13.2.6, | 13-13.3.) |
The following instructions are for making a plastic
cast/impression of stamped numbers in metal.
s
| (1) All casts should be taken BEFORE ANY | small | number
restoration is attempted. (See "Items with Obliterated Identification
Markings" under secondary topic 13-14.2 elsewhere in this section for
further information on number restoration.)
(2) Casts should be ta ken usin g Theftinga te Ca st Material
(made by Advanced Ceramics Services, Denver, Colorado, Telephone
Number (303) 237-5456) which should be available in each {office or can
be obtained by contacting the Firearms/Toolmarks Unit in the
Laboratory Division. |
(3) The number one priority in taking a cast of stamped
numbers is cleaning the number area of any foreign matter as the cast
material will duplicate any foreign material left in the stamped
characters. Thus, paint and dirt should be removed from the stamped
area with a suitable solvent (acetone, gasoline or a commercial paint
remover). A toothbrush could be used to help clean down to the bottom
of the stamped area and IN NO INSTANCE should a wire brush be used to
clean the area as this will scratch the numbers and make subsequent
identification of the stamps impossible. If there is any rust in the
stamped numbers, use of "NAVAL JELLY" is helpful in removing the rust.
(4) Having cleaned the surface, a dam should be built
| around it to retain the liquid| casting material J while hardening and
cooling. The liquid and the powder of the replica kit are mixed for
| one minute in the | plastic bottle | that contained the powder. The dam
material should be a soft pliable clay-like material such as caulking
cord, "Play Dough" or modeling clay. Prior to forming the dam, nylon
filament tape should be placed at each end of the characters, partly
within the dam area to facilitate the cast removal. All voids around
the dam should be sealed to prevent leaking. Once the liquid has been
poured and hardened, lift up on the ends of the tape to lift out the
cast. If the cast has a lot of paint and rust, additional casts
should be taken until the best possible cast has been obtained and
this should be submitted to the Laboratory.
(5) The Theftingate Cast Material is available in three
formulations for use in three different temperature ranges: 40 to 69
degrees Fahrenheit, 70 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit, and over 80 degrees
Fahrenheit. At very low temperatures, setting time can be several
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
?—« 'I' . 'T^y*-*: i'."^- r/r*r* .VTT*"
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
. "1 >^"
i, ; S;
i.Mi'ViS-
PAGE 13 - 122
hours even when using the low temperature range formulation. In this
instance, if possible, the vehicle or metal should be moved to a
heated building. Further the area can be heated by several methods
such as heat lamp, infrared light bulb, hair dryer directed on the
number area and then upon the cast, etc. The use of a torch to heat
the area is not recommended.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-13.4 Submitting Toolmark Evidence to Laboratory | (See MIOG,
Part II, 13-6.7 (64).) |
(1) Pack j the evidence, possibly with cotton, | to preserve
the evidence and prevent contamination.
(2) Properly identify each item to facilitate court
presentation. Consider the possible need in court of the object from
which the specimen was cut.
(3) Submit the tool rather than making test cuts or
impressions in field.
(4) Hark ends of evidence which are or are not to be
examined.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-13.5 Reference Files | (See MIOG, Part I, 26-2.8.) |
(1) National Automobile Altered Numbers File:
Laboratory is maintaining in the National Automobile Alter
File selected specimens, including surface replica plastic
of altered vehicle identification numbers found on stolen
and heavy equipment. The purpose of this file is to have
repository for such specimens of altered numbers so that c
can readily be made at any time in an attempt to identify
stolen cars and possibly link such vehicles with commercia
rings nationwide or other cases investigated by the Bureau
The FBI
ed Numbers
impressions
cars, trucks
a central
omparisons
recovered
lized theft
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•'V-
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 123
(2) iDeletedl
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-13.6
Identification Manuals
t^^l^ie^^^^^
Laboratory manuals concerning the identification of
.automobiles.,_foreign__and domes tic.,_tracto.r_t rucks ,._trailers_and_
construction equipment are updated on a timely basis.
lformation and photographs which indicat<
j.nd provide'"investigative aids
&ent examining LJleSe'Tnnds of equipment. Copies of these manuals
be obtained by contacting the Firearms-Toolmarks Unit of the
Laboratory Division. |
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/83
.iaji!£_
can
13-14 METALLURGY EXAMINATIONS
13-13.2.3.)!
(See MIOG, Part II, 13-12.3.1,
{Metallurgy encompasses the science of metals and other
materials. These materials |may be metallurgically examined for
comparison purposes and/or information purposes.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-14.1
Examinations for Comparison Purposes
Determinations to ascertain if two metallic|or
nonmetallic | objects came from the same source or from each other
usually require evaluations based on surface characteristics,
microstructural characteristics, mechanical properties and
composition.
(1) Surface Characteristics - macroscopic and microscopic
features exhibited by the metal [or material | surface including
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 124
fractured areas, accidental marks or accidentally damaged areas,
manufacturing defects, material defects, fabrication marks and
fabrication finish. The fabrication! features reveal] part of the
mechanical history of how a metal was formed; e.g., if it was cast,
forged, hot-rolled, cold-rolled, extruded, drawn, swaged, milled,
spun, pressed, etc.
(2) Hicrostructural Characteristics - the internal
structural features of a metal as revealed by optical and electron
microscopy. Structural features include the size and shape of grains;
the size, shape and distribution of secondary phases and nonmetallic
inclusions; and segregation and other heterogeneous conditions. The
microstructure is related to the composition of - the metal~~atul - to th~e~
thermal and mechanical (histories of the metal, including post-
fabrication exposures and/or deformations. |
(3) Mechanical Properties - describes the response of a
| [material | to an applied force or load, e.g., strength, ductility,
hardness.
(4) Composition - the chemical element make-up of the
[ |material | including major alloying elements and trace element
constituents. Because most commercial metals and alloys are
nonhomogeneous materials and may have substantial elemental
variations, small metal samples or particles may not be
compos itionally representative of the bulk metal.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
| 13-14.2 Examinations for Information | Purposes |
Some of the kinds of information that can result from
| metallurgical examinations of {materials | in various conditions are
listed below:
| (1) j Damaged metallic or nonmetallic items]
| (a) Cause of the failure or damage.
(b) The magnitude of the force or load which caused
the failure.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
<
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 125
(c) The possible means by which the force or load
| was transmitted to the|item|and the direction in which it was
transmitted.
(2) Burned, heated or melted metal
(a) Temperature to which the metal was exposed.
| (b) Nature | and/or direction | of the heat source which
damaged the metal.
I (c) Whether thelitemlwas involved in an electrical
short-circuit situation.
(3) Rusted or corroded metal - length of time the metal
had been subjected to the environment which caused the rust or
corrosion. Requires that the investigator submit information
J concerning the environmental conditions.
i | (4) Cut or severed|material |
V'
p
? I (a) Method by which thefmaterial |was severed -
sawing, shearing, milling, turning, electrical arcing, flame cutting
(oxyacetylene torch or "burning bar"), etc.
[ (b) J Temperatures and/or type of equipment required. |
| (c) |Deleted|
| (5) | Fragments |
(a) Method by which the fragments were formed.
(b) If fragments had been formed by high velocity
forces, may determine if an explosive had been detonated and the
| [relative jmagnitude of the detonation velocity.
(c) Possible identification of the item which was
the source of the fragments. In bombings, timing mechanisms can often
be identified as to type, manufacturer and model; determinations are
often possible as to the time displayed by the mechanism when the
explosive detonated and as to the relative length of time the
mechanism was functioning prior to the explosion.
^%l (6) Watches, clocks and timers
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
-%
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Par t II PAGE 13 - 126
(a) Condition responsible for causing the timing
mechanism to stop or malfunction.
(b) Whether the time displayed by the mechanism
represents AM or PM (calendar-type timing mechanisms only).
(7) Deleted
(8) Lamp bulbs
(a) Whether a broken lamp bulb was incandescent at
the time the glass portion broke.
(b) Whether an unbroken lamp bulb was incandescent
at the time it was subjected to impact forces such as those developed
in vehicular collisions.
(9) Objects with questioned internal components: X-ray
radiography can reveal the interior construction and the presence or
absence of cavities or foreign material.
(10) Items with obliterated identification markings -
Obliterated identification markings are often restorable, including
markings obliterated by melting of the metal (welding, "puddling").
Obliterated markings can also be restored on materials other than
metal. Because different metals and alloys often require specific
methods for restoration of obliterated markings, the Laboratory should
be contacted before any field processing for number restoration is
attempted. | (See MIOG, Part I, 26-2.8 (1); Part II, 10-3, 13-13.3.1.))
| (11) Speedometers: Speed indicated at impact. |
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
-.*
PAGE 13 - 127
13-15
MATERIALS ANALYSIS EXAMINATIONS
(1) |These examinations are made by. the Chemistry Unit.
(See MIOG, Part II, 13-10.) | These examinations entail the use of
microscopic, mierochemical and instrumental techniques such as Fourier
transform infrared spectroscopy, X-ray diffraction, pyrolysis gas
chromatography - mass spectrometry, scanning electron microscopy,
differential thermal analysis, capillary electrophoresis, liquid and
ion chromatography, etc., for both organic and inorganic analyses,
identification and/or comparison of the compositions of paints,
plastics (polymers), tape (electrical, masking, and duct tapes),
-glues,— caulker/sealants, -cosmetics, _expi os ives-and_expl os ive_residues._
(2) Mineralogy is part of the|Trace Evidence|Unit
(seeJMIOG, |Part II, 13-11 for mineralogy examinations).
^^i f Jj^*'
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
j 13-15.1 Paints, Cosmetics, Plastic ^Products, and Tapes |
EFFECTIVE: 09/03/93
13-15.1.1 Automobile Paints
It is possible to establish the color, year and make of an
automobile from a paint chip by use of the National Automotive Paint
File which conta-ins paint panels representing the original paint
finish systems used on all makes of American cars, light trucks, vans,
and most foreign cars. A very careful search of the accident or crime
scene should be made to locate small chips because:
(1) Paint fragments are often found in the clothing of a
hit-and-run victim) during Laboratory examinations.!
(2) Paints may be transferred from one car to another,
from car to object, or from object to car during an accident or the
commission of a crime.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II :_....
PAGE 13 - 128
^;
|(3)The paint particles may not be big enough to
recognize/detect with the unaided eye so suspected transfer items
should be submitted to the Laboratory for complete analysis. Also,
thinly deposited, smears of paint may vary in color and should not be
eliminated during a field examination. I
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
Q
13-15.1.2 Nonau tomob ile Pain ts and Other Coa t i ngs _
(1) Coatings of all types can be analyzed and compared.
Paint on safes, vaults, window sills, door frames, | furniture,
bicycles, |etc, may be transferredjwhen forcible contact is made with
another object. | For example, a comparison can be made between the
paint on an object and the paint on a tool to determine if there was
contact with a particular painted surface. However, the manufacturer
cannot be determined (other than original automotive paint finishes).
(2) Fine art authentication through complete chemical
analyses of the coatings/materials utilized in the painting|can be
performed. I
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
13-15.1.3 Cosmetics and Related Items
Known and questioned samples of cosmetics, such as
lipstick, face powder, | body lotions and lubricants, | and various other
make-up mater ials can be compared with each other but
they | normally | cannot be associated with a j specific source,
manufacturer or distributor.!
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 129
13-15.1.4 Plastics/Polymers
It is|usually|not possible to specifically identify the
{particular jsource, use, or manufacturer of plastic items from
composition alone but comparisons such as the following can be made:
(1) Trim from automobiles, depending upon the uniqueness
of the composition, is compared with plastic remaining on the victim
or property struck in a hit-and-run.
(2) Plastics comprising insulation on wire used in
bombings or other crimes are compared with known or suspected sources
"of "insula ted~wi r e . "~ ~~ " ~~
(3) Miscellaneous plastic material (including buttons)
from crime scenes is compared with possible sources.
EFFECTIVE: 05/31/94
13-15.1.5 Tape
A positive identification may be made with the torn or cut
piece of tape left at the scene of the crime or on a victim and a roll
of suspect tape (similar to fabric examination).
(1) Associations of tapes left at the scene and from
suspected sources are determined from physical and compositional
characteristics.
(2) Deleted
(3) J Trace Evidence | Unit maintains a duct tape reference
file.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
[[13-15.1.6 Explosive Residues
'^1% | See Part II, Section 13-6.7.1.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
%
m
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 130
EFFECTIVE! 05/26/89
13-15.2 Fluorescent Powders and Other Marking Materials
EFFECTIVE: 09/03/93
13-15.2.1 Purpose
Marking materials are used to prepare an object, be it a
decoy package, cash box, money, etc., in order that a detectable trace
will be left on a person or the property of a person who handled the
object.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-15.2.2 Selection Factors
(1) The choice of material depends on factors inherent
with each situation. | These materials can be obtained as kits from
commercial vendors.)
(2) The material used can be a dry powder, liquid, or
grease and be available in many visible and fluorescent colors.
(3) Fluorescent materials require a source of ultraviolet
light to examine the subject's hands or clothing.
(4) * Deleted
(5) Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'p.
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 131
13-15.2.3 Deleted!
EFFECTIVE: 09/03/93
13-15.2.4 iDeletedl
EFFECTIVE: 09/03/93
13-15.2.5 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 09/03/93
13-15.2.6 Fluorescent Materials
(1) Have the advantage of not being visible to the
subject.
(2) Have the capability of being subsequently identified
as the same powder used, by analysis of deposits on clothing, etc.
(3) Have the disadvantage of requiring a source of
ultraviolet light (see item (7) below).
(4) Phosphorescent materials are different from
fluorescent powders and must not be used since these may be detected
by the subject even without an ultraviolet source.
(5) Must be applied in a finely ground or powdered form.
(6) Choice of form depends on object to be marked, for
example: .
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Far t II- PAGE 13-132
(a) Contact areas of tools can be coated with a
grease, such as vaseline, mixed with a fluorescent powder without
creating suspicion. Richer deposits are transferred when grease film
is used.
(b) Normally dry surfaces, such as gloves, money,
doorknobs, steering wheels, etc., would arouse suspicion if coated
with a grease. After coating an appropriate surface with grease, the
remainder of object and/or container may be dusted with dry powder.
_______ (c) — Time, amount. of _light,.. and other factors. may .
limit application to dusting since the dusting procedure is rapid and
does not require meticulous attention.
(d) Liquid fluorescent materials normally used as a
writing medium. Care [must be taken to prevent liquid marks or
discolorations on paper or surface treated.
(7) Availability of fluorescent materials: Questions on .
availability and appropriateness of chemicals to particular problems Jj A
| can be resolved by con^eting th^^race Evidence | Unit of the
Laboratory, extension^^^^Bor^^^^B
(8) Procedures for application:
(a) In applying grease, use bare fingers or an
appropriate applicator and rub it over the surfaces of the items to be
marked so as to leave a thin film. Avoid. large "globs" of grease.
The common fluorescent materials available from the Laboratory are not
dangerous or toxic substances and will not be readily absorbed through
the skin. However, normal precautions should be made to avoid direct
inhalation or contact with the eyes and mouth.
- (b) In applying powder form, numerous methods are
commonly used, such as shaking powder over items, dusting with a
powder puff or pad of cheesecloth, or brushing over the surfaces in a
manner similar to that used to dust with fingerprint powder.
(c) Liquids can be applied with a clean pen, small
paint brush, or spray-type dispenser.
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN SO THAT THE FLUORESCENT SOURCE IS NOT DIRECTED AT
THE EYES, SINCE THE ULTRAVIOLET RAYS FROM THE LIGHT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
TO THE EYES.
Sensitive'
PRINTED: 02/18/98
.f
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ; PAGE 13 - 133
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-15.2.7 On-Site Laboratory Assistance to Field
Any requests for on-site assistance by|Trace Evidence |Unit
personnel in a high-priority crime scene situation oust be made by
direct communication between the SAC and the Assistant Director, .
Laboratory Division. Such requests should only be made when the
-available -ser-vices-.of-the-field-crime-scene-search..team-will_not-fully-
meet the needs of the situation. This on-site support would include,
but is not limited to, detection (i.e., explosives, drugs or drug by-
products), recovery, preservation and delivery to the Laboratory of
trace evidentiary materials considered to be of probative value in the
investigation.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-16 (SUPPORT SERVICES AND EXAMINATIONS IN BOMBING AND
EXPLOSIVE MATTERS!
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
13-16.1 (Deleted!
EFFECTIVE: 09/24/93
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
-— -j. - . „ r ,
'■■ f i l l ■'." "■' * "
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 134
■#"
13-16.2 Handling, Transportation and Storage of Explosives | or
Suspected Explosives (See MAOP, Part II, 2-4.4. 11. )'|
(1) Explosives | or suspected explosives | should only be
handled by trained Laboratory Division personnel or certified Special
Agent bomb technicians. The handling, transportation and storage of
explosives should always be carried out in a safe, reasonable and
prudent manner consistent with applicable laws and regulations.
(2) Each field division, through liaison contacts with
-local- law enforcement -agencies .and_U. S._ mi 1 i tary commands , should..
establish suitable and proper storage for explosives seized in the
course of Bureau investigations or for use in training matters dealing
with explosives. In the event suitable and proper explosives storage
arrangements cannot be achieved to meet a field division's
requirements, the purchase of a portable magazine (s) may be required.
(3) Any problems or questions regarding the handling,
transportation and storage of explosives should be immediately
resolved through contact with the Laboratory (Division's Materials
and Devices Unit. I
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.3
Render Safe Assistance to the FBI
All offices are to have established liaison with| public
safety bomb squads and | United States Military Explosive Ordnance
Disposal (EOD) Units | in order that assistance can be promptly obtained
if explosives | and/or bombs are encountered in connection with official
investigations. -| The public safety bomb squad response is an integral
part of the FBI Counterterrorism and narcoterrorism programs, and as
such, liaison with these squads ia an extremely important
responsibility whichjshould be handled by the Special Agent field bomb
technician.
(1) The United States Army has EOD Units stationed
throughout the continental United States plus Alaska and Hawaii.
These Units have provided support to the Bureau in the past and have
personnel qualified to handle explosives and bombs. Due to emergency
conditions, requests for assistance from Army EOD Units will usually
be oral. Such oral requests are to be confirmed by letter addressed
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II r ,
to the Commanding Officer of the EOD Unit involved.
PAGE 13 - 135
(2) The Army does not have an EOD Unit in Puerto Rico.
Therefore, the San Juan Office should have established liaison with an
appropriate United States Navy facility.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-16.4
On-Site Laboratory Assistance to Field
Any reques
personnel in an explos
communication between
Laboratory Division,
available services of
fully meet the needs o
but is not limited to,
scenes, participating
encountered and techni
ts for on-site assistance by Laboratory
ives-related situation must be made by direct
the SAC and the Assistant Director in Charge,
Such requests should only be made when the
the field division bomb technician will not
f the situation. This on-site support includes,
I forensic investigation at|major bombing crime
in raids or searches wherein explosives may be
cal support for principal bomb squad.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-16.5
oiled by the Laboratory and
explosive specialists from the
{Materials and Devices Unit.]
(1) The Laboratory maintains a collection of J
[from which to draw upon when this technique is deemec
appropriate. Additionally, items not in stock may be obtained from
manufacturers where aporooriare 1<>ari Kme is allowed. Items in this
Wvi*
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
warn
isgn
^'^^TSTff'gfffWMffff' 1
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 136
WVi^
(3) For this technique to be implemented, approval must
be obtained from the applicable Criminal Investigative Division
section supervising the parent case. Coordinationwi^^^l^^made
with the Laboratory regarding the specifics of thJHfl^^^H|Hfc
proposal^tt^^^^^^^j^^y^^^yyj^^T p^r^^n^T^^ffi^t to
appropriareapprovaT^n^coorSTna^Snv^^^^^ffaboratory| Materials
and Devices Unit.E
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.6
material,
Shipping Explosives, Hoax Bombs, and Bomb Components to
the Laboratory for Examination (See MIOG, Part II,
13-6.7 (44).)
(1) Explosives are currently classified as hazardous
Therefore, special packaging is required and the amount
which can be sent in each shipment is regulated.
(2) The Materials and Devices Unit is to be contacted for
shipping and packaging instructions EACH AND EVERY TIME an explosive,
hoax bomb, or bomb component is to be shipped to the Laboratory
Division for examination. The shipping instructions furnished must be
strictly adhered to because the improper packaging and shipment of an
explosive is a serious matter affecting safety, and violations of
shipping regulations will not be tolerated.
(3) |Prior to mailing/shipping items between Bureau
offices which, when x-rayed, might appear suspicious, an immediate
teletype must be sent or a telephone c'all'made to the recipient. The
teletype or telephone call should identify the shipping method
(United States Postal Service Registered, FedEx, etc.)
identifying/tracking number, office of origin, description of
contents, date it was mailed/shipped, and any other information which
may be beneficial to the recipient.
(a) Upon receipt of the above-mentioned information,
the recipient must complete an FD-861 and post it on or near the
x-ray machine in a conspicuous manner. It is the responsibility of
each office to designate an appropriate area for the posting of such
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive •■ '*'
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 137
information and advise all employees responsible for x-raying
incoming mail and related material of the designated area. Also,
appropriate security must be afforded to the Mail/Package Alert Forms
to prevent possible compromise. That is, the posting of such
information in unsecured FBI space (i.e., loading dock, reception
area, etc.) is strictly prohibited.
(b) The form must remain posted at all times until
the item in question is received. Upon receipt of the questionable
item, the FD-861 should be removed from the x-ray machine or
designated area, and the bottom portion of the form completed
(initials of the em ploye e who identified the package and date
received). The completed form should be retained for 90 days,
Thereafter, the form should be disposed in official receptacles.
(c) The same procedures apply for mailing/shipping
to the J. Edgar Hoover (JEH) FBI Building. An immediate teletype .
must be sent to FBTHO. Att-enti nn; Mail Services Unit (MBU ) . Room L^
'1 orflHBfe v^
must be sent to FBIHO^Att|ntion: Mail Services Unit (MSU)^Joom
iBOO^^^^call ■Hj|j^^^^H(8 - orflHHfc
^^^^^^B(24 hours^a^ay^^even days a week). The MSU wilT^H^^^
^esponsiDle for ensuring appropriate JEH FBI personnel are advised
•pons l Die for ensuring appropriate JEH FBI personnel are advised of
the questionable item.
(d) When mailing/shipping possible suspicious-
looking items OUTSIDE the Bureau, offices should make a courtesy
telephone call to the recipient, providing the same information as
described above (i.e., shipping method, identifying/tracking number,
date sent, description of contents, etc.).| (See MIOG, Part I, 91~8
(ID.)
EFFECTIVE: 06/04/97
13-16.6.1 Examination and Tests of Explosives and Explosive Devices
| (1) The Laboratory|Materials and Devices Unitjwill
conduct all forensic explosive testing and examination of explosive
I devices at the Quant ico explosives J ranges, or other ranges deemed
appropriate, | in support of FBI investigations and prosecutions.
(2) Such examinations or tests which must be conducted in
the field due to exigent circumstances must have the approval of the
Laboratory Division. Special Agents of the |Materials and Devices
Unit [will be assigned as appropriate to ensure that all forensic
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
considerations and safety requirements are in accordance with
applicable laws and regualtions.
(3) This requirement extends to the handling, shipping
and storage of explosive materials and verification testing of live
explosives or devices to be carried out in the field where
investigative matters are involved.
PAGE 13 - 138
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.7
Examinations of Bombs and Explosives
(1) Bombing evidence is examined to identify the
components and fabrication techniques utilized in the bomb, to
reconstruct the bomb, find clues that will assist in the
identification of the bomb builder and to determine if the bomb is
like previously examined bombs. The|Materials and Devices Unit|
is primarily responsible for the examination of all explosive devices
and hoax bomb devices. All bombing evidence should be shipped
to the Laboratory to the attention of the (Evidence Control Center and
the Materials and Devices Unit.| Forensic bombing examinations are
subdivided into five categories: (1) the main charge explosive, (2)
the fuzing system (initiation system), (3) function tests, (4)
destructive capability evaluations and (5) intercomparison
examinations.
jroDO&gdJiS
I^^^Pa^eWa
(2) The|Materials
se of explosives bj
n conjunction withTtne i nmi i uu inve stigate
Tals and Devices Unit [will provide guidance and^
truction
Hint
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'T V" » -.nj
Sensitive
&
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 139
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
J"
13-16.7.1 Explosive Examinations (See MIOG, Part II, 13-15.1.6.)
The | Chemistry | Unit conducts instrumental examinations of
explosive materials from unexploded bombs and residue from exploded
bombs. These examinations can yield the following information:
(1) Explosive residue examinations often identify the
_type_of-.explosive.(s)_used _in..the_.construction_of...the_bomb,_i..e..,__
dynamite, slurry, military, gun powder or homemade.
(2) Analysis of unexploded materials can very likely
identify the manufacturer of the explosive, i.e., Dupont, Atlas,
Hercules.
(3) Analysis of unexploded materials from bombs can also
provide detailed compositional information about the explosive that
can permit comparisons with explosives seized from caches and
suspects.
(4) It is important to know that most residues of an
explosive are water soluble, and, therefore, these residues must be
protected from moisture. Also, other residues evaporate quickly
necessitating the immediate sealing of collected debris in airtight
metal cans. Also recognize that modern chemical analytical techniques
are capable of detecting extremely minute amounts of explosives.
These capabilities require that personnel handling bombing evidence be
absolutely sure they are not contaminating evidence with residues on
their hands or clothing that they have picked up elsewhere.
(5) DO NOT USE A HEAT-SEAL CONTAINER, SCREW-ON LID OR
OTHER HEAT-, FRICTION- OR STATIC ELECTRICITY- PRODUCING CONTAINER TO
HANDLE, SHIP, TRANSPORT OR STORE LIVE EXPLOSIVES OR SUSPECT EXPLOSIVE
MATERIALS. THIS DOES NOT INCLUDE SHIPPING OF EXPLOSIVE RESIDUE
FOLLOWING THE COLLECTION OF DEBRIS FOLLOWING AN EXPLOSION.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
.1 >.+?■■
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-16.7.2 Fuzing System Examinations
PAGE 13 - 140
*;».
'%".
The fuzing system of a bomb is the mechanism that, when
activated, makes the bomb explode. A fuzing system can be something
as simple as a burning fuse, or as complicated as a radio control
mechanism. Examinations of a fuzing system can provide valuable
investigative information as well as forensic information.
%
"WYu
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-16.7.3 Function Tests of Bomb Fuzing Systems
Routine examinations of unexploded fuzing systems include
evaluations to determine if the system could function the bomb if it
were activated. Statements concerning these tests will be included in
the Laboratory report. If requested, bomb fuzing system plans can
also be evaluated to determine if they are workable.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
f-% t ftiiV^'- "-—-—---■■-
Sensitive
m
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 141
13-16.7.4 Destructive Capability Evaluations
Routine examination of unexploded bombs includes an
evaluation of the bomb's destructive capability. Statements
concerning these evaluations are set forth in the Laboratory report.
If important to the investigative effort, on-site evaluation of a
bomb '8 blast effects can be made and expert testimony rendered about
the size and type of explosive utilized.
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-16.7.5 Intercomparison Examinations
Intercomparison examinations of bombs, bomb debris and
bombing related evidence are conducted to determine if the same
person(s), plans and/or source of materials are involved in multiple
incidents. The case Agent should request these types of examinations
when investigation indicates a common link between bombing incidents.
It should be noted that in certain situations the suspect and bombing
incident can be positively linked through intercomparison examinations
<u|m
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-16.8
Explosive Reference Files
The |Materials and Devices {Unit maintains extensive
reference files on commercial and military explosives and improvised
explosive devices or homemade bombs. These files contain technical
data plus known standards of explosive items and bomb components.
Information in these files is routinely compared with bombing evidence
under examination and any associations will be reported.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 142
| 13-16.9 (Bomb Data Center | Program
| The additional mission of the FBI | Bomb Data Center | is to
provide state of the art training to and develop technology for public
safety bomb disposal technicians, provide operational support to law
enforcement agencies during special events and/or crisis management
situations and to gather and disseminate information pertaining to
bombing matters.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.9.1 Technical Publications
The FBI I Bomb Data Center | is responsible for the
collection, collation and dissemination of up-to-date statistical and
technical information concerning improvised, explosive devices, render
safe procedures, explosive research and technical equipment used by
public safety bomb technicians.
The principal publications of the j Bomb Data Center | are
disseminated through three distinct mailing lists:
(1) PUBLICATIONS CONTAINING UNRESTRICTED INFORMATION -
These publications provide information of a general nature. They set
forth the results of tests conducted on bomb handling and detection
equipment and other data of general interest. The dissemination of
these publications is not restricted to law enforcement agencies.
Public utilities such as electric power, natural gas, water or similar
companies which carry out functions relating to welfare and security
of a community, and corporate security offices may be placed on the
mailing list to .receive unrestricted information. These publications
are mailed to the heads of participating organizations, or they may be
addressed to the head of any subordinate unit designated by the
department head, e.g., commander, bomb squad; lieutenant, burglary
squad, and require, no special security precautions. The publication
. is known as the GENERAL INFORMATION BULLETIN (GIB) .
(2) PUBLICATIONS CONTAINING RESTRICTED INFORMATION -
These publications, available only to public safety agencies and
certain military units, provide information of sensitive nature and
are labeled RESTRICTED INFORMATION. The present information about the
design and functioning of specific bombs which have actually been
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■ i w h'p iw ^ . i
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 1A3
constructed, current and vital information concerning new or potential
bomb-type hazards, methods of coping with certain bombs, and other
information of specific interest to the bomb incident investigator.
Because the information is considered restricted, the distribution of
these bulletins is limited to those participants who have a need to
know. They are mailed to the heads of participating organizations or
they may also be addressed to the head of any subordinate unit
designated by the department head, e.g., commander, bomb squad;
lieutenant, burglary squad, for dissemination only to those persons
who have a need for the information contained therein. They must not
be made available to unauthorized persons. All participants who
receive these public ations a l so receiv e thos e containi ng un restric ted
information. Recipients of restricted material must agree to
safeguard the information. This publication is known as the
INVESTIGATORS' BULLETIN (IB).
(3) SPECIAL TECHNICIAN'S BULLETIN (STB) - These
publications, containing technical information intended only for the
trained bomb technician, are also labeled RESTRICTED INFORMATION.
They detail information regarding disarming procedures which have been
employed against specific bombs, new or novel commercial items which
may ultimately be encountered in improvised explosive devices, and
other technical data which will be of specific interest to bomb
technicians. Any attempt by an untrained person to apply the
techniques or procedures contained in the STB could result in injury
or death. Because of this, the STB is not mailed to the agency head
but to the bomb squad commander for dissemination to qualified active
members of the bomb squad. After receipt, it is the specific
responsibility of the individual bomb technician to assure that these
publications are not made available to unauthorized individuals. To
obtain the STB, each bomb technician must be certified by his/her
chief or supervisor in accordance with the following instructions:
(a) For Hazardous Devices School Graduates - The
name and rank or title of the technician, the name and mailing address
of the department or agency to which he/she belongs, and the date that
he/she is presently employed as a bomb technician.
(b) Others - Active duty military EOD personnel will
receive STB's through their parent commands.
(4) In addition to the established mailing list program,
the | Bomb Data Center | can supply FBI offices, public safety agencies
and corporate security personnel with boob threat cards, physical
security manuals and handout material on the bomb threat challenge.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
assKnaansmr
Sensitive
I
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 144
(5) The | Bomb Data Center | compiles and publishes quarterly
statistical summaries on bombing incidents throughout the United
States. Data utilized in these summaries is reported to the Bureau by
Form FD-436. Use of this form is not restricted to incidents bearing
the 174 classification (Explosives and Incendiary Devices; Bomb
Threats). The statistical integrity of the bomb incident summaries
requires that all explosive incidents in the following categories be
reported: (See Correspondence Guide-Field, 3-5.2.)
(a) ACTUAL use of an explosive or incendiary device
— (b) — ATTEMPTED use -of_an explosive or incendiary.-
device
(c) RECOVERY of an actual or hoax device
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.9.2
b1tr
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•!..-V„«»,,.Ml^
Manual of Invea
Sensitive- ;.,.-
• *•„• Oner***** 1 ^' 1 GuidelineS
PAGE 13 - 145
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
I
13-16.9.3 Technical Research • ' " " _-.-*■"""
i rv«r= center I manages research programs
'^i^^-^t^hnlrog^expiosive^reaching,
jfcvwflevices and firii
ther
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97 ^ - "
.'./■■
23-16.9.4 FBI,HazaTdous Devices School (FBI HDS)
_____ (1) Basic training of public safety bomb technicians in
<T United States is provided at the FBI Hazardous Devices School. (FBI
HDS), Redstone Arsenal, Huntsvi lie, Alabama. The FBI has funded and
/ administered FBI HDS through the|Bomb Data Centerjsince 1981 when
Congress mandated that the FBI would assume responsibility for the
training of public safety bomb technicians. An annual Interagency
Support Agreement with the U.S. Army provides military support at
Redstone Arsenal, .The U.S. Army. provides a staff .comprised of full
time military and civilian personnel.
\" ~~" (2) The basic course is designed to train | state J and local
public safety officials as bomb technicians. The basic course
combines classroom and range instruction in explosives technology,
electronic circuitry and components of explosive devices, nonelectric
components and priming, use of special equipment for the detection and
handling of explosive devices, and render safe equipment and
techniques. The basic course is given eight times per year with 18
J students enrolled in each course.
(3) HDS basic course applicants must be committed to five
years of continuous service on an active bomb squad. Travel, lodging,
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 146
and other expenses at the basic course are the responsibility of the
trainee's agency.
(4) The one-week refresher course reviews basic
principles and explores current developments in bomb disposal. The
bomb technicians are placed in a variety of simulations which
challenge their technical ability. HDS conducts twelve refresher
courses each year with sixteen bomb technicians enrolled in each. The
HDS refresher course is open to all basic course graduates.
Reimbursement for travel, lodging, and subsistence is available from
the FBI.
■a
•1 -c
(5) ATTENDANCE PROCEDURE: „.;
Any | full-time, sworn. employee of a| local, state or
federal public safety agency|with a render safe responsibility|may be
selected forjthe|HDS attendance. Priority selection status is given ,^%
to local and state personnel with full-time render safe -^
responsibilities. (Departments which sponsor students for the basic ^
course must certify that the required safety equipment (full-coverage
bomb suit, portable X-ray system, disrupter, demolition kit, and
quality hand tools) is in the agency's inventory. Applications must
be reviewed by the field office Special Agent bomb technician working
with the Police Training Coordinator. I
13-16.9.7.)
(a) All applicants must: | (See MIOG, Part II,
1. Be volunteers;
2. Be full-time, sworn, salaried officers
assigned to bona fide public safety agencies;
3. Not be color blind;
4. Have vision in each eye which is not worse
than 20/200 uncorrected and correctable to 20/20;
5. Not have a hearing loss in either ear which
is greater than 60 decibels; and
6. Be in good health with no permanent or
limiting disabilities.
7. Must fall within the Bureau weight chart
(National 'Academy Standards) or have no more than 22 percent body fat.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part IX PAGE 13 - 147
(b) All applicants should:
1. Be committed to bomb technician work for a
minimum of five years after graduation from HDS;
2. Have a minimum of five years' experience
with their respective agencies prior to the date of the application;
3. Upon graduation, be assigned to duties
normally associated with those of a bomb technician; and
4. Upon graduation, attend the one-week
refresher course every 36 months.
(c) Requests for attendance must be directed to the
local FBI field division, Attention: Police Training Coordinator.
The requesting agency will receive:
Form FD-731 Information Form
Form FD-732 Waiver Form
SF-88 Medical Examination Form
Form 2-205 Attachment to Medical Form
FD-406 Authority to Release Information
[Performance Standard Test Certification
(Refresher candidates) |
(d) The FBI field division submitting the
application is responsible for the following investigative steps:
1. Office indices check
2. Birth date verification
3. Credit and arrest check for five-year period
preceding date of application. Authority to Release Information (FD-
406) must be obtained from the nominee at onset of the investigation.
Credit checks will be conducted by contractor personnel at FBIHQ.
Any information developed which reflects unfavorably upon
character or reputation of nominee must be completely resolved. SAC
should make his/her recommendation based on results of investigation.
Selection will be based on availability of space, number of
technicians already trained in that area, and specific need of
department.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 148
EFFECTIVE? 04/07/97
13-16.9.5 Bomb Technician's Seminar
| Regional seminars are conducted by|Bomb Data Center | staff
and field Special Agent bomb technicians on the construction and
utilization of improvised explosive devices, techniques for remote
neutralization, discussions of research and development and a review
— of n ew tec h nical eq uipment. This seminar is o jLly_^ya^abjLieJto trained
bomb technicians who are graduates of the FBI Hazardous Devices
School. -..
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.9.6 jPost-Blast Investigator | Seminar
Regional seminars are conducted by|Borab Data Centerjstaff
on explosives recognition, investigative techniques and bomb crime
scene procedures. This seminar is available to law enforcement
personnel with investigative responsibilities in bombing cases.
•EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.9.7 Special Agent Bomb Technician Program
The Special Agent bomb technician program is voluntary and
requires attendance at a four-week explosives course at the Hazardous
Devices School, Redstone Arsenal. The purpose of this training,
initiated more than fifteen years ago, is to provide specialized
explosive training to Special Agents to improve the technical
proficiency in bomb investigations and to establish a liaison link
with public safety bomb squads. When the FBI assumed administration
of the Hazardous Devices School in 1981, the cadre of Special Agent
bomb technicians became an integral part of the Bureau's program of
bomb technician and bomb investigator training.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part IX PAGE 13 - 149
I W Special Agents nominated for this training I shall Imeet
the following criteria:
(a) I Be an experienced investigator with a minimum of
two years in the field. |
/ (b) [Have an overall Performance Appraisal Report
rating of "Superior." |
(c) | Be in good physical condition, meeting the
minimum standards detailed in section 13-16.9.4 (5) (a) . I
(d) |Haye a minimum of five years of service
remaining prior to retirement.)
(e) (Successfully complete the recommended elements
of the "Performance Standard Test."|
(f) | Be a volunteer, recognizing the inherent dangers
of working with live explosives.)
(g) | Be recommended for the program by the SAC, to
include observations regarding the candidate with the respect to:
conditions.
1. oral/written communication skills.
2. ability to function well under stressful
3. availability for travel, both overseas and
domestic, to assist in Bureau special assignments; major incidents,
and regional police training.
4. demonstrated ability to work in a team
environment. (See (i).)|
(h) | It is recommended that candidates for the
program serve as members of the field division's Evidence Response
Team; become certified police instructors; and have no other
significant collateral duties.
(i) Following successful completion of the HDS Basic
Course, Special Agent bomb technicians will serve an 18-month
probationary period. Probationary Special Agent bomb technicians
will be evaluated by Materials and Devices Unit personnel in the
areas outlined in 13-16.9.7 (1) (g) 1. through 4. and performance of
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part H PAGE 13 - 150
the duties outlined in 13-16.9.7 (2) (a) ADMINISTRATIVE, (b) LIAISON,
(e) TACTICAL, and (d) TRAINING. Additional evaluation will take
place during the annual recertif ication seminar and through
participation at a Regional Bomb Technician Seminar. |
(2) Special Agent bomb technician, in addition to other
duties as a field investigator, has the following responsibilities:
(a) ADMINISTRATIVE
1. Provides information and advice to the SAC
.in. a i r_ in aX t e i :s__involving the_use, possession or transportation of
explosives. " " ~ — ~
2. Coordinates the recovery of explosive
evidence in FBI investigative matters as well as its safe shipment to
the FBI Laboratory.
3- Compiles and reports to the|Bomb Data
Center I information involving explosive devices encountered by public
safety bomb squads and military EOD units.
4. Expeditiously reports to the Laboratory
Division by telephone extraordinary bomb related events.
5. Assists the field office management in the
development of emergency planning for a bombing occurrence.
6. Assists the office crime scene coordinator
as. necessary regarding bombing crime scene examinations and evidence
collection.
7. Obtains and controls proper bunker space for
the storage of explosive evidence, training devices, and tactical
items.
I . 8 « Advises the | Bomb Data Center | of upcoming
special events where specialized equipment may be required.
(b) LIAISON
!• Establishes and maintains communication with
local military and civilian bomb disposal units.
2. Establishes and maintains communication with
professional organizations (i.e., International Association of Bomb
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
m .ys ' jy "iT f *■ ■ ■ ' t I*!. y ■ '■ i ■ ■ " j^y . ' ■ ■ . ' „ ■ , ■ . > _ « . .. wj . '« ; v. * i "' - ' ...". ■' » — »i- »■ j, " _ . ■ . _
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part " - PAGE 13-151
Technicians and Investigators - IABTI) in their area, to include
membership in and attendance at organizational functions.
. 3- Establishes and maintains communication with
other federal agencies to ensure information is obtained regarding
their encounters with explosives.
, , '*• Stimulates participation in the | Bomb Data
Center [publication program by encouraging innovative research or
recording of unusual incidents by local bomb squads.
-(c) TACTICAL-
*• Acts « an information link between field
office management and its tactical units in situations involving
explosives.
2. Assists in assessments of potential
explosive and/or booby trap devices encountered during investigative
arrest and search operations. '
„ 3 * Is available to tactical units for "on
scene technical assistance and direct liaison with supporting bomb
squad personnel.
(d) TRAINING
1. Plans and conducts periodic training for FBI
personnel as office needs dictate. Such training may include bomb
threat assessment, search techniques, explosives recognition or other
similar courses.
2. Assists | the Materials and Devices Unit] in
its national training program conducted regionally throughout the year
by participating injat least one regional school. |
3. Assists the field office police training
coordinator with local requests for bomb-related instruction.
. . A. In addition to regional schools MUST
participate in the (Materials and Device Unit | sponsored annual
recertification program to assess technical abilities and safe
explosive handling practices.,
EXPLOSIVE BREACHING TECHNIQUE IS NOT AUTHORIZED FOR ANY
FBI OR POLICE TRAINING PROGRAM
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 152
The Laboratory Division has trained personnel to provide
additional support to the SAC in situations in which explosives may be
anticipated. BOMBING TECHNICIANS OF THE|MATERIALS AND DEVICES
UNIT | are available to provide advice on safety perimeters at a bomb
location, remote handling procedures for the render safe of an
improvised explosive device, effect liaison with the faculty of HDS,
direct access to the worldwide system of bomb data centers and provide
direct liaison with public safety bomb squads. EXPLOSIVES SPECIALISTS
OF THE | MATERIALS AND DEVICES UNIT | will provide assistance in the
processing_o.f^JmBh^i^^^pe scenes, searches of bomb factories, I ^ j l^tt^
uppor.t -and -necessary-forensic assistance.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
'J'
13-16.9.8 Render Safe Equipment
(1) The primary goal of the bomb technician training at
the Hazardous Devices School (HDS) is to save lives. Bomb technicians
are taught remote render safe techniques so as to minimize the dangers
inherent in bomb disposal activity. NO "HANDS ON" RENDER SAFE
PROCEDURE IS RECOMMENDED UNLESS A LIFE IS IN IMMINENT DANGER AND THERE
IS NO ALTERNATIVE. In order to support this philosophy, the FBI has
included a wide range of high technology equipment in its training
program. This equipment is utilized to illustrate the variety of
remote techniques, to stimulate the acquisition of similar equipment
by bomb squads and to provide an assessment of the capabilities of the
equipment.
(2) The Laboratory Division possesses two self-contained
bomb disposal vehicles. The vehicles contain a state-of-the-art bomb
containment sphere which is designed to absorb the deadly pressure and
fragmentation of an explosive device. Each truck also contains a bomb
disposal robot and a bomb protection suit. When combined with other
render safe equipment on the truck, the response package provides a
variety of low-risk alternatives for a render safe operation. All of
the equipment is designed for use during the critical time between
detection of the bomb and detonation. The technology applies to
initial assessment of the improvised explosive device, remote removal
or on-site disruption. This equipment is available to augment public
safety bomb squad or military EOD equipment at special events.
(3) All SA bomb technicians are trained in the use of
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
mmmmm
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 153
general bomb disposal equipment, such as x-ray machines and
disrupters. |Bomb Data Center | and HDS personnel also train on the 'use
of more technical bomb disposal equipment.
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-16.9.9 Deleted]
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
\
13-16.9.10 Requests for Assistance
(1) All direct operational support performed by the
iMaterials and Devices Unitjroust be in response to requests made by the
SAC and coordinated with the Criminal Investigative Division.
(2) Laboratory Division personnel and equipment as well
as field SA bomb technicians can provide assistance in the following
situations wherein the use of explosives might be anticipated:
(a) Major Case - When situation involves FBI or Task
Force jurisdiction, raid or arrest planning should include the
availability of the local public safety bomb squad or military EOD
units (Note Posse Comitatus restrictions on military seizure or
processing of evidence). If other agency support is not feasible, SAC
may request FBIHQ assistance.
* (b) Special Event/Major Case - Local or state law
enforcement is usually the lead agency in physical security matters
with FBI jurisdiction aligned with terrorism possibilities. Public
safety bomb squad may request priority training assistance at HDS or
in a regional seminar. Technical support for the principal bomb squad
may be requested through the local SAC and FBIHQ.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98.
racr: *.'■»• •■yTTirg
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 154
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
13-17 DOCUMENT EXAMINATION | (See MIOG, Part I, 7-14.9 (1) and
NFIPM, Part 1, 7-6.1.) |
Document examination consists for the most part of a side-
by-side comparison of handwriting, typewriting, and other written
and printed|items|to establish! origin or authenticity. In addition
_tolsubmitting_documents_for_document_examinations,_consideration_
should always be given to submitting them for latent fingerprint
examinations (see Part II, Section 15 of this manual). | Latent |
fingerprint examinations | are conducted, if requested, |after the
original document has been photographed and the requested document
examinations have been conducted.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.1
Conclusions
Conclusions are positive and reliable when the
examinations are conducted by competent experts. (Note: Age, sex,
character, etc., cannot be determined in handwriting. Pseudoexperts
in this field, "graphologists" or "graphoanalysts," purport to have
this ability, but have no scientific validity.)
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.1.1 J Identification
This conclusion is a definitive conclusion stating to the
exclusion of all other sources. |
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 155
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
113-17.1.21
"No Conclusion" Examinations
In some document examinations, a "no conclusion" is
reached as opposed to an| "identif ication"|or | examination! conclusion.
Some of the reasons for a "no conclusion" are:
(1) Limited questioned material
(2) Inadequate known material
(3) Lack of contemporaneous standards (long interval of
time exists between the preparation of the questioned and known
material)
(4) JDistortion/disguise| (definite conclusions often
impossible)
(5) Lack of sufficiently identifying characteristics
(although ample quantities of both questioned and known samples are
available) | and/or |
| (6) Elimination of a suspect source. |
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.2
Documentary Evidence
All efforts must be made to maintain and preserve
documentary evidence in the same condition as it was received. This
evidence must not be folded, torn, tampered with, marked or touched
unnecessarily, stamped, soiled, subjected to indented writing,
mutilated, etc. Each item of evidence should be placed in a separate
envelope/container. Photocopies should be placed in paper rather than
plastic envelopes as photocopies often stick to plastic mutilating the
document .
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
, ^S^''.'r~^y •:- ''■•VVVj'VC
'-.r
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 156
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.2.1 Marking for Identification
|Evidence will be marked according to FBI Laboratory
policy. |
-EFFECTIVE: 07/25/9.7.
13-17.2.2 Original vs. Photocopy
The original evidence itself rather than a photocopy
(copy made with a photocopier machine) should be submitted because
many examinations can be | conducted | only on the original. Also, the
original is utilized by the examiner to prepare court exhibits.
I Limited | examinations, however, can be made using good quality
photographs of the original evidence. A photocopy is normally
satisfactory for file searches. In no case should the inability to
forward the original evidence constitute a valid reason for not
requesting an examination.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.2.3 Obtaining Known Handwriting Samples (See|MI0G, Part I,
87-5.2, 91-17.1.5; Part II, | 13-6. 7 (44).)
The following guidelines are to be used to obtain known
handwriting and/or hand printing samples from a person (writer).
(1) Reproduce the original conditions as nearly as
llpossible, the same text.jsize of paper, size of writing, space
available for the writing, type of writing instrument, etc.
Should always try to duplicate. Obtain the full text of the
questioned writing in word-for-word order at least once, if possible.
Signatures and less extensive writing should be prepared several
times, each time on a different piece of paper. In hand printing
cases, both upper case (capital) and lower case (small) samples
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
_fr
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
should be obtained. I
PAGE 13 - 157
(2) Obtain samples from dictation until it is believed
normal writing has been produced (the number of samples necessary
cannot be determined in advance) .
(3) Do not allow the writer to see either the original
document in question or a photograph thereof prior to or during the
taking of the samples.
(4) Remove each sample from the sight of the writer as
_s oon_as__i.t_i s_comp let ed . . _ _____ ____
(5) Do not give instructions in spelling, punctuation or
arrangement.
(6) |Deleted|
| (7) | In forgery cases the Laboratory should also be
furnished with genuine signatures of the person whose name
is j allegedly | forged.
| (8) | Obtain samples with both the right and left hands.
| (9) | Obtain samples written rapidly, slowly, and at varied
slants.
| (10) | Obtain samples of supplementary writings such as
sketches, drawings, manner of addressing an envelope, etc.
| (11) | Writer should initial and date each page.
| (12) | Witness each sample with date and initials | (and|
name
).
| (13) | Deleted
j (14) | If readily available, samples of undictated writing
should be obtained, such as application for employment, social or
business correspondence, school papers, | canceled checks, |etc.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
Sensitive
PRINTED; 02/18/98
Sensitive
Hanual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 158
13-17.2.4 Obtaining Known Typewriting Samples (See MIOG, Part II,
13-6.7(64))
The following guidelines are to be used to obtain known
typewriting samples.
(1) | If the typewriter is equipped with a carbon film
("one-time") ribbon, remove the ribbon prior to taking exemplars and
submit it to the Laboratory whenever available. |
| (2) | Obtain a full word-for-word text of the message in
qtii.at-fnn^ising ^s_nearJLy as possible the same degree of_t_ouch_a_s_u3ed__
in the questioned text.
| (3) | Obtainjat least two|samples of the complete keyboard
(all letters, numerals and| symbols both upper and lower case) . |
| (4) | Obtain pertinent identifying data regarding the
typewriter (make, model, serial number, etc.) and type this data as
well as information such as the date sample was obtained, name of
person taking the sample, where the typewriter was located, etc., on
the sample.
| (5) | Obtain data, if available, regarding when the machine
was last serviced or repaired.
| (6) | Properly witness each sample (initial and date on
reverse side) .
' I (7) | If the typewriter uses a cloth ribbon also obtain a
stencil sample as follows:
(a) Physically remove the cloth ribbon from the
typewriter or mechanically move it by placing the ribbon mechanism in
the stencil position
(b) Place a piece of carbon paper over a piece of
ordinary paper and insert them both in the typewriter
(c) Begin typing and allow the faces of the type to
strike the carbon paper directly, and
(d) Submit the stencil sample, which is the typed
text on the ordinary paper, to the Laboratory. (A stencil sample
gives very clear impressions of the typefaces.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
*«■?
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II-.
PAGE 13 - 159
| (8) | If the typewriter contains no ribbon and one is not
readily available, obtain a stencil sample by following steps (b)
through (d) above.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.2.5 Obtaining Known Photocopy Samples
The __fol lowing guidelines..are_to_be.. used when, obtaining-
known samples from photocopy machines.
(1) Obtain at least 10 samples with no document on the
glass plate and the cover down.
(2) Obtain at least 10 samples with no document on the
glass plate and the cover up.
(3) Obtain at least 10 samples with a document on the
glass plate and the cover down.
(A) Identify each sample as to make, model, and
conditions under which sample was made.
(5) On the transmitting communication to the Laboratory,
if possible, list any of the following information that can be
obtained from the known photocopy machine:
(a) Toner - Locate toner supplies and record toner
components, manufacturer, and descriptive information
(b) Paper - Sheet or Roll fed
(c) Options
1. Color - Determine if the machine has
optional color capabilities and what colors are available
2. Editor - mask and trim, or editor board
3. Reduction, enlargement, and zoomj
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 160
EFFECTIVE: 05/11/87
13-17.3 Requesting Examinations
When a document examination is desired, follow the
instructions in paragraph 13-3.1 (Requests for Examination of
Evidence) elsewhere in this section, and include in the requesting
communication the following:
(1) Which of the submitted items are the questioned and
"" tKe^Knowh" specimens ~ — ~~~
(2) Which questioned items are to be forwarded for latent
fingerprint processing, and
(3) Personal characteristics of the writer, such as any
| -nervousness, jdisability, | illness, injury, etc.
%
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.4 Types of Document Examinations
(1) Handwriting (script)
(2) Hand printing
(3) | Signature |
(a) If a traced] signature, | try to locate the
document containing the pattern or master signature from which traced.
(b) If a simulated or copied] signature, | include
samples of genuine signatures to determine the extent of simulation.
(c) If a freehand | signature, ] the forger has no
knowledge of how the genuine signature looks.
U|J>1fc
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 161
ba\bie
(b) An examination of questioned typewriting can
assist in determining a possible make and model of typewriter|and/or
typewriting element | used to prepare the material.
(c) Questioned and known typewriting specimens of
the same size and style of type cannot be identified unless individual
defects or wear characteristics are exhibited in the samples.
(5) Paper
(a) Definite identification is seldom possible.
(b) Consideration should be given to indented
writing, watermarks, tool or knife marks along the edges, whether the
paper was torn in a manner to leave stubs in a tablet, and whether
torn edges are suitable for comparison with torn edges on a source
item.
(c) Some paper examinations are partially
destructive and will not be conducted unless specifically advised.
(6) (Paper-fiber transfer
An examination of the original document must be
conducted with the suspect carbon film typewriter ribbon to determine
whether or not the typewriter ribbon was utilized in the preparation
of the questioned document.!
point pens)
I
(7)1 Writing instruments (pencils, pens, crayons, ball-
(8) I Checkwr iters
(a) Examination of checkwriter impressions assists
in determining the manufacturer of the machine used to produce the
impressions.
(b) Positive identification of questioned with known
samples is infrequent because the construction of checkwriting
machines inhibits the development of unique identifying defects and
wear characteristics.
I (9) j Printing, photocopying, and other duplication
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■ ' n;n,v.) ■ ' ;-^,^t;^■^^-^^v^/7'^>yl^;;.^■V>^^N■ ' ^J^! l ^^:^^ l ■^' VJ"r''^^ i ^^^«'•'^^^■^ ^ ^
''■J-'l'-Wj-.
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 " 162
processes
(a) Printed documents may be associated as
originating from a common source or may be identified with known
printing paraphernalia.
(b) Photocopies may be associated as originating
from the same source or may be identified with a particular machine.
| | (10) | Indented writing
__ (a) Photographic, ..electrostatic, and lighting..
techniques are used to determine the context of indented notations.
(b) The document should not be folded or creased.
(c) Care should be taken to ensure accidental
indented writings are not made in a document after its collection as
evidence.
| | <11) | Obliterated or eradicated writing
(a) Nondestructive methods include photography,
using ultraviolet and infrared techniques, and microscopic
examination.
(b) Staining methods may produce minor stains. The
Laboratory should be "advised whether minor staining may be applied.
| | (12) | Used carbon paper
(a) Carbon paper should not be folded or creased.
(b) Examination may disclose the context of
handwritten or ..typewritten material pertinent to an investigation.
j | (13) J Burned or charred paper (See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7.)
(a) Questioned entries on charred or burned paper
I may be|observed| with appropriate examination.
(b) Charred paper should be protected by a polyester
film encapsulation method or shipped to the Laboratory in the original
container in which it was burned at the crime scene. Contact the
Laboratory for more specific instructions.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive ' f-
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 163
(c) If above options are not feasible, ship the
charred paper between layers of cotton in a rigid container.
| (14) Dating | of a document
(a) May be based on watermarks, letterhead or other
printing, and typewriting.
(b) Determination of exact dating is|highly
unlikely; however, it is possible to determine when items became
commercially available.!
| (15) | Wet documents
(a) Material should be frozen before shipping items
to the Investigative Operations and Support Section.
(b) Freeze-dry methods of preservation will permit
items to dry and reduce risk of decomposition.
I (16) Deletedl
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.5 (Standards Files (Containing Known Standards Supplied by
Manufacturers and/or Gathered by FBI Employees) |
(1) |0ffice Equipment File]
(a) Consists of original samples of | typewriting,
photocopy machines, printers, and facsimile machines, from both
foreign and domestic countries. |
(b) |Portions of this file permit (classification of
questioned|printed material |on the basis of make and model.
(2) Watermark Standards
(a) An index of watermarks and brands used by paper
manufacturers.
(b) Aids in tracing source or origin of paper.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
<5
v.-
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 164
(3) |Deleted|
(4) Checkwriter Standards
(a) Collection of original checkwriter impressions.
(b) Permits classification of questioned checkwriter
impressions as to make and model.
(5) Shoe Print and Tire Tread Standards | (See MIOG, Part
1 1 , 13-19.1.5.)| __ „_ _
(6) National Motor Vehicle Certificate of Title File
See 13-17.6(4) of this section for further
information.
(7) |Deleted|
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-17.6 [Reference Files - Material Collected Through Casework|
(1) NATIONAL FRAUDULENT CHECK FILE
(a) Contains computerized and| copies of j samples of
checks, writings, and other documentary material used by persons
involved in fraudulent check schemes.
(b) Assists in identifying individuals involved in
fraudulent check schemes and associates questioned material in various
cases as having originated from a common source.
(c) A search through the file will be made even
though the questioned material was previously searched through a check
file maintained by a state or local agency, or technically examined by
another agency.
(2) ANONYMOUS LETTER FILE (See MIOG, Part I, 91-17.2.)
(a) Consists of a| computerized) reference collection,
■"*.'>
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
. .'-.V
Sensitive
'-fcv
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 165
including|digitized|copies of|notes and| extortion and threatening
| letters. The criteria for an Anonymous Letter File search is as
follows:
1. Kidnapping
2. Bomb threats
3. Case of the times (Abortion Clinics, Church
Burnings, etc.)
A. Threats to Federal Officials
5. Contamination Issues. |
(b) Assists in identifying the source of such
questioned material and associates questioned material in various
cases as having originated from a common source.
(c) Letters of | domestic | abusive or "crank" nature
are neither searched nor added to the file, unless mitigating
circumstances so warrant.
(d) Letters determined to be of no prosecutive value
are not to be submitted to the Laboratory, unless mitigating
circumstances so warrant.
(3) BANK ROBBERY NOTE FILE (See MIOG, Part I, 91-17.1.)
(a) Consists of computerized and| digitized) copies of
writings of known bank robbers, of holdup notes found in the
possession of known suspects and of notes used in actual holdups, or
attempted holdups, of banks and other establishments.
(b) Assists in identifying questioned notes with
known writers and associates questioned notes in various robbery cases
as having originated from a common source.
(c) Notes and miscellaneous questioned writings
found on counters and wastebaskets in banks which are obviously the
work of mischief or prank will NOT be searched, and will NOT be added
unless mitigating circumstances so warrant.
(A) NATIONAL MOTOR VEHICLE CERTIFICATE OF TITLE FILE (See
MIOG, Part II, 13-17.5 (6).)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
r~
^V'.^W'VJTt.^Mj.V-..';
i^vvc-.'^r*:-"; ,:.- .-; ; "
■teViy;:tg-*-T'i"*-V".»?ii.'H'.-*.''V.-
»,ii:«i>v"r3Ktf-'
,3
Sensitive
1
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 166
(a) Consists of a questioned section comprised of
copies of counterfeit and/or altered motor vehicle titles, by state,
utilized in the transfer or saleof a stolen motor vehicle.
(b) Consists of a known section comprised of
authentic motor vehicle titles from each state.
(c) Assists in identifying counterfeit titles as
having originated from a common source.
(d) Will provide a known standard for a
determination to be made as to the authenticity of a questioned title.
(5) Deleted
(6) Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-18 PHOTOGRAPHIC EXAMINATIONS | (MOVED TO 13-7.6)
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-18.1 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
| 13-18.2 |Deleted|
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•■";,*',*-'^>jr^',;n^^
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-18.3 Deleted
PAGE 13 - 167
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-18. A
Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-18.5
Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
G
13-19
SHOE PRINT AND TIRE TREAD EXAMINATIONS
EFFECTIVE: 02/12/92
13-19.1 How to Collect|the|Physical Evidence | (See MIOG, Part II,
10-3, 13-6. A. 6.) |
Shoe | and tire tread impression | evidence found at the scene
of a crime provides important evidence for investigation and eventual
prosecution of the case. All impressions should first be
photographed. The|evidence or item bearing the|original impression
should then be transmitted to the Laboratory, if | possible. This is
easily, possible in cases when the impression is on broken glass,
paper, or on another surface which can be removed from the crime
scene; however," it should also be seriously considered and extended
to bulkier items such as doors, pieces of flooring, etc.,
particularly in violent crimes. If the original imprisoned item
cannot be removed from the scene and transmitted to the Laboratory,
examination quality photographs, followed by casting or lifting
techniques should be made to complete the recovery of that evidence.
These techniques are described below. |
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 168
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
»'■■&
13-19.1.1 Photographing and Documenting the Evidence (See MIOG,
Part II, 13-6.4.6.)
(1) GENERAL CRIME SCENE PHOTOGRAPHS AND- NOTES
General crime scene photographs are those which are taken
from various distances and angles to capture the general appearance of
the scene and to document certain facts about the scene. When taking
-general crime scene photographs of' a shoe or tire impression,- -
they should include both | long-range, mid-range and close-range | color
photographs of the evidence. ISO 200 or 400 color film should be
used. These photographs should be taken to create a zoom-in effect to
show the relationship of the impressions to the surrounding area.
THESE PHOTOGRAPHS ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR DETAILED FOOTWEAR OR TIRE
EXAMINATIONS.
(2) EXAMINATION QUALITY PHOTOGRAPHS
Examination quality photographs are those which are taken
from directly over the impressions utilizing a tripod, a scale and
special lighting. The purpose of these photographs is to take a
photograph which can be enlarged to the natural size via the scale and
which reflects a high degree of (detail. THESE PHOTOGRAPHS ARE USED
FOR FORENSIC EXAMINATIONS.)
The following is a procedure list for taking examination
quality photographs:
(a) USE A SCALE IN EVERY EXPOSURE. Position a
finely divided and accurate scale, such as a flat metric ruler, next
to and on the same plane as the impression. A label may be placed in
the picture to -identify which impression you are photographing, m
order to associate the photograph to the general crime scene
photographs, crime scene sketches, etc.
I (b) USE | A QUALITY | CAMERA. The camera should ideally
be a larger format camera; however, suitable photographs can be taken
with ajMANUAL FOCUSJ35 mm camera if proper procedures are followed.
The camera should be equipped with a normal macro|lens or a zoom lens
in the 35-80 mm range. f Load the camera with fine-grained color
or black and white|lSO 125 film. Check the ISO setting on the
camera if the camera does not adjust to it automatically.! Attach a
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
i-^y:?*^^'
VTf-
,->v
Sensitive
PAGE 13 - 169
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
cable shutter release if needed.
(c) Adjust the height and position of the camera on
a tripod and position it"( directly| over the impression so that the
|shoe impression and ruler nearly fills the frame. | Make sure the film
is parallel to the impression's surface, i.e., the lens is
perpendicular to the impression.
(d) Determine what special lighting will be used.
In most cases, oblique lighting should be used.
(e) For ob Ll/lVf^LiS h ii^St_aj5-fojoOLash e xtension
I
cord must be used so that "the flash can be | held | about 4-5 feet
from the impression. This distance will | allow for an even] exposure
across the impression. For a two-dimensional impression, such as a
dust impression on a bank countertop, the flash should be positioned
about 4 feet away from the impression but only about 1 inch above
the surface the impression! is on|so that the light will graze the
impressioned area. For a three-dimensional impression, first decide
what the height of the flash should be for the impression. The deeper
the impression the higher the flash. The more shallow the impression,
the lower the flash. |The purpose of the oblique light is to lighten
the higher areas of the impression while shadowing the lower
depressed areas of the impression, thus providing increased contrast
between the two.j Block out any bright ambient light, particularly if
the impression is outside in daylight. This can be achieved by
draping a black cloth around part of the tripod or simply having
someone hold the black cloth or a piece of cardboard or position their
body next to the impression to block out the light and darken the
(area being photographed. | This|is very important andjwill maximize
the benefit of the oblique light and result in much greater contrast
and detail in the photograph. Several photographs with the oblique
flash should be taken from at least three different sides of the
impression. Always use a scalet
(f) For three-dimensional impressions, close down
the f-stop|to f-22|for greater "depth of field." Always make sure the
camera is set on flash synchronization.
(g) ALWAYS FOCUS THE CAMERA! FOCUS THE CAMERA ON
THE IMPRESSION, NOT THE SCALE, PRIOR TO EACH EXPOSURE. Use a cable
shutter release or the camera timer to prevent movement of the camera
during exposure.
(h) |Take several j exposures at each position,
Ivarying the light position, [particularly if you feel this impression
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
-.uA
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 170
is a difficult one to photograph.
(i) TAKE SEVERAL PHOTOGRAPHS OF EACH IMPRESSION.
(3) PHOTOGRAPHIC EQUIPMENT KIT CHECKLIST
Having a photographic kit prepared in advance, will help
result in the proper photographic treatment of the evidence. Below is
a list of items which should be included in a crime scene kit to cover
both the needs of general crime scene photography and "examination
quality" photography:
"Ca~me"ra(s) with manual focus and interchangeable! lenses. Macro or
zoomllens or wide angle lens for general crime scene photos. Cable
shutter release. Electronic flash. Long "Flash Extension Cord (.6
feet). Light meter (for incident light as well as flash). Device for
checking focus (focus loop or macro focus aid). Tripod (preferably
the inverted type). Fine-grained black/white and color films (ISO 125
or less). Color film for general crime scene (200-400 ISO). Scale
(rigid and flat ruler, at least 6 inches long). Labels and writing
instruments. Numbered cones or markers for general crime scene.
White chart board for backfill lighting. Black cloth or screen for
ambient light shield. Lens filters.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-19.1.2 Casting Three-Dimensional Shoe and Tire Impressions
(See MI0G, Part II, 13-6.4.6jand 13-6.7 (56).) |
Casting is the filling of a three-dimensional impression,
usually in soil, sand or snow, to capture the maximum amount of detail
in that impression for examination purposes. DENTAL STONE
with a PSI rating of |8,000|or more should be used for casting footwear
and tire impressions. Dental Stone (or Die Stone), available through
f . , ?__ . I_;.:_..« OCT „-F ft nnnlnr above.
8, 000 | or above,
The PSI is a
local dental supply houses, having a|miniraum|PSI of
preferably colored, is the, desired casting medium,
compression strength measurement which should be listed on the
container along with the proper ratio of powder to water which should
be used for mixing. | There is no need to buy pretnixed or modified
dental stone from forensic suppliers, some of which have not been
satisfactory.
NOTE:
|Plasters,|plaster of paris or dental plasters are NOT
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Ifr
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 171
SUFFICIENTLY HARD, do not resist abrasion when they are cleaned and,
therefore, should NOT be used.
(1) ZIP-LOCK BAG METHOD FOR DENTAL STONE CASTING
(a) "Zip-lock" bags are highly recommended as a
means of conveniently storing premeasured amounts of dental stone
powder. A zip-lock bag measuring approximately 8 by 12 inches can
easily store 2 pounds of dental stone material. Each footwear
impression normally can be cast with 2 pounds. With several
premeasured zip-lock bags stored and on hand, the casting of
impressions at the c rime scenewill only involve the addition_of_a few_
"ounTes of water to each bag as needed. The bag can be used to both
mix and pour the dental stone mixture. Those who have tried this
method have found that it is a quick, clean, and convenient method of
casting.
(b) Dental stone, like other gypsum materials is
usually sold in quantities of 25, 50, or 100 pounds. By obtaining a
source of zip-lock bags, approximately 8 by 12 inches in size, these
larger containers of dental stone can be quickly divided into 2 pound
portions in each bag. The bags can be laid on their side and
flattened out to remove the excess air and zipped closed. The bags
will keep the casting material dry and will be convenient to use when
needed.
(c) When the time comes to prepare a cast, the
preprepared zip-lock bags of, dental stone are ready and conveniently
available. To reach the necessary viscosity, dental stone requires
approximately! 5 to 6 | ounces of water per pound. Die stone will
require even less water. For a 2 pound bag of dental stone,
approximatelyJ9 to 10| ounces of water will need to be added. This can
be conveniently done by utilizing a 12 ounce soda can or other
measure. Since the exact amount of casting material will vary
slightly from bag to bag, and the powder-to-water ratio will vary
slightly from one brand of dental stone or die stone to another, the
following procedure is recommended. Pour about two thirds of the
estimated water needed into the bag. Allow the water to soak into the
dental stone for two minutes. Zip the bag closed and mix the casting
material by massaging and gently squeezing the bag. If more water is
needed, add an ounce of water and continue to mix the material. Make
sure that all of the material in the corners of the bag is mixed. If
too much water is accidentally added, simply add a small amount of
dental stone from another bag. The proper viscosity should be that of
pancake batter or thick cream. The mixture should not be watery nor
should it be so thick that it won't flow into an impression. When the
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
*.-7.gr.r'~."'w ;> "''^ ;7 ? T;?: '"
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 172
water and dental stone are completely mixed and the proper viscosity
is reached, the casting material is ready to be poured. This is
easily accomplished by unzipping "the bag and, holding it at ground
level next to the edge of the impression, |and| carefully pouring the
material into the impression.
(d) The zip-lock bag method has proven to be a very
popular one and provides a convenient, clean and rapid way of
preparing a quality cast. If more than one cast is being prepared,
the person conducting the casting can solicit the help of other
individuals to assist in the mixing portion of this process.
~^~ ~~ (2) MIXING DENTAL STONE IN A BUCKET
Although the zip-lock bag method is distinctly favorable
for footwear impressions, the normal size of most tire tread
impressions would necessitate the mixing of larger amounts. If a
large quantity of dental stone is to be mixed at one time in a bucket,
such as for a tire impression, | the quantity of powder to water should
first be determined. For instance, if 10 pounds of dental stone
identical to the aforementioned example is used, where every 2 pounds
of dental stone required 9.6 ounces water, 10 pounds would require 48
ounces of water. | The water should first be added to the bucket and
then the dental stone should be | sifted into the water. The mixture
should be stirred thoroughly when adding the powder and continuously
for at least three minutes. | Once the material is thoroughly! mixed, |
the material can be poured into the impressioned area.
(3) POURING THE CASTING MATERIAL
(a) Whether a form is used or not and whether the
casting material is mixed in zip-lock bags or in buckets, the
procedure and precautions for pouring the casting material into the
impressioned area are the same. Casting material has sufficient
weight and volume to easily erode and destroy valuable detail if it is
carelessly poured directly onto the impression. This is especially
true in the case of fragile soil and sand impressions. When pouring
the casting material from the zip-lock bags, the bag should be placed
next to the impression so that the casting material does not cascade
onto the impression, but instead, falls on the adjacent ground after
which it will flow into the impression. When pouring the material
from a bucket into the impression, a flat stick or a spoon should be
held over an area to the side of the impression. The casting material
can be poured from the bucket onto the stick or spoon in a way so that
the spoon or stick will absorb the impact of the dental stone which
will then flow harmlessly into the impression. With impressions which
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
<v»J
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 173
are on a slope or with impressions which have forms around them, the
casting material could be poured from the bucket onto the higher
ground next to the impression in a way so that the casting material
would then naturally flow into the impression. Again, it should be
emphasized that the entire impression must be filled with casting
material until it has OVERFLOWED.
(b) Sometimes when mixing large amounts of dental
stone in a bucket the viscosity of the dental stone may be ideal at
the beginning of the pour but too viscous by the end of the pour.
This is due to the settling of the mixture. Making sure the dental
stone and water are thoroughly mixed immediately before pouring each
— impression caiFHelp offset - this.
(c) Occasionally, whether the dental stone mixture
is in a bucket or a bag, it is not apparent that the mixture is too
viscous until it has been actually poured. Of course, then it is too
late to change the mixture. The viscous mixture can be encouraged to
flow into the impression simply by taking your finger or a small stick
and vibrating it back and forth on the surface of the mixture. This
will help the dental stone to relax and flow into the impression. Be
careful not to put the stick or finger more than about 1/4 inch below
the surface of the casting material as it might damage the impression.
(d) Before the cast completely hardens, it is
possible to scratch the date, your initials and other needed
information onto the back side of it. An alternate way of identifying
the cast is to set a paper clip into the back of the cast before it
sets. When the cast sets, an identifying tag can be attached to the
paper clip.
(e) The cast should then be left undisturbed for at
least 20 to 30 minutes in warm weather. If the temperature is cold,
the cast should be allowed to sit considerably longer. Many casts
have been destroyed or damaged because they were lifted too soon.
When the time has come to lift the cast, care should be taken so as
not to damage it. If the cast has been poured in sand or loose soil,
it should lift very easily. Casts which are poured in heavier soils
such as mud or clay, may require more careful treatment when being
lifted.
(f)
before cleaning it.
hours.
Allow the cast to air dry for AT LEAST 48 HOURS
It does not reach its total hardness for 24 to 48
(4) CLEANING A DENTAL STONE CAST
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
* v-"r -:»■* ■ ' •y -
.yj . y^.-.E T?^
sy.'tv- ' ^ gre
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 174
Cleaning a dental stone cast should be left to the
examiner after drying for 48 hours and thoroughly attaining maximum
hardness. Dental stone casts made in sand or light soil can be
cleaned simply by using water and a soft brush. Those casts poured in
heavy clay soils which adhere to the cast surface can be cleaned by
submerging the cast in a saturated solution of potassium sulfate for
about 30 - 60 minutes. This will assist in the removal of soil from
its surface. A soft brush can be carefully used to help free stubborn
soil. Afterwards, rinse the cast thoroughly in water and then allow
the cast to thoroughly air dry.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-19.1.3 Lifting Two-Dimensional Impressions from Surfaces
(See MIOG, Part II, 13-6.7 (61).)
Lifting an impression allows for the transfer of a two-
dimensional residue or dust impression to a lifting film giving it
greater contrast. It also allows for it to be transported to the
laboratory and photographed.
Lifting can be accomplished with an electrostatic lifting
device (useful for dry impressions of dry origin), with gelatin
lifting materials (useful for both dry and wet origin impressions) and
adhesive lifting materials (used only for lifting impressions which
have been developed with fingerprint | powder and which are on nonporous
surfaces) . |
IMPRESSIONS
(1) ELECTROSTATIC LIFTING DEVICE FOR LIFTING DRY RESIDUE
- (a) With the electrostatic lifting device, footwear
impressions, can be lifted from virtually any surface, both porous and
nonporous. The device works best on DRY DUST OR DRY RESIDUE FOOTWEAR
IMPRESSIONS WHICH ARE ON SURFACES THAT ARE RELATIVELY CLEAN. For
impressions which fall into that category, the lifting device is
excellent at lifting footwear impressions. If the impressions were
wet when they were made or if they become wet or damp prior to
lifting, the electrostatic lifting device WILL WORK POORLY, OR NOT AT
ALL It is important to understand that THE ELECTROSTATIC LIFTING
DEVICE IS USEFUL FOR DRY IMPRESSIONS AND NOT IMPRESSIONS OF WET
ORIGINS. It is also important to remember that impressions which do
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
yr l ^^J 1 ^y^^^j^|;^v ;yi^:;,^V^pi^>>j^v:Jg-;^rVl';^"^^-l"■«^^»^^•
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ... •:;; ' . .• .
PAGE 13 - 175
not lift are NOT destroyed. Therefore, in cases where it is unknown
whether an impression is of wet or dry origin, the use of the
electrostatic lifting device will not risk the loss of or damage to
the impression.
(b) It has always been a difficult, if not
impossible, to successfully photograph and retrieve certain types of
dust and residue footwear impressions, particularly if the impressions
were on a surface where contrast was poor, on textured surfaces or m
instances where the impressions were either latent or were barely
visible. The electrostatic lifting device now makes it possible to
both locate and retrievejgotwea r impression s of this t ype which have
"been previously overlooked, ignored, or lost in unsuccessful attempts
to retrieve them. In fact, it may also be used to lift totally latent
impressions from surfaces where it is suspected footwear impressions
may be present even though they cannot be seen. It is therefore an
excellent crime scene device which can be used to make a blind
search" of areas where it is likely that the suspect walked and
therefore could potentially contain latent but retrievable dry residue
impressions.
(c) The best way to familiarize oneself with the
usage, applications and limitations of the electrostatic tiding
device is to try a variety of lifting procedures on a variety of both
dry and wet origin impressions and on a variety of surfaces. Equipped
with this knowledge and experience, the use of the electrostatic
lifting device at crime scenes and in laboratory casework becomes an
easy routine.
(d) Not all dry impressions can be "successfully"
lifted Attempts to lift residue footwear impressions on a dirty
surface which itself contains loose residue will result in both the
impression and the background residue being lifted together. The
lifting film will be covered with residue and the footwear impression
will be lost in it. However, if the shoes of the suspect are damp or
I stickyland walkthrough a dirty surface, it may be possible to detect
"negative" impressions where the residue on the surface was removed
| and adhered to the shoe and the negative image of the shoe|sole|
remained.
(2) PROCEDURE FOR USING ELECTROSTATIC LIFTING DEVICES
Most electrostatic lifting kits will be accompanied by
instructions; however, some basic instructions are supplied here. To
lift an impression with the electrostatic lifting device, the
following procedures should be used:
■ H
■■M
4&
V&
■38ft
$
. ;>.*•
w
Sensitive ,
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■■•«?•
77P="
> Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 176
(a) POSITION THE GROUNDING DEVICE
The ground wire of the electrostatic lifting device
must be attached to the ground plate or other grounding material. The
ground plate should be positioned as follows:
1. If at all possible, position the ground
impressioned item. This would be the best choice in
sions on paper, loose carpeting, and other movable
lifting film may be larger than the impressioned
lear chart board or similar nonconductive mate rial
sTparat"^arrd^h^lild~b"e^raced between the"
plate beneath the
the. case of impres
items. Since the
item, a piece of c
"must - be used as a
impressioned item
separated from the
lifting film is in
and the device wil
and the ground plate to keep the lifting film
ground plate. If the metal laminated layer of the
contact with the ground plate, arcing will occur
1 not work.
2. Very often the impression will be on a
surface, such as a tile floor, where the ground plate cannot be placed
beneath the impression. In those instances, position the ground plate
at least 2 inches away from the lifting film and with the metal side
of the ground plate facing the ground or surface.
3. If the impressioned item is on surfaces such
as a door, chair seat, etc., place the ground plate in the best
position to be most effective. In the case of a door, the ground
plate can be taped to the rear side of the door with the metal side
facing the impression. In the case of the chair, it can be taped
alongside the impression on the chair or beneath the seat. To be most
effective, the metal side of the ground plate should be m maximum
contact with the adjacent surface whenever possible.
4. Occasionally, the footwear impression will
be on a metal object such as a car hood, metal cabinet or other metal
object. In those cases, the ground plate can be used or the ground
lead can be attached directly to the car frame or metal object. « N
METAL SURFACES AN ALTERNATE PROCEDURE SHOULD BE USED FOR THE PLACEMENT
OF THE LIFTING FILM. (SEE STEP #2 IN (b) BELOW.)
After positioning the ground plate, attach one end of the ground wire
to it or in the case of a metal object, connect the ground lead to
that object. Plug the other end of the ground lead into the voltage
source.
(b) PREPARE AND POSITION THE LIFTING FILM OVER THE
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
; . - ?; :■ ■ ^'., f v.-!.\* *;.j* ■ },J : .^ :: ',' !!^^^^^FT^^^^& t ^~^^^-r'
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 177
IMPRESSION
1. Position a piece of lifting film over the
impression with the black side facing against the impression. The
black side will face down and the metal laminated side will face up.
The placement of the lifting film should be handled carefully so as
not to disturb or smear the impression. NEVER slide the lifting
material over the surface. The lifting film should not touch any part
of the ground plate. It may be necessary to place a piece of clean
chart board between the impressioned item and the ground plate or to
make other adjustments so that the film and ground plate are not in
c on tact w i th one a no th er . ___ _ _ _._ ___
2. In cases where the impressioned surface is
metal, carefully place a piece of clear, very thin (1 or 2 mil) mylar
or polyester over the impression. Then place a slightly smaller piece
of lifting film, black side down, over the mylar. The mylar should be
bigger than the lifting film to assure that none of the black lifting
film is touching the metal surface. Continue with the lifting
procedure as outlined; however, remember that the lifted impression
will now be on the mylar. The mylar and the black lifting film can be
lifted and kept together to provide the necessary contrast.
3. The electrostatic lifting of some
impressions, particularly those which are latent or which may not be
detectable until after lifting, can leave the crime scene technician
with a lifted impression which can no longer be oriented as to its
direction in the crime scene. It has been suggested that marking the
lifting film and the' impressioned surface will later facilitate the
orientation of the lifted impression. The need for this step should
be considered prior to making any lifts.
(c) PLACE THE PROBE ON THE LIFTING FILM
1. The tip of the hand-held probe should be
held in contact* against an edge of the metal laminated backing of the
lifting film. There is no need to move the probe around during the
charging of the film. It should remain in contact with the film
during the entire procedure. THE VOLTAGE CAN NOW BE TURNED ON. It is
usually only necessary to turn the voltage on a low setting although
in cases where the current must travel through thicker materials, a
higher setting will be required. The application of sufficient
voltage will cause the lifting film to be pulled down tightly against
the impression. In some instances air bubbles will be trapped beneath
the film. These will often disappear in a few seconds. If any air
bubbles remain trapped beneath the film they may be rolled out with a
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines ^ ^ _ ^
Part II
clean fingerprint roller or brayer. This should be done very gently
by lightly passing the roller over the film. The weight of the roller
is all the pressure that should be used. Excessive pressure while
rolling the film may damage the impression. If arcing occurs between
the film and the ground, either the power is set too high or part of
the lifting if ilm is touching or too close to the ground plate.
2. After the power is turned off, allow the
probe to remain in contact with the film for approximately five
seconds for the purpose of discharging the film. When this is done,
the film can be seen to relax as the charge leaves it.
"(d) REMOVE THE LIFTING FILM
1. The film can now be removed from the
impressioned area by carefully peeling it off from one end to the
other. Once the film is removed, lay it on a clean flat surface with
the black side facing up. In a totally dark room examine the film
carefully with oblique light to see if an impression has been
transferred to it. If this is not possible at the crime scene, then
all lifts should be saved until they can be examined in TOTAL
DARKNESS. Film should never be discarded without first CAREFULLY
EXAMINING THE FILM IN A DARKENED ROOM WITH THE AID OF A STRONG OBLIQUE
LIGHT. Many times, film which is viewed in ambient lighting or
without a strong oblique light source will initially appear to contain
no impressions. Further examination of that film in total darkness
with a strong oblique light often reveals the presence of valuable
impressions.
2. Often many residue impressions are so heavy
that the first lifting process actually results in a lifted impression
with too much residue. In those cases, a second lift of the same
impression should be made as it sometimes results in an impression
which appears clearer and much better for examination.
(3)* STORAGE OF THE LIFTING FILM AFTER LIFTING
(a) Lifted impressions are fragile and can easily be
damaged if the film is not secured. The film often contains a
residual charge which can attract other dust and debris or cause the
film to cling to another surface. For that reason, the lifting film
should be protected immediately after being removed from the
impression.
(b) To properly preserve and store the impressioned
item or lifting film containing an impression, it should be stored
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■yj?..
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 179
securely in a folder or in a shallow photographic paper box. Do not
use pizza boxes or similar low-grade cardboard or cardboard boxes as
the residual charge on the lifting film will pull dust from the
cardboard and interfere with the lifted impression. If a folder is
used for the film, place the film on one side of the folder and secure
it with a piece of tape. If the film should slide around in the
folder or is pulled out of the folder while it is closed, the delicate
lift will be damaged. Whenever the lift must be removed, the folder
should be opened first, followed by removal of the lift. When a
shallow box is used, the impressioned item or lift can be taped
securely into the bottom of the box.
-(c)-
w "Items "which contain a dry residue footwear
impression SHOULD NEVER BE WRAPPED IN PLASTIC OR STORED IN A PLASTIC
BAG. If they are, a partial transfer of the impression to the plastic
will take place.
.'■*■*,
\
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-19.1.4 jOther Enhancement /Recovery Considerations
Specialized photographic, physical and chemical
enhancement techniques may be utilized in the Laboratory for all
types of impressions, providing the original impressioned item can be
removed from the scene and submitted to the Laboratory.!
■£*
EFFECTIVE: 04/07/97
■;!f
13-19.1.5 Laboratory Examinations | (See MIOG, Part II, 13-17.5.) |
(1) Footwear Computer Database Collection
Extensive footwear design and reference materials are
maintained in the Laboratory to assist in determining the manufacturer
of a particular shoe or tire design.
(2) If known shoes or tires of suspects are obtained and
transmitted to the Laboratory along with the questioned impression
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
PAGE 13 - 180
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
evidence, the Laboratory can make forensic comparisons and can
determine:
(a) If the suspect's shoes or tires correspond in
design and size with the questioned impressions.
(b) If the suspect's shoes or tires correspond in
wear and other identifying characteristics allowing for A POSITIVE
IDENTIFICATION.
(c) That the shoe or tire designs can be eliminated.
****
;■*&!)
^•H'
;£&.
m
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
| 13-20 | RACKETEERING | RECORDS ANALYSIS
f EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-20.1 Types of Specialized Assistance and Examinations Available
-*"
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-20.1.1 Bookmaking/Numbers Operations
Analysis and interpretation are made of handwritten and
printed systems of recording wagering on sports events; policy and
numbers betting based on horse and dog racing, stock market data,
drawn numbers, etc. Testimony is given concerning interpretation of
records and/or "manner of conducting such gambling operations and
terminology.
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
>■>;■•
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
■../ft
PAGE 13-181
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II . r .
13-20.1.2 Loan Sharking (Shylocking) Records
Analysis of accounting-type notations to determine amount
of outstanding loans, amounts paid in accrued interest and principal,
total number of loans, and true annual rate of interest computed by
the actuarial method.
■■&
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-20.1.3 Prostitution
Prostitution records are analyzed to determine the scope
P f the business, including the number of employees, their roles, gross
and net revenues, and other financial information.
"'is:?''
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-20.1. A Drug Records
Analysis and interpretation of records relating to illicit
drug operations. Records are examined to identify the type of drugs
being distributed, their gross and/or net weights or quantities,
income generated, money flow, number of persons involved and other
like information. Emphasis is placed on supporting drug cases
resulting in judicial proceedings such as grand juries, criminal
trials, sentencing hearings and forfeiture hearings.
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
. Ci""""
13-20.1.5 Lotteries, etc.
Evidence of this nature would include lottery tickets,
sports parlay cards, sweepstakes, tip tickets and boards, punchboards,
and machine tickets. If the printing plates or numbering dies are
located, it may be possible to prove that evidence collected was
printed by the particular plate or die.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive 1
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II . .- '*-r~. . ..:'\'-y\, ■ ,v .
PAGE 13 - 182
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
. •#
13-20.1.6 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
£T$'
| | 13-20. 1.7 Money Laundering
■ — ~ Anal ys"i"s~ana"Tnt er pr e ta t : i oh of records relating to money
laundering business. Cryptic and actual business records are examined
to determine the financial flow of the operations.!
EFFECTIVE: 05/25/90
13-20.2 Types of Gambling Evidence
(1) Sports wagering slips.
(2) Numbers wagering slips.
(3) Summaries of wagering slips or tallies including
adding machine tapes used to calculate wagering or to summarize
writer's accounts. Charting of wagers, systematically done to
determine volume of wagering on various events.
(4) Accounting and financial records or "bottom sheets"
showing numerous accounts (sometimes code-designated), amounts and/or
commissions paid to writers.
(5X Related paraphernalia - sports schedules or line
sheets, sports records materials, dream books, cut cards, parlay
manuals, conversion charts, scratch sheets, racing forms, etc.
(6) Semidestroyed material such as charred, shredded,
torn or wet water-soluble paper.
conversations,
(7) Transcripts of pertinent legally obtained telephone
(8) Mechanical, electro-mechanical and electronic video
■;-M.
■ if
■<%■■.
'•fib-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
M ,. ■ - ■ '.MW. I JJHl.
* . l Sa/gfr ' 5tWf&»ty?-!A-;
' V^-.' ' -'-<i'--V ' ~ ? gHW P Bii!iW.fSyJJ?. ! . ',' ■/ > ■ ' ■'
^Tm T .'^)f
" gWi-HftiyyAt,'".!.*- tHis,'rilk#&
StSB^aasaoEaUibai
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 183
gambling devices, including coin-operated slot machines as well as
devices which electronically simulate or depict the playing of card
games, casino games, bingo, keno, lotteries, and horse races.
EFFECTIVE: 06/26/96
13-21
CRYPTANALYSIS
Because of the unique nature and wide scope of these
examinations and of the material which may be available for -
examination, it may be appropriate to telephonically contact the
| Investigative Operations and Support | Section of the FBI Laboratory to
resolve any questions that might arise.
EFFECTIVE: 03/21/95
13-21.1 Types of Examinations
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/89
13-21.1.1 |Cryptanalytic|
(1) Cryptograms or codes.
(2) Notes or notebooks containing cryptic notations.
(3)- Material containing symbols or unusual literal or
numerical notations.
(4) Correspondence or documents which might contain
hidden intelligence, such as
(a) Marked letters or numbers.
(b) Double meaning, wherein certain words and/or
|j. phrases are given arbitrary meanings by the writer.
--3ft
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 184
(c) Concealment ciphers, where letters or words are
significant according to their positions in the document.
EFFECTIVE: 06/26/96
13-21.1.2 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/89
13-21.2 Material to be Furnished to the Laboratory
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/89
13-21.2.1 |Cryptanalytic|
(1) Any work papers available.
(2) Identity of foreign languages that might be involved.
(3) Information as to what the intent or subject area of
the document might be.
(4) Complete background information on the case.
(5) Special training subject may have received.
(6) Books, code books, cipher machines, pads, tables,
etc., in the subject's possession.
EFFECTIVE: 06/26/96
13-21.2.2 Deleted
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^^■■% 1 T-W'^^-»'^i^i^t:^'iV'''
j^'mzmw
mw& ®U Etow§^8§) stfffim
/
i
"4S-
ft-
■, j
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 185
EFFECTIVE: 11/21/89
13-21.2.3 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87
13-22
POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87
I
13-22.1 General Information
The following general information applies to the polygraph
technique and its use in the FBI:
(1) The theory of detection of deception is predicated
upon the principle that individuals usually manifest certain
physiological reactions when practicing deception, particularly if the
truth might produce an undesirable effect on their personal welfare.
The reactions are primarily involuntary in character and normally
cannot be controlled. During a polygraph examination, changes in the
examinee's respiratory cycle, galvanic skin response and mean blood
pressure and heart rate are recorded simultaneously and continuously
on chart paper during a series of questions. The polygraph chart thus
produced is evaluated to determine if the recorded reactions are of
the type normally associated with truth or deception. |A polygraph
test, however, only determines the examinee's perceptions of the
truth, not actual truth. |
(2)- Based upon the examiner's study of the degree and
nature of changes and variations in the recorded parameters, one of
the following opinions can be reached:
(a) That the recorded responses were not indicative
(b) That the recorded responses were indicative of
(c) That the recorded responses are inconclusive; or
of deception;
deception;
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines ^^ ^ _ ^
Part II
(d) That the examiner expresses no opinion as to the
truthfulness of the examinee due to the incomplete nature of the
examination.
(3) Findings and conclusions resulting from
interpretations of polygraph charts are generally not admissible in
court. There appears to be a trend, however, toward admissibility of
the polygraph test results.
(4) Statements, admissions and confessions obtained
during a polygraph examination are admi s sible^j.n court .
: «s
*
(5) The polygraph may be used for the following purposes:
(a) To aid in determining whether a person has
pertinent knowledge of a particular matter under investigation or
inquiry.
(b) To aid in determining the truthfulness of
statements made or information furnished by a subject, victim,
witness, informant, and/or an individual making allegations.
(c) To obtain information leading to the location of
evidence, individuals or sites of offenses.
(d) To assist in verifying the accuracy and
thoroughness of information furnished by applicants and employees in
certain situations as specified in section 13-22.12 (Applicants) and
section 13-22.13 (Employees).
(6) To enable the Bureau to realize the maximum benefit
from their specialized training and skills and in order that they may
retain their proficiency in the technique, polygraph examiners are to
be utilized primarily as polygraph examiners/interrogation
specialists. F<fr this reason, and in order to ensure that each field
office has equal access to an examiner, "territorial assignments have
been made for polygraph examiners. Examiners assigned to particular
offices are responsible for a territory which includes their own
office of assignment and designated neighboring field office.
Requests for examinations are to be handled on a priority basis
without regard to the examiner's office of assignment. In the event
that the examiner responsible for covering a particular office is
unavailable to conduct an examination that is needed on an expedite
basis, SACs are authorized to coordinate directly with another
neighboring office to obtain the services of an examiner.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■ .^x^Mzir '
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 187
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87
13-22.2 General Policy
The following general policies apply to the use of the
polygraph by the FBI:
(1) The polygraph technique is highly reliable and
valuable as an investigative tool when used by a competent and ethical
examiner.
(2) The polygraph is to be used selectively as an
investigative aid and results considered within the context of a
complete investigation. Polygraph results are not to be relied upon
to the exclusion of other evidence or knowledge obtained during the
course of a complete investigation. Use of the polygraph for
dragnet-type screening of large numbers of suspects or as a substitute
for logical investigation by conventional means is prohibited.
(3) Polygraph examinations will be administered only to
individuals who agree or volunteer to take an examination. In
criminal cases, information concerning a person's refusal to take a
polygraph examination shall appear only in the unproductive
investigation section of the prosecutive report or in the
administrative section of other reports.
(4) The following areas are not to be probed unless
directly relevant to the investigation or inquiry.
(a) Religious beliefs or affiliations
(b) Beliefs and opinions regarding social matters
(c) Information concerning sexual opinions or
practices
(d) Political beliefs and organizational
affiliations of a nonsubversive nature.
(5) Polygraph examinations may only be conducted when the
examiner, in his/her professional judgment, believes the results will
be accurate. All reasonable efforts must be made to ensure accuracy
of the results.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
"?£r r?,-\ ~'v;7£*F~
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 188
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87
13-22.3 Authorization/ Approval for Conducting Examinations
The following guidelines govern authorization for the
conduct of polygraph examinations:
(1) The SAC or person acting for that official may
authorize polygraph examinations in connectio n with an ongoing Bureau
m
case, except as follows:
(a) For authorization regarding polygraph
examinations of Bureau employees and persons who make allegations
against Bureau employees, see 13-22.14.
(b) Examinations conducted as a cooperative service
to other federal agencies must receive prior authorization of the
Assistant Director, Laboratory Division, or person acting for that
official. SACs should forward such requests to Laboratory Division,
Polygraph! Unit, | with recommendations concerning the propriety of the
polygraph examination by a Bureau examiner, consistent with the
factors of 13-22. A, and other pertinent interests of the Bureau.. All
such requests will be considered on a case-by-case basis.
(c) No polygraph examination will be conducted by a
Bureau examiner for a state, county or municipal law enforcement
agency as a police cooperation matter.
(d) Regarding polygraph examinations of defendants
in post-conviction and presentences situations, the SAC may authorize
examinations in those postconviction situations where the polygraph is
used in furtherance of continuing investigative interests, such as
determining if "the defendant perjured himself/herself during trial,
verifying that defendants have fully complied with plea bargaining
arrangements and conditions, determining the accuracy of information
provided by convicted cooperating witnesses and testing the validity
of extenuating and mitigating circumstances bearing on sentencing
considerations. FBIHQ authority is necessary to conduct a polygraph
examination in those situations where the purpose of a proposed,
polygraph examination would be to determine the veracity or guilt of a
defendant with respect to an issue previously determined by trial.
Such situations would include a presentence request or order for a
polygraph examination by a presiding judge to determine in essence
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^r^i
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 189
whether the defendant was really guilty of the offense for which
he/she was convicted.
(2) ) In cases where FBIHQ approval is required, the
authorizing FBIHQ official shall be identified on the Polygraph
Examination Report (FD-498) which is forwarded to FBIHQ.
(3) Only Bureau polygraph examiners are to be used in FBI
cases.
(4) Prior to SAC authority for a polygraph examination in
a Financial Institution Fraud case, Jrt«JJSA_«hould_b^cjmUcte_4.to
ensureThe USA will consider prosecution should a subject be
identified. The result of contact with the USA should be confirmed in
writing by appropriate communication to the USA and reported in all
subsequent communications relating to the polygraph examination. ((See
MIOG, Part I, 29-5.) |
(5) The decision as to whether or not to employ a
polygraph examination must be made with the awareness that it "j"
impact on other prosecutive actions. Therefore, consultation with the
office of the USA should take place where deemed appropriate.
(6) Bureau polygraph examiners are trained to evaluate
the suitability of the polygraph technique and they should be directly
consulted, when possible, as to its applicability and l""t»tiont «
particular situations. Unresolved issues will be referred to the
FBIHQ Polygraph | Uni t. 1
.?
EFFECTIVE: 10/13/95
(13-22.4 Factors to be Considered in Approving Examinations
When evaluating the advisability of utilizing the
polygraph the following factors should be considered:
(1) Determine if investigation by other means has been as
thorough as circumstances reasonably permit, the proposed examinee
has been interviewed and, consistent with the circumstances of the
case, the development of additional information by means of a
polygraph examination is believed essential and timely for further
conduct of the investigation or inquiry.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 190
(2) Ensure that there is reasonable cause to believe that
the person to be examined has knowledge of or was involved in the
matter under inquiry or investigation or if the person is withholding
information relevant to the inquiry or investigation.
(3) Determine if age is a factor. If a minor is to be
examined, ensure a waiver is obtained from a parent or guardian.
(4) Are there any known physical or mental abnormalities?
(5) If the examinee is in custody, can full security and
control be assured? ____— — — — ■—
(6) Will the use of the polygraph jeopardize any local or
Federal prosecution?
(7) What were the results of any prior polygraph
examinations afforded the examinee? |
EFFECTIVE: 09/15/80 v
| 13-22.5 Verification of Information
When information is supplied to the FBI and that
information is not reasonably subject to verification by other
investigative methods, use of the polygraph could be of value.
Utilization of polygraph should be considered prior to making
significant commitments of the Bureau's manpower or financial
resources solely on the basis of unverified information Use of
nolverauh will in no way absolve Agents of their responsibility to
conducTan logical investigation possible by conventional means in
order to verify the truthfulness and accuracy of information
furnished. I
EFFECTIVE: 09/15/80
Sensitive
PRINTED:\ 02/18/98
7VA^-!\'J* 1-TT"
Sensitive
PAGE 13 - 191
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-22.6 Responsibilities of the Case Agent
The case Agent is normally the first person to realize
that a polygraph examination may be helpful to the investigation. In
this regard it is important for the case Agent to understand certain
aspects of polygraph procedure and to be fully aware of the existing
policies concerning the use of the polygraph. A case Agent has the
rollowing responsibilities in connection with polygraph examinations.
(1) Before a case Agent attempts to determine whether a
proposed examinee will consent to an examination, it must first be
ascertained that the SAC concurs in the need for and authorizes the
-4s 1 eVthe-irol y ^aph---ra^ of indtV * du » ls to
submit to a P poIygraph examination is not an efficient or effective
investigative procedure.
(2) When a polygraph examination has been authorized, the
case Agent should promptly reinterview the proposed examinee and
ascertain if he/she will agree to submit to the examination. If the
examinee is agreeable to the test, the case Agent will notify an
examiner from his/her office or, in the event no examiner is assigned,
the examiner of another office assigned to provide such support. The
case Agent will then schedule a time and place for the examination to
be conducted which is mutually agreeable with the examiner and the
proposed examinee.
(3) The case Agent should bring to the attention of the
examiner any previously determined illness or psychiatric condition
which would preclude the conduct of a meaningful polygraph
examination.
(A) If the examinee is suffering from any current illness
or physical condition, consideration should be given to rescheduling
the examination.
(5)* The person to be examined should not be subjected to
lengthy interrogation immediately prior to the examination.
■m
■ife"
min*.
2*
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^Fr^tf^'j ' i^k'^"-' " -^^ 1 "^
qWftS-
Sensitive
Manual o£ Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 192
(7) An investigator who is thoroughly familiar with the
investigation, preferably the case Agent, should be available to
assist the polygraph examiner as required during the test. This
investigator should also be available to take any statement or
confession which the ejtam«eej«yj ! l(5ct_toj£v^
is concluded.
m
EFFECTIVE: 10/13/95
13-22.7 Mental and Physical Fitness of the Examinee
Due to the nature of the polygraph examination the
following guidelines apply:
(1) Persons who are not in sufficiently sound physical or
mental condition will not be afforded a polygraph examination.
(2) A person to be examined should have had adequate food
and rest before the examination. Examinee should not, at the time of
the examination, be under the effects of alcohol, narcotics, drugs,
stimulants, or sedatives. During the pretest interview, the examiner
will specifically inquire of the person to be examined whether or not
he/she is presently receiving or has in the past received medical or
psychiatric treatment or consultation.
(3)" Polygraph examinations will not be conducted if, in
the opinion of the examiner, any of the following inhibit the
individual's ability to respond or otherwise cause the individual to
be an unfit candidate for examination:
(a) It is apparent that the examinee is mentally or
physically fatigued.
(b) The examinee is unduly emotionally upset,
intoxicated, or adversely under the influence of a sedative,
stimulant, or tranquilizer.
.•'Si-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
gavE/V.- -:■'..—*■*
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 193
(c) The examinee is known to be addicted to
narcotics.
(d) The examinee is known to have a mental disorder
which causes the examinee to lose contact with reality or which could
reasonably result in the examinee becoming violent during a test.
(e) The examinee is experiencing physical discomfort
of significant magnitude or appears to possess disabilities or defects
which? in themselves, might cause abnormal physiological reactions.
W
w ShoultTthe examiner or examinee have any doubt
concerning the above conditions, the- matter should be referred to the
FBIHQ Polygraph|Unit[for determination and appropriate action. An
examiner will not attempt to make a psychiatric or physical diagnosis
of an examinee.
(5) If an examiner has any doubt concerning the ability
of an examinee to safely undergo an examination, a statement from the
examinee's physician must be obtained before proceeding with the test.
-$•-■■
■"St.
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
13-22.8 Polygraph Examination Room
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
13-22.8.1 Considerations in Selecting Polygraph Room
The polygraph examination room is of the utmost importance
to professional" and successful examinations. The room should be
relatively free from outside noise and distraction which could break
the mood carefully created by the examiner or which could cause
distortion in the chart tracings and make them difficult or impossible
to interpret. The polygraph room should also have a neat,
professional appearance as such will contribute to the confidence the
examinee has in the examiner-an essential prerequisite for a .
successful examination. Each should include an observation device and
sound reproducer to allow authorized witnesses to see and hear the
activities of the examination.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
:■>$
~*M
.-.!<&£•?.
: !.i%i.
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 194
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
13-22.8.2 Specifications for Polygraph Room
Offices undergoing remodeling or occupying new space
u *a t „ Ill FBIHQ Polyiraph|Unit|for detailed recommendations
should contact the FBIHQ "lygrap | I rooms and furnishings,
and construction specifications for poiygrapn
EFFECTIVE: 10/13/95
13-22.9 Legal Representation of the Examinee
in criminal matters if so requested, the examiner should
provide examinee's attorney a briefing on JJ^^ToSm'th.
Consistent : with othe, : case „ ^J^ •^jSJ^lS'.tt.rn^ .houl*
nT^'he'same room^re the examination is being conducted.
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
13-22.10 Pretest Interview
During the pretest interview the following items will be
covered with the examinee by the examiner.
(1) The examinee will be advised:
( a) Of his/her rights/if appropriate, in accordance
with the "self-incrimination clause" of the Fifth Amendment to the
Constitution anithat an attorney may be obtained and consulted.
(b) That the examination will be conducted only with
the examinee's prior consent.
(c) Of the characteristics and nature of the
. t «- ht,« nroeedures to be followed during the
3fc , phase of the examination.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
* - /:■ ■ v.r/J^ Tgrjr^T-T
■«i,«iji ii I
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 195
(d) Whether the area in which the examination is to
be conducted contains a two-way mirror or other observation device,
and whether the conversation during the examination will be monitored
in whole or in part by any means.
(2) An appropriate consent or agreement form will be
executed. Should the examinee agree to be examined, but refuse to
sign the consent or agreement form, this should be noted on the form
by the examiner and witnessed by one other person. The following
forms will be used for this purpose:
(a) FD-328, Consent to Interview With Polygraph.'
This" form "is to"be~executed" immediately prior' to each - examination7
except those of applicants and employees who are examined under the
provisions of 13-22.13.1 of this manual.
(b) FD-328a, Employee Agreement To Interview with
Polygraph In Connection With An Administrative Interview. This form
is to be executed prior to each examination under the provisions of
13-22.13.1.
(c) FD-328b, Applicant Agreement To Interview With
Polygraph. This form will be executed prior to each examination of an
applicant.
(3) The examiner will discuss the examinee's background
with the examinee and obtain information to complete the necessary
forms and to properly formulate questions.
(4) The matter under investigation, inquiry, or at issue,
will be discussed in detail with the examinee.
(5) The test questions will be formulated by the examiner
based on the case facts and the pretest phase of the examination.
Each question to be used will be thoroughly discussed with the
examinee. Words* and terminology in questions must be completely
understood by the examinee and wording will be in the vernacular of.
the examinee insofar as is possible. The examinee must understand the
full meaning of each question. The questions should be simple,
direct, and designed to elicit a "yes" or "no" answer only. They
should not imply guilt, on the part of the examinee.
.vi*
EFFECTIVE: 12/16/88
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
.M", . ■(* j .»■•■»■
■'■y.W^W^W&l:.--.'
*-i?Sfiirl :
" ^r^^':W*^ v
Sensitive
•■'■a-
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13~22.11 Reporting Procedures
PAGE 13 - 196
The following procedures shall apply in reporting the
results of the polygraph examination:
(1) Normally within ten working days following the
the examiner will forward, by special
completion of each examination, »...« ^^....^ „*..* *.w*..»*u, » 3 *?■*>.*.
preprinted envelope, the following items which will reflect his/her
ults for quality control review by a
rest
^1 V^L4ll|,«w **ll w v x W£l*- , LUC J. VI A J.
preliminary opinion of test r
second certified Bureau examiner
(a) Polygraph Examination Worksheet (FD-497) -
submit original and one copy - to FBIHQ.
(b) Polygraph Examination Report (FD-498) - submit
original and one copy to FBIHQ.
FD-328b)
(if used)
(c) Consent or Agreement form (FD-328, FD-328a, or
(d) Copy of Interrogation, Advice of Rights (FD-395)-
(e) All polygraph charts
(2) As polygraph examination results are not considered
final until completion of the quality control review, preliminary
opinions of truth or deception should not appear in any other document
prior to concurrence in that opinion by polygraph review personnel of
FBIHQ. This includes airtels, teletypes, etc. Examiners should
advise case Agents of the danger involved in transmitting unofficial
or preliminary findings. The Polygraph Examination Report (FD-498) is
to be considered as a draft report until approved by supervisory
personnel at FBIHQ.
(3)* In criminal cases, upon completion of review at FBIHQ
all polygraph documents will be returned to the field. In inquiry
type examinations and those otherwise involving Bureau employees or
applicants, the polygraph documents will be retained at FBIHQ.
(4) In the event it is determined that further testing or
reevaluation is necessary, all documents and charts will again be
forwarded to the Laboratory for additional quality control review
following such reevaluation or retesting. ,
(5) Upon completion of the polygraph examination, an FD-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
:•■■.< :-:.-.v'^.-.X'
" X^f&wjr-s.h W.l&.'rJKiZZJFtt:
: <:-M.i.Asi!ljl : .'.JL-
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 197
302 should be prepared to reflect all relevant admissions made by the
examinee. However, the opinion of the polygraph examiner regarding
indications of truth or deception will be recorded only on the
Polygraph Examination Report (FD-498) , which will be submitted to the
case file in the same manner as other laboratory reports after review
by FBIHQ quality control personnel. If no admissions are made, an FD-
302 is not necessary as all relevant information will be on the FD~
.498,
(6) A copy of all correspondence pertaining to polygraph
matters should be designated for Bufile 80-5, the Polygraph Matters
control file.
(7) Data regarding polygraph examinations and results
(FD-498) is to be reported in the body of investigative reports in the
same manner as other investigative matters.
EFFECTIVE: 10/13/95
13-22.12 Polygraph Examinations of FBI Applicants (See MIOG, Part
I, 67-7.10, Part II, 13-22. 1 (5) (d) .)
(1) All FBI applicants for support and Special Agent (SA)
positions (including on-board support employees who apply for SA
positions) must undergo a polygraph examination focusing on national
security issues, use or sale of illegal drugs and completeness of the
FD-140 (Application for Employment). Standardized testing formats
have been provided to each field polygraph examiner for their use.
These examinations are to receive priority attention and should be
handled in a manner that will expedite the applicant process.
(a) Deleted
(b) Deleted
(c) Deleted
(2) The Special | Agent Applicant Unit (SAAU) and the
Bureau Support Applicant Unit. (BSAU) , | Personnel Division will ensure
that all applicants are advised that they will be required to submit
to a polygraph examination during the processing of their application
and prior to their employment to assist in the resolution of issues
directly related to national security, the FBI guidelines regarding
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■ :T 3W- - *r- '. \ mfX-Xis
-.'I'.'jry.y.y-. 1
r-fMBtg
"•&&
!£*?
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 198
the sale and use of illegal drugs and the accuracy/completeness of the
FD-140 (Application for Employment-FBI).
(3) Any pertinent information developed during the
polygraph examination should be provided in writing by the applicant
on a supplemental information form.
(4) A preemployment polygraph examination is one element
of the overall applicant screening process. It is not to be
considered as a substitute for a thorough and complete background
investigation. The preemployment polygraph test is NOT designed to
assess trustworthiness and suitability in areas NOT covered by the
"examination; ~" '
(5) Failure to submit to a polygraph examination, or
failure to satisfactorily cooperate during the examination will be
considered in determining whether the applicant shall be hired. Prior
to the examination, the examiner will obtain the applicant's agreement
in writing to take the polygraph examination (FD~328b) .
(6) Deleted
'-'#*
.*£
EFFECTIVE: 04/29/97
13-22.12.1 Polygraph Examinations of FBI Applicants
Issues (See MIOG, Part I, 67-7.10.1.)
Drug
(1) All applicants for permanent employment with the FBI
are required to submit to a polygraph examination on specific issues,
i.e., those which relate to their trustworthiness and eligibility for
a "Top Secret" security clearance (security issues) and those which
relate to their use of illegal drugs (drug use) as well as veracity of
information furnished on their application. To address questions and
concerns regarding use of the polygraph for drug issues, an applicant
will be placed in one of three specific categories:
(a) Passed - No Indication of Deception
(b) Failed - Deception Indicated
(c) Inconclusive - Unable to Determine Results
(2) Concerns raised regarding use of the polygraph to
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
HVlV-^^'):V^"^£~
•^^gc;
a-i-i^iiiv
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 199
address drug use and/or results of drug use examinations predominantly
are associated only with the second category — those cases in which an
applicant failed the examination. Cases involving a failed polygraph
examination on drug use will be readily categorized as follows:
(a) Failed - Subsequently Admitted Deception - Drug
Use EXCEEDS FBI Suitability Standards
(b) Failed - Subsequently Admitted Deception - Drug
Use DOES NOT EXCEED FBI Suitability Standards
__ (c) Failed ~ Denies Deception
(3) Applicants whose polygraph results fall into the
first category above merit NO further consideration for employment.
These applicants do not meet FBI suitability standards regarding drug
use.
(4) Applicants who fall into the second category above
are NOT eligible for further applicant processing. A lack of candor
displayed by an applicant during the polygraph phase warrants their
disqualification. Each applicant should be advised of the
significance of candor during the applicant process and advised to
tell the truth prior to their polygraph examination.
(5) Applicants whose drug use polygraph examination
results fall into the last category, "Failed - Denies Deception,"
warrant particular review. In those instances in which an applicant
fails the polygraph on drug use issues and maintains that he/she has
told the truth and can offer no explanation for the deceptive outcome
of his/her polygraph, the FBI will take the following action:
(a) On-Board Support Personnel Applying for the
Special Agent (SA) Position: When an on-board support employee fails
a polygraph examination regarding drug use issues, that fact must be
reported to the Office of Professional Responsibility (OPR) so that an
appropriate inquiry may be conducted. In such cases, the employee
will be required to submit to an interview conducted under the
auspices of an OPR investigation regarding his/her use of, or other
association with illegal drugs, and a signed sworn statement will be
taken from the employee regarding his/her involvement in the illegal
use of drugs. In addition, OPR will conduct appropriate investigation
to determine if the employee has used illegal drugs post-employment
with the FBI and/or used illegal drugs preemployment and failed to
disclose the exact nature or extent of that use to the FBI. During
the course of the OPR inquiry, the employee will be required to again
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 200 ■>*
r _;
submit to a polygraph examination regarding drug use. The second
polygraph examination will be conducted by a polygrapher other than
the individual who administered the first examination. If the
employee fails the second examination, the administrative inquiry will
continue, as may be appropriate, in accordance with current FBI policy
in such matters and no further processing for the SA appointment will
be conducted. If the employee passes the second polygraph examination
regarding drug use and has not admitted deception on the prior
examination or involvement with or use of illegal drugs previously
unknown to the FBI, OPR will complete its inquiries and forward its
findings to the| Adjudi cat ion | Unit. Upon adjudication, | SAAU| will once
again consider the employee for the SA position.
(b) Outside Applicants Who Fail the Polygraph
Examination regarding Drug Use and Deny Deception: Individuals who
seek FBI employment and fail their polygraph examination regarding
drug use will be disqualified from further consideration except in
limited circumstances. Each applicant will be advised by the
Personnel Division of the results of his/her examination and whether
he/she has been determined eligible for further processing.
(6) If an applicant from outside the FBI fails the
polygraph, and maintains that he/she has not been deceptive, he/she
may request to be considered for further applicant processing. This
request should be sent by the applicant directly to the FBIHQ division
head or SAC that previously has been sponsoring the applicant's
employment application. If deemed appropriate by the FBIHQ division
head or SAC, the applicant should be thoroughly interviewed regarding
his/her use/involvement with illegal drugs. This interview should be
conducted by an experienced Special Agent other than the polygrapher
or SA previously involved in processing the applicant for employment.
The result of that interview must be documented in detail in an FD-
302. It will be the responsibility of an FBIHQ division head or SAC
to personally review the applicant's file to determine if further
consideration is warranted on the merits of the case. An FBIHQ
division head or SAC may submit a written recommendation to the
Personnel Division to request that an applicant be given a second
polygraph on the basis of the information developed subsequent to the
polygraph examination. Such information should, of course, provide a
basis justifying the applicant's reexamination. To ensure consistency
and equity in decisions to afford such applicants further
consideration, the Deputy Assistant Director - Personnel Officer,
Personnel Division, will be responsible for approval of the decision
to afford an outside applicant a second polygraph examination.
- in-
sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 201
EFFECTIVE: MIISIVI
13-22.13 Polygraph Examinations of FBI Employees
In addition to other pertinent requirements, the following
policy applies to all polygraph examinations of Bureau employees.
EFFECTIVE: 01/11/85
13-22.13.1 Polygraph Examinations of FBI Employees Who Are Required
to Submit to an Employee Interview (See MIOG, Part I,
263-6(3); II, 13-22.10(2), 13-22.13.2(1), (3),
13-22. 13. 4(1), (3), 13-22.14(2) (c); MAOP, Part I,
1-20(2) (e), 13-4.1.)
(1) When approved in accordance with 13-22.14, an
employee who is required to submit to an employee interview may be
requested to submit to a polygraph examination. The Bureau may draw
an adverse inference from an employee's refusal to submit to such a
polygraph examination, provided that such refusal alone shall not be
the sole basis for disciplinary action against the employee.
(2) In the case of a security clearance adjudication, an
employee's refusal to submit to a polygraph examination has the effect
of denying the Security Programs Manager (SPM) the ability to complete
a favorable security adjudication on the trustworthiness of the
employee. The inability of the SPM to make an affirmative finding of
trustworthiness will result in the revocation of an employee's Top
Secret (TS) security clearance. Since a TS security clearance is a
condition of employment, the FBI Personnel Officer is simultaneously
advised of the revocation decision and thereafter the employee is
dismissed from .the rolls of the FBI.
(3) The following requirements must be satisfied if an
employee is requested to submit to a polygraph examination pursuant to
(1) and (2) above:
(a) The polygraph examination must be conducted in
accordance with Bureau regulations for employee interviews;
(b) The employee must be advised of the consequences
of a refusal to submit to a polygraph examination, and that failure to
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'tVC-V'.-rj,:
rzrz
?&&;%M"^^^^
#m&
Sensitive.
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 202
satisfactorily cooperate during a requested polygraph examination will
be considered a refusal to submit to an examination;
(c) Prior to the examination, the examiner will
obtain the examinee's agreement to be examined or polygraph (FD-328a,
Employee Agreement To Interview With Polygraph In Connection With An
Administrative Interview); and
(d) The investigation must concern a serious
violation of law or policy involving one or more of the following
situations:
1; — The-intentionaland-unauthorized-release-of
sensitive protected information (including, for example, classified
information, investigatory material and information, the disclosure of
which is prohibited by law or regulation) with the reasonable
expectation that it would ultimately be disclosed to those from whom
the information is protected and would seriously and adversely affect
an FBI function;
|j 2. Serious questions concerning an employee's
relationship with or allegiance to a foreign power;
3. The illegal or improper exercise of
influence, coercive or otherwise, by an individual or group on an
employee which could reasonably be expected to seriously affect or
inhibit the employee in the impartial and effective performance of the
employee's duties; or
4. The intentional and unauthorized
destruction, mutilation, alteration, misplacement, taking,
falsification, or other impairment of previously existing Bureau
documents or evidence in the Bureau's possession or control.
5. Use of or unauthorized dealing in controlled
substances, as -defined under the Comprehensive Drug Abuse and
Controlled Substances Act of 1970, Title 21, United States Code, by
Bureau employees during the course of their employment.
6. The furnishing of false statements or the
failure to candidly disclose information concerning prior criminal
activities requested during the course of his/her employment
processing. (See MIOG, Part II, 13-22.13.4.)
| 7. Allegations, evidence or indications of
theft, fraud and/or misuse involving money, credit cards, securities
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
f^m^^m^'^u^w^z^j^sini^sr
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 203
and/or property belonging to, or in the posession of or under the
control of the United States Government.]
EFFECTIVE: 10/13/95 -
13-22.13.2 Polygraph Examinations of Bureau Employees Who Are
Subjects of Criminal Investigations
A polygraph examination may be given to an employee who is
"the subj ect~~ of~a criminal" i nves tT ga t"i bnTi f ~the~"f 61 lowing "requirements
are satisfied:
(1) If the employee is required to submit to the
interview then the polygraph examination given in conjunction with the
interview shall be governed by the policies set forth in 13-22.13.1
above.
(2) If the allegations involve violations of Federal
statutes within the Bureau's investigative jurisdiction, and the
employee is not being required to submit to the interview but is doing
so voluntarily, a polygraph examination may also be given if each of
the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) Current Bureau regulations and procedures for
employee interviews are observed;
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
C
4*
(b) Current Bureau regulations and procedures -• in-
applicable to polygraph examinations in criminal investigations are -<i|F
observed; "?$£.
(c) The employee is requested to submit to a -' '
polygraph examination only in circumstances, in which a nonemployee
would be requested to submit to a polygraph examination; and "
(d) The employee agrees to take the examination
(FD-328, Consent to Interview With Polygraph).
(3) If the allegations involve violations not within the
Bureau's investigative jurisdiction^ polygraph examinations may only . %£.
be given pursuant to 13-22.13.1 or 13-22.13.3.
TcrasaresTsresayre;-
3.
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 204
.«*
EFFECTIVE: 08/17/84
13-22.13.3 Voluntary Polygraph Examination of Employees
An employee may be asked or an employee may ask to undergo
a polygraph examination in the following circumstances:
(1) If the employee is the subject of an FBI criminal
investigation, the use of the polygraph shall be governed by the
policies set forth in 13-22.13.2.
(2) If the employee is not the subject of an FBI criminal
investigation, and the employee is not being required to submit to an
employee interview, but is doing so voluntarily, then the employee may
also be asked to submit to the interview in the form of a polygraph
examination, or the employee may ask for the examination if the
following requirements are satisfied:
:Jt (a) The employee must be advised that the . , 4 ,
examination is totally voluntary; that the employee may change the
decision at any time without any disciplinary action being taken or
adverse inference being drawn;
i
(b) The employee must signify in writing that he or
she is voluntarily submitting to the polygraph examination by
executing FD-328, (Consent To Interview With Polygraph); and
(c) FBI regulations and procedures for employee s
interviews must be observed. "i
EFFECTIVE: 08/17/84
13-22.13.4 Routine and Periodic Use of Polygraph Examinations for v::,i>
Bureau Employees
Is'
(1) Except as provided in 13-22.13.4, routine polygraph -.£
examinations of employees not suspected of being involved in any of ,;i£-
the situations listed in 13-22.13.1 (2) (d) are prohibited. "'■■•$%
(2) Employees who are subjected, or whose circumstances
suggest that they could be subjected, to extremely coercive influences
by an individual or group may be requested to submit to a polygraph
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 205
examination on a periodic basis to determine if the coercive
influences are significantly affecting the performances of their
duties. Coercive influences include, but are not limited to,
relative-hostage situations, extortion, blackmail, and similar
circumstances where it is reasonable to believe that the individual or
group could significantly influence the employee's work performance.
(3) Polygraph examinations authorized by 13-22.13.4 shall
be conducted consistent with the procedures and policies set forth in
13-22.13.1.
EFFECTIVE: 08/17/84
13-22.14 Approval and Conduct of Employee Polygraph Examinations
(See MIOG, Part I, 263-6(3); II, 13-22.3, 13-22.13.1;
MAOP, Part I, 13-4.1.)
| (1) All polygraph examinations of FBI employees and those
who have made allegations against FBI employees must be approved by
the Assistant Director, Inspection Division, or another person
designated by the Director. In the case of polygraph examinations
requested pursuant to a security clearance adjudication, the Director
has delegated approval authority to the Assistant Director, National
| Security Division.
(2) The following standards apply for approval of
polygraph examinations:
| (a) No employee may be requested or asked to submit
to a polygraph examination without an adequate demonstration of facts
or circumstances indicating the need for a polygraph examination of
that individual.
(b) All reasonable efforts must be made to resolve
j allegations or questions before requesting an employee to submit to a
polygraph examination.
j (c) Before any employee is requested to submit to a
polygraph examination, the refusal of which may be used as a factor in
| determining whether the employee| will be [subjected to disciplinary
action (13-22.13.1), there must be a substantial objective basis to
suspect that the individual may be involved in one of, the situations
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
| listed in 13-22.13.1. .
PAGE 13 - 206
(d) (Employees | who are requested or asked to submit
to polygraph examinations will be fully advised of their options and
the potential consequences of the exercise of those options.
(3) Use of the results of polygraph examinations.
(a) Disciplinary action will not be predicated
solely upon the results of a polygraph examination, or upon the
refusal to submit to a polygraph examination. (See (d) .)
(b) The results of a polygraph examination may be
considered with other evidence.
(c) Employees will be furnished the results of a
polygraph examination prior to being subjected to any disciplinary
action based in part on the results of the examination.
(d) An employee's refusal to submit
examination in the case of a security clearance adjudi
effect of denying the Security Programs Manager (SPM)
complete a favorable security adjudication on the trus
the employee. The inability of the SPM to make an aff
of trustworthiness will result in the revocation of an
Secret (TS) security clearance. Since a TS security c
condition of employment, the FBI Personnel Officer is
advised of the revocation decision and thereafter the
dismissed from the rolls of the FBI.
to a polygraph
cation has the
the ability to
tworthiness of
irmative finding
employee's Top
learance is a
simultaneously
employee is
(e) The results of a polygraph examination may be
maintained with the records resulting from the investigations.
Dissemination of such information shall be strictly limited to persons
who have a legitimate right or requirement for access to the
information.
(f) Deliberate or negligent misuse of the results of
polygraph examinations shall be grounds for administrative action.
(A) Polygraph examination of employees will be
administered away from their own office of assignment. This procedure
will help protect the confidentiality of the inquiry/investigation and
lessen the outside pressure on the employee which could be associated
with employee's friends' and associates' knowledge of employee's
participation in examination. (See MIOG, Part I, 263-6(2); MAOP, Part
I, 13-4.1.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'■ . ■ ,y : V " V;: gg?rffr,r
»»:-7rn?j T ;^^. ;
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 207
(5) Polygraph examinations of Bureau employees are to be
administered by. an FBIHQ examiner. In the event an FBIHQ examiner is
not available, the examination will be conducted by an examiner
selected by FBIHQ.
EFFECTIVE: 10/13/95
13-22.15
Sel ecti on, Training, a_nd_ Certification of Polygraph
Examiners
Requirements have been established to ensure that Bureau
examiners meet . the highest standards of integrity, competence, and
professional excellence.
V:*
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87
13-22.15.1 Selection and Training of FBI Polygraph Examiners
(1) To meet future needs for polygraph examiner trainees,
a pool of candidates will be maintained by FBIHQ from which trainees
will be selected. Any Agent interested in being trained in this
investigative specialty should submit a memorandum to the SAC who will
forward the requesting memorandum, with personal recommendations, to
FBIHQ, Attention: Laboratory Division. Interested Agents should
indicate if they are willing to accept transfer or if they desire
consideration only for their current division.
(2) When vacancies occur, trainees will be selected by an
FBIHQ selection board, in coordination with affected SACs.
(3) No Agent will be transferred to fill a polygraph
examiner vacancy without his/her prior concurrence.
(4) Prior to selection, Agents will be interviewed by the
selection board at FBIHQ and undergo a nonspecific polygraph
examination.
(5) The following factors will be evaluated in selection
of Agents to receive polygraph examiner training.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
I^M...,,^^^^. VW|, I
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 208
(a) At least five years' investigative experience
(b) Experience and demonstrated success as
interviewer/interrogator and as case Agent in complex investigations
(c) Ability to perform well under stress and in
confrontational situations
(d) Availability for travel to conduct examinations
in other divisions and throughout own field office territory as
required (should NOT be in a hardship assignment or | have medical
mandates (restrictions) that w ould prohibit the employee from required
travel.)"! - " ~ : !
13-22.15.2 Certification of Examiners
To be certified as an FBI polygraph examiner the following
must be satisfied:
(1) The examiner must be a graduate of a Bureau-approved
polygraph school.
(2) The examiner must successfully complete an internship
consisting of conducting a minimum of 12 examinations with supervision
(e) Good judgment, maturity, dependability, self-
motivation, and ability to work well alone should be clear attributes
of Agent
(f) Willingness to be assigned to a headquarters *-
city office, devote full time to polygraph examiner duties, and forego j&
involvement in other collateral/coordinator-type activities. '^f
'7*-
<:■
■«S*7>
(6) Agents selected for the program will complete the
Polygraph Examiners Training Course at the Department of Defense
Polygraph Institute, Fort McClellan, Alabama. The course, which is
approximately 14 weeks in length, includes instruction in polygraph
theory and procedures, psychology, physiology, semantics, question 'jS
formulation, instrumentation, and legal matters related to polygraph. ,ff
During the course students also conduct 50 polygraph examinations of "Z
persons who participate in mock crime situations. ;■]'
EFFECTIVE: 12/27/93
<ii*-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
(1) Submit requests (Optional Form 170) along with
appropriate details to FBIHQ, Attention: Polygraph Unit.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive ■'?•?
■ ' ■ ■**&
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines - ;■«&
Part II •.:.., ■•„ ..,, PAGE 13.-209 Jp
- •• - - - ■ ' -. v . - • ' " . . '■- ' ' fTTi'
of a certified Bureau examiner. " ■ #ti&
(3) The continued demonstration of proficiency in the ,. Jfa
polygraph techniques. , ■ ,:,^»
(4) The examiner should, if possible, conduct a minimum ••;,
of 48 examinations per year. Examiners assigned duties in direct "■:"%:'
support of the FBI's quality control program at FBIHQ are exempt. \S
(5) The examiner should attend at least one FBI polygraph "jj ;
in-service training course or Bureau-approved polygraph refresher ' -J^.
c ourse or seminar at least every two years. __ • '-"*&
(6) Any examiner who has lost the requirements for
certification can be recertified by successful completion of a Te
Bureau-approved refresher course. In addition, the examiner being _4SJ£
recertified will be required to conduct a minimum of 12 examinations r 0^,
under the supervision of an FBI certified examiner. Upon the "HHC
completion of the above, the FBI certified examiner supervising the ||*t:
examiner for recertif ication will, in writing, forward his/her fjsv
recommendations as to recertif ication to FBIHQ. w'
-ft*.'
EFFECTIVE: 11/23/87 '^;
■ •••■#
13-22.15.3 Refresher Training and Polygraph Seminars •#&■:
Requests to attend refresher training courses, polygraph . ;3 »fe
seminars, and/or meetings of professional polygraph associations ~#|?
should be handled in the following manner: -"iff?'
(2) Expenses incurred in conjunction with approved Cjfij?
attendance at such functions are to be claimed on an expense voucher.
i-rniM
..\tJ.
(3) Pertinent information gleaned at meetings, especially
results of polygraph research, should be furnished to FBIHQ for .
possible distribution to all Bureau examiners. . ( '■"-' . ';fit£
>";•**.
EFFECTIVE: 12/19/86 •:"*§
.■A:
' . ' ." ' iL^K-. r - T' ^" ' - v*-v
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II J PAGE 13 - 210 £'
■••■■•-• Jfc
13-22.15.4 Performance Appraisal ; ""'
(1) Field polygraphers have been assigned two critical
elements by which their performance as polygraph examiners is \i
evaluated. Because of the uniqueness of their responsibilities, i.e.,
frequently serving more than one field division and the review of each «■■.
examination both technically and procedurally through a mandated
quality-control process, these particular elements are rated and
reviewed by Supervisory Special Agent Polygraph Examiners assigned to
FBIHQ. This procedure does not preclude, at the SAC's discretion, the .,
addition of critical elements generated by field offices reflecting
other duties and responsibilities handled by their assign ed
polygraphers.
(2) Only the critical elements relating to polygraph
performance will be rated and reviewed by FBIHQ. If additional
elements are established by the field office, they are to be rated and
reviewed by appropriate field supervisors. All critical elements (the
two prepared for the Polygraph Program and any prepared by the field)
will be combined to determine the overall rating of the employee prior
to forwarding the performance appraisal to the Performance,
Recognition and Awards Unit, jPersonnel {Division.
EFFECTIVE: 04/21/94
| 13-22. 15.5 [ Voice-Stress Devices Prohibited
Use of voice-stress devices to determine the truthful or
deceptive nature of a person's oral statements is prohibited. Only
Bureau-approved polygraph examiners using true polygraph instruments
designed to record at least three physiological parameters including
respiration, heart rate/blood pressure, and galvanic skin response
(GSR), are authorized to conduct detection of deception examinations.
EFFECTIVE: 12/19/86
13-23 I TRANSLATION POLICY (See MAOP, Part I, 22-6.)
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
*4-
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 211
EFFECTIVE: 09/08/93
13-23.1 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 09/08/93
13-23.2 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 09/08/93
v$
13-23.3 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 09/08/93
| 13-23.4 [Deletedj
EFFECTIVE: 09/08/93
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
*Tr*-'V. l! y ■■ ',' ■, ■- '-.S-^'avifivHy^M^-^-^-^'"''^^-' ■'■ ;:'.^'''tf;:;"V.rf-::;v\':t;^-'. , -:'':v:;.'.'
sXhXi-:
6i^,w:^,>-'ii~
*1A
<vs
* ; i|i
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
p ar t II PAGE 13 - 212
13-24 ARTIST CONCEPTIONS
Consideration should be given to the preparation of artist
conception portrait drawings of unknown subjects in selected Bureau
cases. These sketches are prepared by Visual Information Specialists
(VIS) at Headquarters from "look-alike" reference photos selected from
the FBI Facial Identification Catalog and other descriptive data
furnished by witnesses or victims.
EFFECTIVE: 12/10/91
13-24.1 Policy
EFFECTIVE: 12/10/91
13-24.1.1 General |. (See MI 0G, Part II, 13-25. 1. 1(1) .) |
(1) Because of a limited staff of VIS, requests for
artist conceptions other than those where the FBI has investigative
jurisdiction must be approved on the merits of each individual request
by Assistant Director of the Laboratory Division.
(2) In most instances, VIS prepare drawings from
descriptive data transmitted to Special Projects Section via facsimile
machine. If special handling is requested, a composite drawing can be
completed in 2-4 hours. On cases of national import, consideration
will be given to sending the VIS to the field location. A composite
drawing prepared during a hypnosis session would be one such instance.
VIS will participate in accordance with Bureau policy governing use of
hypnosis as an investigative aid.
(3) Offices utilizing Identi-Kits | or other automated
systems [can have these composites modified or redrawn according to
specifications submitted by field office. Although the Identi-Kit
cannot duplicate the skill and versatility provided by the VIS in the
illustration of a facial likeness, it can serve a useful purpose as
one of the methods Bureau offices can employ to prepare composites if
the VIS cannot respond within time limits the field investigation in
progress requires.
(4) As the investigation progresses, the Laboratory,
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
#
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ,, PAGE 13 - 213
Attention: Special Projects Section, should be advised of the use and
effectiveness of the drawing as an investigative aid.
EFFECTIVE: 06/26/96 "*•:
13-24.1.2 Dissemination
(1) The SAC may approve releasing Bureau prepared artist
concept ijons_for LPubHc^t^on_by_the_news^ J55di_a in^ unknown __subject_cases ^_
in which the witnesses have stated the drawing is an excellent
likeness to the unknown subject. After approval is received, file
numbers and issue date information must be removed from the prints
prior to releasing them. This is done by cutting off the bottom •-;:
portion of each print. ^
(2) FBIRQ approval is required before an artist
conception can be used in a circular letter.
EFFECTIVE: 08/16/82
13-24.1.3 Administrative Identification
All artist conceptions should, whenever possible, carry a
Bureau file number, field office file number, and the date that the
drawing was issued. This data will appear at the very bottom of the .
photographic prints of these drawings and may, if desired, remain on
these prints while they are used for investigative purposes. The data
must remain on the prints when they are produced as evidence at trial.
EFFECTIVE: 087 16/82
■.*
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 214
13-24.2 Requesting an Artist Conception
(1) The "look-alike" references from the FBI Facial
Identification Catalog are recorded on an FD-383 (Facial
Identification Fact Sheet) which, along with other detailed
descriptive or illustrative material, is forwarded to the Laboratory,
Attention: Special Projects Section. Requests should be limited to
those cases in which the witnesses can provide detailed descriptions,
have selected a sufficient number of characteristics from the Facial
Identification Catalog, and be reasonably confident they can recognize
a likeness of the unknown subject if a sketch is produced.
"(2) AlT~office~s antl"l ; eTilielit~^gencres - h"aving a facsimile -
device should consider using this device for transmitting the FD-383
and related reference material directly to the Laboratory, Attention:
Special Projects Section, between 8:00 a.m. andJ5:30|p.m. , Washington,
D.C., time. The telephonenumber of this facsimile in the Special
Projects Section is^^^^^^^| Contact FBIHQ during other hours.
(a) Use of the facsimile device will ensure
expeditious handling of the request.
(b) Also, use of FTS line can provide a direct
communication between the artist and the interviewing Agent or witness
when necessary.
EFFECTIVE: 08/16/82
13-24.3
Results of Request
(1) The drawing will be prepared in the Special Projects
Section in the shortest possible time existing priorities permit, and
transmitted to the requesting office by facsimile device for
evaluation by the witnesses. Revisions may be requested by the field
as needed until a good likeness is developed.
(2) Three polaroid copies of the drawing will be sent to
the requesting office by routing slip on the same date as the
facsimile transmission. If more than three Polaroid copies are deemed
necessary, they may be- made using field office facilities or from
suitable local sources after approval of the likeness by the
witnesses. If the extra copies cannot be obtained in the field, they
may be ordered from the Laboratory, Attention: Special Projects
Section.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^
KBMJ-..YV.W 1 .*!,:. 1
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and. Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 215
(3) A similar methodology is used in aging adult
| subjects; however, family photographs are|generaily|not incorporated,
with the subject to achieve the aged image. The addition of facial
| | lines and hair, | increase or decrease in body weight, and a change of
hairstyle are the most common factors used in this process, and these
are borrowed from other facial images available to the artist. .
(4) The value of this technique lies in the fact that
when the computer system is used by an experienced artist, the
rendering is more technically accurate than those produced entirely by
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
H
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-25 FACIAL AGING
Consideration should be given to the preparation of
facially aged photographs of children and adults, using a computerized
aging system located at FBI Headquarters. These aged photographs are
prepared by Visual Information Specialists (VIS) of the Laboratory
Division, '
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-25.1 Policy
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92 J,
13-25.1.1 General
(1) As set forth in the policy statement for Artist
Conceptions, (13-24.1.1) requests for facial aging must be restricted ^
to those cases where the Bureau has jurisdiction. Any exceptions must " 1 %.
be approved by the Assistant Director of the Laboratory Division. --X-
(2) In situations requiring a child's photograph to be 7!*'
aged/updated, photographs of a parent, brother, or sister.
| are | requested as they may be | scanned into the system and incorporated ,.(_'.
with the victim's photograph to produce the aged or projected image of •_;.'"
how the child is likely to appear.
■t.±-K'(
i>
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II PAGE 13 - 216
hand, and it can be produced much faster.
(5) In some instances, it may be advisable or necessary
for the Bureau artist to accompany the case Agent in interviews with
the victim's family.
EFFECTIVE: 06/26/96
13-25.2 Administrative Identification
All aged photographs should, whenever possible, carry a
Bureau file number, and the date that the photograph was issued. This
data will appear at the very bottom of the photographic prints and
may, if desired, remain on these prints while they are used for
investigative purposes. The data must remain on the prints when they
are produced for, or used as, evidence at trial.
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-25.3 Requesting a Facially Aged Photograph
In order to ensure the accuracy with which a photograph
may be aged, the requesting office should submit several of the
highest quality photographs available of the victim/subject, as well
as all pertinent descriptive data regarding the victim/subject, i.e.,
date of birth, facial characteristics, etc. This information should
be forwarded to the Laboratory Division, Attention: Special Projects
Sectiori|by an FD-790 (Special Projects Section Work Order) . |
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 217
13-25.3.1 Results of Request
(1) The aged photograph will be prepared in the Special
Projects Section in the shortest possible time existing priorities
will permit. Revisions may be requested by the field as needed until
a projected likeness is developed.
(2) One black and white, 4" x 5" photographic print of
the aged rendering will be shipped to the requesting office. If more
than one print is deemed necessary, they may be made using field
office facilities or from a suitable local source. If the extra
copies cannot be obtained in the field, they may be ordered from the
"Laboratory _ Di v"iTi on , Atten fion: ~SpeciaT~Proje"c£s — Secfi'oru
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-26
VISUAL AIDS
The Special Projects Section, Laboratory, has the ability
to design and prepare visual aids for investigative and prosecutive
assistance, law enforcement training, as well as for administrative
and informational purposes. (For information concerning artist
conception portrait sketches, see paragraph 13-24 above.)
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-26.1
Requests
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-26.1.1 From FBIHQ
All requests from FBIHQ must be directed to the Special
| Projects Section by|an FD-790| (Special Projects Section Work Order),
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
w r — ip *"* * TPTwryr
; ")* ? " ^ " , "^Ji — V Ty?* T:t '
'.HI' 5.*»?^-'«/-Tr,
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
13-26.1.2 From the Field
PAGE 13 - 218
All requests from the field must be directed to the FBIHQ
Laboratory Division by an FD-790 to the attention of the Special
Projects Section and. must contain the the following:
(1) A general description of the work requested
(2) The purpose and its use
(3) All available reference and explanatory data, and
(4) A sketch, if applicable, which does not have to be
drawn to scale but must contain detailed measurements.
(a) If the request is for an investigative or
prosecutive aid, it is to be submitted to the appropriate substantive
investigative desk at FBIHQ for approval.
(b) Deleted
| (5) The case caption and file number if applicable. |
EFFECTIVE: 09/03/93
13-26.2 Drawings
(1) Two-dimensional visual aids include prosecutive and
investigative aids such as:
(a) Street map for locating evidence, buildings,
witnesses or routes.
(b) Plat map for locating evidence, buildings,
subjects or witnesses.
(c) Terrain map showing wooded areas or other
physical features.
(d) Combination map and photographic display to
illustrate appearance of specific areas.
(e) Floor plan for locating evidence or movement of
■m
■ < (!---
.■&
•SPA
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
' ^iy^<y.'Aw..j« .' i?v : -v »V7^-.^n?wr;
^^2222^^SSSSS2SSSS25S2BE2SS
i vi',jL i .- '*y p ?fr?r'? 1
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
subjects.
PAGE 13 - 219
(£) Diagram to explain check-kiting, telephone
contacts or organizational structures.
(g) Statistical charts, graphs and bar charts.
(h) Enlargement of accounting papers or bank forms.
(2) Drawings will be prepared from information furnished
or if the situation warrants, from on-the-scene data collected by
FBIHQ personnel. Source material that can be used by the Special
Pro jects Sect ion~as~FefeFence"for^Ye^a^
found at municipal and other government offices.
(a) Floor plans at building inspector.
(b) Plat plans at tax assessor.
(c) Street and curb plans at highway department.
(d) Maps at U.S. Geological Survey.
(3) All source material must be verified for accuracy
before submission.
EFFECTIVE: 03/23/92
13-26.3
Models (Three-Dimensional)
(1) When deemed essential and approved by FBIHQ, a
three-dimensional model can be prepared in major cases. The model
will be constructed from measurements, photographs, and on-the-spot
observations' made by FBIHQ personnel to ensure authentication for the
admittance of the model as evidence.
(2) The construction of three-dimensional models for use
in aiding the United States Attorney to present his/her case are
limited to instances when a clear illustration of the facts cannot be
achieved with a two-dimensional chart. In most instances they are.
prepared to scale and are necessarily constructed from data collected
on the scene by the VIS from Special Projects Section.
(3) The cost of preparing the three-dimensional trial
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
i * r Vjffi'' 1 ;.- ■ ?<'>>M5*.-f j^^f J.^- '.',-v-n- :
' J ' -IW i "WW HIfJ ?l **& ■»
_*PW JH J "J. - M.L .".I," !'.,._], I '<_.
' \V*h-^^^ ' ^K'^>v^^;\-T.^Ji> 'T??
1
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II -" ..' PAGE 13 " 220
model limits its use to major cases or those where alternate means of
illustration cannot be used to supply a vital point to the prosecution
of the case. Circumstances often falling within these guidelines
include:
(a) Sections covering two or more physical levels
such as between floors of a building or decks of a ship.
(b) A replica of a mechanical device which cannot be
transported to the courtroom.
(c) A re production of terrain showing altitudes and
distances.
(4) Requests for models should be made reasonably soon
after occurrence of the crime to enable the VIS to construct the model
to represent the scene accurately at time crime was committed.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
| 13-26. 4j Special Investigative Equipment
Special equipment or enclosures can be constructed with
approval of FBIHQ.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
| (13-26.5) Special Surveillance Graphics
With approval of appropriate FBIHQ substantive desk, a
variety of graphic items can be designed and prepared as a
comprehensive package to assist in the staging and operation of
special surveillance activities.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
I 13-27 I RADIATION HAZARDS
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
.m
i'..;
i ' ■ ■?. -All ■ . - >— ■ ■ ■ l r»' ," ' ■ ■ -. ' ,.■■ ' . ' ■ " ii'l.-J Jim" i
M
■1*-
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ■ ■= ;;• ■ ' ■
PAGE 13 - 221
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-27.1
Introduction
■•-,*ps
Radioactive materials are in use in the nuclear power
industry, nuclear weapons industry, academic and industrial research
environments and in medicine. Accidents, death and injuries resulting
from the handling and transportation of radioactive materials have
been few; however, the role of radioactive materials in a terrorist
incident, an extortion or a theft presents a spe cial haz ard to the
investigator. Radiation is invisible and insensible; therefore,
special knowledge about it will enable the investigator to
intelligently evaluate its hazard.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-27.2
■id'
Terminology
■m
. ■,'pms.
m
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
<•"*■
[13-27.2.1 | Atoms
Atoms are small particles of matter which have the
characteristics of an element. For example, gold and silver are both
elements and the smallest particle of gold or silver which can be
identified as gold or silver is an atom of gold or an atom of silver.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
j.^-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part ii PAGE 13- 222
||13-27.2.2| Isotopes
Isotopes are varieties of the same element which have the
same chemical properties but have a different nuclear structure and
therefore different physical properties. For example, we have three
isotopes of hydrogen; namely, Hydrogen One, Hydrogen Two and Hydrogen
Three.
(1) Stable isotopes are ones which are incapable of
spontaneous change and thus are not radioactive.
(2) Unstable isotopes undergo spontaneous changes and
emi f"nuc 1 ear radi¥t i ons . "
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
[ J 13—27.3 1 Nuclear Radiations
I Nuclear radiations involve the emission of energy or
particles from a nucleus.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
| 1 13-27.3. 1 1 Alpha Particle
Alpha particle is a positively charged particle emitted
from a nucleus and similar to a helium nucleus. It has a relatively
large mass with low penetrating power and a short range. Alpha
particles will usually not penetrate the skin but danger occurs when
alpha emitters are introduced into the lungs or intestines.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98 . '*"'$$*'
y ••ii'.a r
7 -tv. , y.- ' - ¥ ' if " ' >■■ ' '■ ' '• " ' * '■'
s&Z&TJ.'.'-'.X^&W^-.K
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 ■ - 223
| 13-27. 3. 2| Beta Particle
Beta particle is a high speed negatively charged electron
emitted from a nucleus. It has little mass, low penetrating power and
a short range. The more energetic particles will penetrate the skin.
Danger is due to skin burns and internal damage if the emitter enters
the body and lodges in a body organ.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-27.3.3 Gamma Ray
Gamma ray is a unit of radiation energy similar (to, but
more energetic than, |x-rays. Gamma rays can do body damage even when
the source is located outside of the body due to their penetrating
power.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-27.3.4 Neutron
Neutron is a subatomic particle which has no electrical
charge and it is one of | two principal jparticles in the nucleus.
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
||13-27.4| Radiation Effects
Nuclear radiations avoid detection by all our senses.
Excessive dosages are normally hazardous. Police activity in or
around radiation areas requires special vigilance. Radiation hazards
are usually considered as either external or internal hazards. ♦
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
is
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
| J 13-27. 4.1 1 External Hazards
PAGE 13 - 224
"Bodily damage can result from overexposure to gamma rays
even though the radioactive material is outside the body. Gamma rays
are external hazards.
•**-
j|l3-27.4.2| Internal Hazards
Bodily~damage~can~resul"t"if-"radioactive~material — emitting'
alpha and beta particles contaminates ' our food or the air we breath
and in this manner is taken into our bodies in excessive amounts.
Alpha and beta particles are considered internal hazards.
)
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
| | 13-27. 5 | Detection Equipment
■fee"'
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
j | 13-27. 5.1 | Survey Meters
Survey meters are portable instruments designed to enable
one to evaluate a particular radiation. They may be designed to
detect and measure alpha, beta and gamma radiation and are used for
the evaluation of contaminated foods and water. Survey meters read
either in roentgens/hour or milliroentgens/hour (1,000 milliroehtgens
- 1 roentgen) .
.-f~
.&£
..&!■
'IS
■ :4...-
;'■ %
■ -■*-•'
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■f^«f
•■-.jg»
igj^%&&at^^^^
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
} [ 13-27.5 . 2 j Dosimeters
PAGE 13 - 225
Dosimeters are pocket-size instruments used to measure the
total beta-gamma dosage accumulated by the person wearing the
dosimeter. Some dosimeters can be read at any time by the wearer
(self-reading dosimeters). Other dosimeters, such as film badges are
not self-reading. These latter-type dosimeters are processed in a
laboratory. Dosimeter readings are normally in roentgens or
milliroentgens.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-27.61
Significance of Detection Equipment Readings
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
| 13-27.6.1 | Roentgen
Roentgen is a standard unit of measure of the energy of
X-ray or gamma radiation which is absorbed. Often the term
milliroentgen, which is one thousandth part of a roentgen, is used.
The following table is a listing of radiation doses and their effects.
Acute Dose (roentgens)
to 50
80 to 120
v
130 to 170
180 to 220
Probable Effect of Total Body Dose
No obvious effect, except possibly
minor blood changes.
Vomiting and nausea for about 1 day in
5 to 10 percent of exposed personnel.
Fatigue but no serious disability.
Vomiting and nausea of about 1 day,
followed by other symptoms of
radiation sickness in about 25 percent
of personnel. No deaths anticipated.
Vomiting and nausea for about 1 day,
followed by other symptoms of
radiation sickness in about 50 percent
of personnel. No deaths anticipated.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
T^Jt^^^^T^sr^TT^T^i^TT!
^''A^^'^^l^ivS'^^'S^^^vi^
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ,
PAGE 13 - 226
270 to 330
Vomiting and nausea in nearly all
personnel on first day, followed by
other symptoms of radiation sickness.
About 20 percent deaths within 2 to 6
weeks after exposure; survivors
convalescent about 6 months.
400 to 500
Vomiting and nausea in all personnel
on first day, followed by other
symptoms of radiation sickness. About
50 percent deaths within 1 month;
survivors convalescent for about 6
months.
550 to 750
750 to 1000
Vomiting and nausea in all personnel
within 4 hours from exposure, followed
by other symptoms of radiation
sickness. Up to 100 percent deaths;
survivors convalescent for about 6
months.
Vomiting and nausea in all personnel
within 1 to 2 hours. Probably no
survivors from radiation sickness.
w
1000 to 5000
Incapacitation almost immediately. All
personnel will be fatalities within 1
week.
EFFECTIVE: 05/26/89
13-27.7
Radiation Protection
the following factors should be considered when evaluating
available protection.
(1) If all containers of radioactive material are sealed
or closed and are INTACT it is unlikely that radioactive hazards are
associated with the incident. Efforts should be made to protect the
integrity of the containers during essential rescue, salvage and
clean-up operations. . .
33v
!?§•■'
(2) If radioactive isotopes become loose from the
container or are liberated by a handling accident the following
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
#?-;
- 1.. |»wi»'.v,"» ' "- g ".. ' , ''' ?V * y^y-^^vy?^ t VA , WW y H^T'>^^7-^f-^^ , ' ! ^ ? ^sy.^{i ' Hr
I'O.ftVJt'.^S'.gfeN'gaVv'Ji.V-'rSA^'A-.g.','
■■&■■
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part. II
factors should be understood.
PAGE 13 - 227
: M
(a) DISTANCE. The distance between individuals and
the isotope source appreciably decreases radiation] intensity with this
reduction being described by an "inverse R squared" relationship, j In
most cases, for example, the distance of 2 feet from the source will
decrease the radiation to one-quarter its value at 1 foot; a distance -
of 10 feet from the source will decrease the radiation to one-
hundredth its value at 1 foot.
J
- (b) TIME. The time one spends in the radiation
field should be kept to an absolute minimum. A 2-hour exposure in a
radiation-field-wi-1-l—be -twiceas- large-as-a-1-hour exposure.
(c) SHIELDING. Dense materials such as steel,
concrete and dirt between the individual and the source can cut down
the intensity of gamma radiation. Most gamma-emitting radioisotopes
emit radiation of less than one million electron| volts per gamma ray. |
Generally, the radiation may be cut in half by 1 1/2 inches of steel,
4 1/2 inches of concrete, 7 1/2 inches of earth, or 10 inches of
water.
(d) CONTAINMENT. Restriction of the radioisotopes to
a limited area will help to establish boundaries for the hazard.
Efforts should be made to keep the radioisotopes from scattering. If
there is a fire associated with an incident, high pressure hoses might
break open containers and widely distribute the radioisotopes.
Vehicles and individuals repeatedly entering the area could track away
any radioisotopes from incidents involving spills of radioactive
materials. Such travel should be limited to that which is absolutely
necessary.
(3) External and/or internal hazards can be present
whenever radioactive materials are found. If it is not known what the
hazards are, assume both to be present. To protect against internal
hazards, personnel- should wear breathing masks or some type of filter
system over the nose or mouth. If possible, all personnel should be
kept upwind from the scene of the incident and all smoking and eating
should be prohibited in the restricted area. Personnel entering the
area where there is radioactive dust should be wearing disposable or
washable outer clothing.
M
w
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
W^?&Z££MV%$3i-
Sensitive
i&A
4\i
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
PAGE 13 - 228
«8j
-\
13-27,8
Emergency Procedures for Accident or Incident
(1) Keep all but essential rescue and investigative
personnel away from the immediate accident scene.
(2) Report the accident or incident immediately to the
nearest Department of Energy facility or military base, whichever is
appropriate. ^
(3) | Contact the Strategic Information Operations Center
(SIOC) at FBIHQ, which will in turn contact the Hazardous Materials
Response Unit (HMRU) of the Laboratory Division. |
possible.
)\
(4) | Keep sightseers away - 500 yards or more, if
(5) | Stay out of smoke or vapors if there is fire.
| (6) | Hold people who may have been exposed to the
contamination in an area for appropriate examination by emergency
personnel.
| (7) | Do not fight fires involving explosives except under
the direction of an expert.
| (8) j Do not permit the taking of souvenirs.
| (9) | Keep unauthorized personnel from entering the scene.
'W
m
■A
•;.«.,-
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
| 13-28 | DELETED |
'•■'3-fl.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
z-7r—---;w:*-\.T, r^
' .-i^r ** -, r . J vy»;i ; ,, »;. ' : ■ ;, ■ V^J^.-J.ij.JW'iWr ' ' - -'' ' **r:^ '^ '. ' -<,-' ' -<i''-''^v. l i.v^£v;
ri^^~^^ri^£^W-a?^^A^ jq^|V^^^?^gV
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 229
EFFECTIVE: 03/21/95
13-28.1 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 03/21/95
$r
13-28.2 Deleted
EFFECTIVE: 03/21/95
'W
13-29 (MOVED TO 13-7.6.1
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-29.1 (Moved to 13-7.6. l|
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-29.2 iMoved to 13-7.6.1
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
'-■&t.
^m
^t. - t/j: ; ^ ■ lu&^ ' t^^^ ^ ^
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 230
EFFECTIVE: 07/25/97
13-29.3 Moved to 13-7.6.1
EFFECTIVE: 07/28/97
113-30
COMPUTER ANALYSIS AND RESPONSE TEAM (CART)
IS
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
| 13-30.1 General Information
(1) Since 1984, when the FBI Laboratory began examining
computer-based evidence, the widespread use of computers and the
rapidly developing technology of computer systems, have combined to
dramatically increase the volume and complexity of computer evidence
seized by FBI Agents. Today, FBI Agents routinely encounter
computers in cases dealing with health care fraud, child pornography,
terrorism, murder, drugs, financial institution fraud, public
corruption, and in almost every other investigative classification
for which the FBI is responsible.
(2) A real danger exists that well-intentioned efforts on
the part of untrained field investigators can affect important
evidence and may either render it unavailable to the investigator or
inadmissable at the time of trial. Another danger is that the FBI
will incur some civil liability for damage or destroyed computer data
belonging to a subject or a third party. In 1992, the Laboratory
Division's Computer Analysis and Response Team (CART) was formed to
address these problems.
(3) The primary mission of CART, whether in the field or
in. the Laboratory, is to provide the investigator who encounters
computer evidence with reliable, comprehensive, and timely
Sensitive •>
PRINTED: 02/18/98,
o&saHss
j-rt^j!Kw:j'.>^^/w;^*it''g^
<■ ^ ^g'B« ^ /■^ ^ *,'. !*
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 231
information and technical support necessary to the investigation and
prosecution of the case. These mission objectives are met through a
mutually supporting task organization consisting of:
(a) A state-of-the-art forensic capability comprised
of computer scientists. and engineers, CART, centrally located in the
Laboratory Division;
(b) A network of specially trained and equipped
Field Examiners (FEs) , assigned to selected field offices and serving
regional requirements.
In a typical case:
1. The case Agent who expects to encounter
computer-based information (usually in executing a search warrant)
consults with an FE who is trained and equipped to handle most
situations. The FE will determine whether or not he/she can operate
independently or needs CART HQ assistance.
2. At the search site, the CART Examiner will
determine what computer systems should be seized and brought back to
the office for examination. If the warrant does not allow the
seizure of equipment, the CART Examiner should be able to copy the
data onto medium suitable for examination at the field office. CART
HQ will be on stand-by to offer consultation should unsuspected
circumstances be encountered.
3. After the equipment is seized and
transported to the field office, the FE will conduct triage to
determine if the examination can be handled in the field office or if
all, or part, must be sent to the Laboratory Division for
examination. Every effort will be made to examine the evidence in
the field office.
-&
M
.;•#?
!,*!'
■>&■■
4. The FE in consultation with the case Agent
will determine what data is necessary from the seized computer and in
what format to best present the data. "\
5. The FE will recover the necessary data using
techniques and protocols developed by CART and provided to the FE by
CART. These utilities reside on specialized hardware platforms which
have also been provided to the FE by CART. The examiner will be
familiar with these procedures and trained in their use under CART
direction.
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^^ms^^ai
TJ?'
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 232
6. At trial, the FE will be able to describe
and defend his/her actions. If questions arise regarding the
protocols used, CART will provide, when needed, experts who can
explain CART's protocols.
(4) FEs are assigned to serve regions. These regions
represent the best allocation of resources based on analyses of
evidence submissions to CART and in consultation with the Criminal
Investigative Division (Clb) concerning investigative priorities.
"EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97"
13-30.2 Authorization/Approval for Conducting Exams/Searches (See
MIOG, Part II, 13-30.4.)
(1) No action with respect to original computer evidence
should be taken without consulting with one of the certified Computer
Analysis and Response Team (CART) Examiners on the field list or CART
at FBIHQ. In addition, no review of computer evidence should be
performed without the supervision and/or consultation of a CART
examiner.
(2) The following guidelines govern requests for CART
support:
Any Agent who requires an examination of computer evidence or requires
search assistance must contact their regional Field Examiner (FE) .
During emergency situations, if an FE is not able to be contacted,
the CART Program Manager or Unit Chief should be contacted. After
hours, contact CART through the FBIHQ switchboard operator. All
requests for search assistance or computer examinations must be
forwarded as a lead to the appropriate FE by an electronic
communication (EC) or teletype. The EC should be sent to the field
office of the FE and the Laboratory Division, Attention: CART. The
first CASE ID# must be 66-HQ-C1 155003 with the second CASE ID# as
the substantive Universal Case File Number (UC FN) . The EC should be
titled "Computer Analysis and Response Team, Field Examiner
Operations." If desired, the title, of the case may be included as a
dual-captioned title or included in the synopsis field of the EC.
Whenever possible, FEs should be telephonically contacted prior to
sending a written communication and that FE should be named in the
attention line of the EC.
^
:</r
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
■^^^riS^iX^^^^ ^CSi^.:
agagMaaj^AswaMaa.^^
S?j?5PR??s3355?3?53?5S5r
"'V
■ir
"1P
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II -;... -..-""•..,
PAGE 13 - 233
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
13-30.3 Responsibilities of the Case Agent
(1) The case Agent is normally the first person to
realize that Computer Analysis and Response Team (CART) support may
be hel pful t o the investi g ation. In this regard , i t is i mporta nt for
the case Agent to understand certain aspects of computer evidence
searches and examinations and to be fully aware of the existing
policies concerning computer evidence searches and examinations. A
case Agent has the following responsibilities in connection with
computer evidence searches and examinations:
- ?$~
Before an affidavit in support of a search warrant is written, the
case Agent should consult with their regional CART Field Examiner
(FE) to ensure proper justification is given for seizing the
equipment and software needed to properly analyze the seized computer
evidence. The case Agent should attempt to identify the types of
computers, networks, and operating systems in use at the location to
be searched. This will help the FE to determine what assets will be
needed to conduct the search and process the evidence. The case
Agent should advise the FE as to the types of electronic records
believed to be contained on the evidence to be seized. This
information is required in determining what equipment should be
seized as well as how the examination of the evidence will be
conducted.
(2) By providing the above information, the case Agent
will maximize the results of the search warrant and ensure the
forensic examination of their evidence will proceed in a quick and
efficient manner. :~
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
«
mi
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
•"V$|S-
^nR^I
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ... ■
PAGE 13 - 234
13-30.4 Submission of Evidence
(1) When it has been determined that evidence needs to be
shipped either to a regional Field Examiner (FE) or the FBI
Laboratory, the evidence must be processed through the field office's
Evidence Control Technician (ECT) . The ECT will ensure that proper
chain of custody rules are followed. For assistance in packing
computer evidence for shipping, the. case Agent should contact the ECT
in their field office.
(2) The evidence should be accompanied by an electronic
communication (EC) as d'escr"ibe"d~in _ MI0G~Part~II7" 13-3072,
Authorization/Approval for Conducting Exams/Searches.
'■-*M.>
- &)§£?
... i,?^l*"
I
. «:,'.
"--.".tor
m
■ '0- ■
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
'Si
13-30. 5 Types of Computer Analysis and Response Team Support
(1) The Computer Analysis and- Response Team (CART) can
provide timely and accurate examinations of computers, diskettes,
optical disks, tape backups, and other electronic media. CART can
provide on-site field support as needed for execution of search
warrants and examinations of computer systems which cannot be sent to
a regional Field Examiner (FE) or the FBI. Laboratory. CART can also
provide on-site consultation with investigators and prosecutors in
the development of strategies for the seizure of computer records and
equipment. CART examiners will provide testimony as to examination
procedures andresults.
''If
(2) " In addition to the retrieval of records, CART V"
Capabilities include but are not limited to the retrieval of deleted,
erased, and hidden data, the ability to break passwords and
encryption schemes, and the examination of computer code to determine
the effect of that code.
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
- - y,
- - A*/.;
ijm
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
- i*i
'i^m^^^K'i^-A*-^&e^!^^SxSts»^i,'if.
^^?>&'fSa'ȣ>;%:^Wf^
«HaaaMB»gMBSSV6S«i
ryjsyjabw^^-^fa^'j^'^w^ww--
Sensitive'
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II
PAGE 13 - 235
■:&;
28.
| 13-30.6 Field Examiner Program
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
| 13-30.6.1 Selection of Field Examiners
" (1) Computer Analysis and~Response Team (CART)~FIeTd —
Examiners (FEs) are selected by the CART Program Manager and
scientific staff from among candidates nominated by Special Agents in
Charge (SACs) based on education, training, experience, desire to
participate in the program, and willingness to travel extensively
while servicing needs of Bureau offices within the FE's region.
Candidates with formal education in science or engineering will be
preferred. Investigative skills and experience complement the
forensic work and Special Agents are preferred as FEs.
(2) Selectees will have sufficient academic background
and experience towards qualifications as an expert witness and to
communicate technical matters effectively to nontechnical audiences.
They will be technically innovative, demonstrate excellent problem-
solving abilities, and be able to work independently. They will be
available to devote at least 50 percent of their time to FE-related
duties to ensure their special skills are used sufficiently to retain
proficiency". They must meet the certification requirements of the
Laboratory Division and CART and be able to serve at least two years
as an FE. ,
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
its??.
:£«■
■■■■!$#■
"&*
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
y^/gn^ ^^^ ' ^a^
22<>jsmv;
^^^B^S^S^H
■«^j«arA
■-*'? ^>* r :';'^.'» **v
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II ■ - 1 . • ■ '
PAGE 13 - 236
13-30.6.2 Training and Certification of Field Examiners
(1) Continuous education and training will be provided by
the Laboratory Division's Computer Analysis and Response Team (CART)'
in the form of yearly in-service courses, commercially available
training at- the Field Examiner's (FE) home city, unique law
enforcement courses provided by such professional organizations as
the International Association of Computer Investigative Specialists
(IACIS) and the Federal Law Enforcement Training Center (FLETC) , etc.
This continuous training will be sponsored and paid for by the FBI
Laboratory or Government Employees Training Act (GETA) funds as
appropriate.
(2) The CART training program will provide examiners with
a broad base of computer knowledge for performing effective searches
and proper forensic examinations and ensure that examiners are
qualified and prepared to testify in court.
(3) CART training consists of two phases. The first
phase, known as the general-education phase, lasts one to two years
and ensures all examiners share a common knowledge base and
qualifications. The second phase, known as the continuing-
education phase, allows examiners to hone their skills and gain
exposure to many technologies. The continuing-education phase
continues throughout the examiner's career.
(4) The general-education phase culminates when the
examiner receives his/her CART certification. Certification hinges
on several factors. First, the examiner must complete all of the
commercial training required. Second, the examiner must demonstrate
technical proficiency. FEs accomplish this during a Lab Practicum at
the FBI Laboratory. Finally, the FE must successfully complete moot
court at a CART In-Service. ''•■'.'
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
~"W&'
- "■*£•
■ '%#
■•-safe
■ ^
<V*fcfc
m
'>T§SS
W?l
Sensitive y
PRINTED: 02/18/98
^^^■^
i^j^smim^^s^issm^^.^^^ir^?^^^'
!K8S3feiR!A5
&B32®x®!i!&z&8ti®s&3aa®&:
r
•■«r,v
Sensitive
St
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II .
PAGE 13 - 237
13-30.6.3 Field Examiner Equipment
For each Field Examiner (FE) , hardware and software
modules are provided by the Laboratory Division. This equipment
remains on the inventory of the Laboratory Division but is assigned
to the individual FE. Likewise, the software is assigned to
individual FEs in their own names. When an FE leaves the program
his/her equipment and software will either be reassigned to another
FE or will be returned to the Laboratory Division.
■■i£p
■ ,»w.
..■wife
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
13-30.6.4 Field Examiner Work Space
Field Examiners (FEs) have several unique requirements for
their work space. The most important requirement is a secure work
space to store evidence as it is being examined. Therefore, a secure
room with access controlled by the FE is preferred. There should be
adequate electrical service to support simultaneous operation of
several computer systems. There should also be adequate ventilation
to dissipate the heat generated by multiple computer systems. A
telephone line is required in the FE's space to facilitate electronic
communication between the FE and Computer Analysis and Response Team
(CART), FBIHQ.
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
13-30.6.5 Reporting Procedures for Field Examiners
Upon completion of a forensic examination, the Field
Examiner is required to send an FD-302 report and any documents
printed to the case Agent for inclusion into the substantive case
file. A copy of the FD-302 report should also be sent to the .
66-HQ-C1 155003 control file.i
M0
/hi
-'SS
•-.f!«r
-'•ST'"
■M
* £ i! > *
■■JT
■->m
■ V-
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
&&5asaBH^i&^^^
553SE
— -•■•r , - v :, j ; i ss^
;!*;^'Vr..\...
\+ -':""
Sensitive
Manual of Investigative Operations and Guidelines
Part II .;,.,.,..,. . . ■'-.. . ■■:',:
PAGE 13 - 238
EFFECTIVE: 02/28/97
-..«->
\
^
w
m
■■<&e
.1?
^
v -fir,*
Sensitive
PRINTED: 02/18/98
&!&?:■
, *!muu^p tM u - w ^±!-u . t . .£^m*j^^
Open Library
